Home

CamControl LITE 4.41 Manual - bei der HeiTel Digital Video GmbH

1. Prefix 1 Prefix 2 In these boxes you can enter two dialling strings that are sent to the modem GSM adapter ISDN TA before the actual number and that control the dialling procedure In most cases you will only need one dialling string In this case enter ATD default setting in the Prefix 1 box Prefix 1 is used as the dial command for all transmitter entries by default If you want to reach both analogue transmitters and ISDN transmitters and are using an ISDN adapter that supports both analogue and ISDN connections you can configure one prefix for the analogue connections and the other for the ISDN connections You then allocate them to the relevant transmitters in the Transmitter data dialogue box see Configuring the transmitter index on page 88 Consult the manual for your ISDN TA to find out whether such dialling control is possible and how to use it Refer to your modem manual for further dialling controls Sample prefix ZyXel Omni net LCD M e Prefix 1 ATDI force ISDN connection e Prefix 2 ATDN force analogue connection 84 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 6 7 Serial Channel The transparent serial channel provides a simple way to transfer any kind of data between receiver PC and transmitter during image transmission e g control of pan tilt cameras Transmitter with transparent data interface Device with RS 232 remote control interface RS 232 Device with RS 232
2. 000 occ e cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 4 3 The Program Interface 20 0 0 e cece ccc c cece cee ceceeseeeeeees 16 4 4 Establishing a connection 0000 e cece eee cece cece cence ee eeeeeeeeaes 18 4 5 The central control panel 22 2 coco ec e ccc eee cece ccceeeeccceeeeeees 22 4 6 Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer 34 4 7 Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG 2002 2 o ooo eee eee eee cece eee 51 4 8 PTZ control and remote adapter 0 222220 c cece eee ccc ce eee e eee ceceeees 53 4 9 Audio transmission lt 2 2 82 2 6 2c neces asks 3 ss bds Pasha ead bs Dees ROSE Ses Geceeeehee bec 60 5 Offline Access cote a so Beha boc anode ese Sa oes Renee ee eee ae 63 5 1 Receiver archive PC archive 0 0000000 c cece cece cee cece ee eeeeeeees 63 5 2 Accessing other archives 0 00 2 22 eee c cece cece cece ceeceeeeeees 70 6 Receiver Software Settings 0000 eee eee eee cece eeeeeeeeeeees 71 6 1 Take aicallll sarene Mere Se anche eae oe a dears ale oleae etches Nude noes Meee ous 72 02 User toe haere sah OD ee sass Cela sees i el ad ffs ee Cea le Salus Td ea EB 74 oE gt EXUlAS 2 ccc autc added cate ESAE saaaueleogl bid douse EEEE 75 0 4 ET COMNCCE 224 ce oe Mie tue Ate SoS Rte oe ay De a De ge a A oh Ls OF aes 77 CS PGlAICHIVEs tcc dtr eet aaa hee a a tg IAA a Ne ERS 78 ON o M cc 80 Of Seal G
3. Drawing tools omms tine tt aSa catin New Aea NewMask Clearselected Cearall Calibration if x A In the example above an alarm will only be released if an intruder enters the premises in the direction of the arrow Any vehicle or person leaving the area will not trigger an alarm The Bidirectional option will release alarms in case of movement in both directions along the arrow You can only define one direction per detection area However if you define two overlapping detection areas you can e g define and thus combine two orthogonal directions to be detected to prevent diagonal movement from triggering alarms 7 27 5 Applying the settings After having set up the mask and detection zones for all cameras click on Save settings to save the settings To return to the Recorder settings dialogue window click Cancel or switch the display to the Recorder settings dialogue and click on Close Configuration windows Then click on OK in the Recorder settings dialogue to apply the settings The following prompt is displayed G Save Recorder Settings Do you really want to save the new settings V Save as configuration profile Load configuration profile OK Cancel To reject the changes click on Cancel To save the settings in a profile activate the Save as configuration profile checkbox and click on OK The setup is then sent to the device and store
4. Normally opened z Off X fi Os i Help Note A switching state at the inputs must last at least 0 5 seconds to be certain that the transmitter detects it Note on CamServer 2c and video systems of the VG Series eee Normally opened X Normally opened _ F Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normally closed BS 8418 Besides the conventional wiring of the following control inputs as normally closed contact and normally open contact CamServer 2c and the video systems of the VG series also support the voltage monitored circuit variants resistance monitoring 10k and the BS 8418 compliant normally closed contact For more information refer to section Specification of the control inputs on page 295 Control and monitoring functions Every camera control input designation on the video system Control in 1 to Control in 10 if applicable can independently trigger receiver dial up CamControl LITE reports this alarm cause in the status bar and automatically activates the corresponding camera 26936_02 151 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Alarm triggering video If there is no active connection to a receiver a video image from the image relevant camera is recorded for CamTel VG and CamTel SVR transmitters when a camera control input is enabled This alarm image will be transmitted first if the transmitter subsequently establishes an alarm connection to
5. Event partion and continuous partition lt Event partition size 6 84 GB Continuous E POS ATM IBIS Audio Track settings fee video 1 in fee Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recordin E Video 2 in Copy to all timer OK Diverse Cancel J Record preview images s Ee SST J Overwrite protection I Warming at fo te archive state J Report period less than 20 I days Help J7 Delete all pictures older than 30 E days 176 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Event partition and continuous recording partition Every camera track can be divided into an event partition and a continuous recording partition Partition size depends on total track size see Track settings on page 175 and can be set using the slider Changing the size of the partition of one recording mode automatically causes the size of the partition of the other recording mode to change The maximum partition size of one recording mode can equal total track size You can therefore use the slider to configure the track for event recording only continuous recording only or a combination of both recording modes The sizes of each individual partition are indicated as you move the slider to make things easier Once you stop moving the slider and allow the cursor to rest on it the division of the track is shown as a percentage for about three seconds If y
6. AVI Compressor r Select export time window ANI Clip avi Start Add on screen information Microsoft Video 1 Export archive hpx 29 January 2008 Create Sel Playing archive 10 12 00 Export pict f track J xport pictures of trac End Track 1 Dome Camera Kiel 9 pepe Export also E 2 Static r Export status g ox 10 Status Exporting pictures Estimated file size Exported pictures 3 Elapsed Time 00 00 31 Available pictures 241 Remaining Time 01 03 25 Actual track 1 Dome Camera Kiel Export settings Configure the following settings to export image sequences 1 Select the file type AVI Clip or Export archive under Target If you select AVI as the export format a preview of the current image being exported is shown If you select the HeiTel export archive the selected image sequence is written to a file that can be accessed as usual with the CamControl PLAYER 2 When exporting AVI files the transmitter name and camera name can also be displayed in the image as additional information To do this click Add on screen information When exporting to the hpx format select the option Create Self Playing archive This will create an executable exe file containing the CamControl PLAYER software for playback 3 Select a compression type when exporting an AVI file 4 Enter the start and end time of the image sequence to be exported und
7. BTNTEXT_6 Description Relay 6 BTNTEXT_7 Description Relay 7 BTNTEXT_8 Description Relay 8 maximum 12 characters maximum 12 characters BTNTEXT_1 Description Relay 1 maximum 12 characters BTNTEXT_2 Description Relay 2 maximum 12 characters BTNTEXT_3 Description Relay 3 maximum 12 characters BTNTEXT_4 Description Relay 4 maximum 12 characters BTNTEXT_5 Description Relay 5 maximum 12 characters maximum 12 characters 8 5 1 1 Extended software settings Variable for automatic signalling and or camera switching when change occurs at the camera control inputs Inthe section CAMINPUTS you define whether you want automatic signalling and or camera switching to take place when changes occur at the camera control inputs in manual operation The function is defined using a variable FOLLOW x Function definition x range 1 to 3 Camera switching Value Acoustic signalling 3o Camera switching and acoustic signalling 3 These functions are only supported in Normal and Zoom viewing mode If you select a function with acoustic signalling the wave file CAMALERT WAV located in the program directory is played once You can replace this file with your own wave file if you wish Note Please refer to additional HeiTel documentation to find out what commands are available for your PTZ device and the R16 Adapter in R01 files 266 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Softwar
8. You do not need a gateway address for a new local network value 0 0 0 0 The default port of your transmitter unit is 3000 It may be necessary to change the default port number if want to set up more than one transmitter unit at one IP address via router or if port 3000 has been already been allocated in your network or cannot be used Note Change the port number only if necessary For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl LITE press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page245 Pa Port numbers range from 0 to 65535 Please note that the numbers 0 to 1023 are reserved for the system Therefore only ports 1024 to 65535 are available Contact your network administrator for assistance in defining an appropriate port number Note If you are using any port other than the default port 3000 this port number must be added to the IP address for transmitter dial up see Port number on page 91 If all transmitters dialled by your receiver PC are set to the same port you can change the receiver software configuration file to that port number see Port number on page 248 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Obtain DNS server address automatically DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Maximum transmission speed Web Server 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide If the function Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP is activated then for this transmitter you may also activate
9. ae Inthe Camera column you assign the individual control inputs a camera number ranging from 1 to 10 The triggering of the respective control input refers to this allocation The camera number is selected using an up down control button The range of values comprises the number of camera inputs on your image transmitter The standard setting is 1 CamControl LITE Software Guide 217 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Preset NOON aE You allocate presets to the individual control inputs via the Preset column A corresponding allocation is only useful for connected PTZ systems or dome cameras for which the presets have been programmed accordingly For other cameras select the option Off On dome protocols with transmission of hexadecimal numerical values up to 127 presets Position 0 to 126 are supported When transmitting decimal numerical values a maximum of only 100 presets Position 0 to 99 can be activated The standard setting is 0 The expanded number of presets primarily allows for the control of domespecific special functions Note Depending on the system used presets can also start special functions This for the most part affects presets with higher numbers You can find more detailed information about this in the manual of your pan and tilt system or dome camera 218 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide Off mii Alarm Fire Panic Entry Exit
10. Ignore You have four ways of accepting calls which you can configure in Receiver options e Do not accept call The receiver PC does not accept any calls e Accept call manually A dialogue box reports incoming calls Port A Call If a sound card has been installed an alarm signal is also given via the connected speaker If there is no sound card incoming calls are notified by means of short warning signals through the PC speaker You can Accept or Ignore the call Notes e Manual call acceptance is not available for ISDN cards CAPI and network connections TCP IP e Accept call automatically Incoming calls alarms are accepted automatically You have the option of receiving visual and acoustic notification In the case of transmitters with camera inputs configured accordingly the camera allocated to the alarm triggering input is switched on e Accept call and auto operation In this operating mode alarm processing takes place fully automatically You have the option of receiving visual and acoustic notification If you click Manual in the central control panel you receive full control of the procedure once again e Once you switch to manual operation you have to carry out all aspects of operation including establishing a connection You cannot switch back to automatic operation The different ways of accepting calls are described in more detail in the chapter on Receiver options see Take a call on page 72 4 4
11. The marks for the image sequence export are shown in the graphical elements of image access The marks look different depending on the archive and the recording mode If you want to change the selected image sequence later you must either reset the export marks as described above or delete the marks and then reset them Select File Save sequence or click the Save sequence toolbar button after you have set the export marks The sequence selected between the export marks is applied in the Export to file dialogue box Checking the export sequence Use the following functions to check delete export marks You can play back the selected image sequence to check it Click the Go to start mark button to show the first picture of the export sequence Click the Go to end mark button to show the last picture of the export sequence Click this button to delete the export marks Marks that have already been set cannot be moved by drag and drop in the graphic elements They must be reset as described above You can access all export functions by selecting File Save sequence The individual commands for sequence marking navigating within a sequence and playing back the selected range can also be accessed by selecting the Options menu item 26936_02 69 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 5 1 6 Accessing GPS data If valid GPS data exists for the current image data of the PC Archive the following dialogue box may open
12. You can start the program from the Start menu by selecting Programs CamControl LITE CamControl LITE or by selecting the path you chose during installation Programs Yourname CamControl LITE Alternatively you can start the program by double clicking the icon on your desktop if you chose to add an icon to your desktop during installation 3 4 Updating the Software Before installing an update it is recommended that you back up the receiver archive and the configuration files of the CamControl LITE version in use to date or the previous version of CamTel to a directory of your choice Once you have installed the latest version of CamControl LITE copy the backed up configuration files to the program directory of the newly installed receiver software Note Do not install CamControl LITE over an existing installation You must first uninstall the software and delete the program group via Windows Explorer Alternatively specify a new directory and a new program group during installation Make sure to back up all files that you still need This applies in particular to the receiver archive You should back up the following files before an update Configuration file Telephone directory Company text Tours Archive configuration Positions of additional windows Favourite transmitters AVI export Remote module Additional transmitter specific information Firmware files PDF manuals for online help Device drivers C CamCo
13. e This dialogue box will inform you when the uninstallation process ends End the uninstallation by selecting OK 8 11 Specification of the control inputs Standard switching for control inputs The CamDisc VG 4c has a number of control inputs Al a d Control in1 Control in2 Aux in However these inputs are not galvanically isolated from the operating voltage of the device Depending on the configuration these can be activated by Normally closed or Normally opened contacts Note The control inputs must always be activated such that they are potential free Input circuits of control inputs Activation with Activation with Normally closed Normally opened Circuit Circuit external internal external internal Ub 5V Ub 5V i 1 5 KQ a i ov Wiring variants for voltage monitored control inputs In addition to standard wiring of control inputs the related Video Gateways permit different types of voltage monitoring Normally terminated 10k The wiring variant Normally terminated 10k allows different circuitry for Normally opened and Normally closed 26936 _02 295 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis _ eto Re Control input R 10 kQ Control input 3 N II d ormally opene Normally closed For circuitry with a resistance a distinction is made between two different states e Not triggered The figures show the safe state in each case not triggered of the detector line or
14. l Other devices fm PCI Serial Port i RNDIS Eth a Print queues Dp Processors Software devii Uninstall Sound video lt gt Storage contri pM System device Properties Universal Seria Update Driver Software Disable Scan for hardware changes Step 4 A new dialogue appears Select Browse my computer for driver software 26936_02 285 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software i j Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation H settings gt Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually Step 5 Select Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer on the next dialogue Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location CAUsers Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device Step 6 Select Network adapters in the device list of the next dialogue 286 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Select your device s type from the list below Common hardware types F
15. on page 95 6 9 3 Inserting and editing reference images You can add up to eleven reference images for every transmitter entry in the Transmitter index The images assigned to the selected transmitter are shown as small thumbnails in the reference image list The currently selected reference image is also shown as a larger image in the picture window beneath the list The first reference image is shown automatically when a transmitter is selected Any picture in the list can be activated by clicking it The pictures can be shown as camera hints during an active connection Transmitter index E M Transmitter name Reference images Demo CamDise svr10 1 IP M IP address Phone number dial prefix camdisc1 s r10 demo heitel com Prefix 1 M CAPI Prefix 2 M Serial number cys500004 Usemame amp password Auto passwords demo i Username Password OK Cancel Help Delete You can add or modify reference images in the Transmitter data dialogue box by clicking Modify or Add in the Transmitter index If you want to add a new reference image to the Transmitter data click Add beneath the list of reference images You can then select a suitable JPEG or bitmap image in the Reference images dialogue box Look in gt tpicint 7 e am 432x324 Ql Entrance upper floor E3 Main entrance EJ Training room Floor administration File na
16. value per track Note For changes to the track division of the POS ATM IBIS archive the archive of the transaction data is deleted across all tracks Line length Via the Line length you can specify the maximum line length for incoming data records with transaction data For the POS ATM Adapter the preset value of 57 must be selected For IBIS data the line length of 121 characters should always be selected If the line length is shorter parts of the transferred data record could get cut off The correct selection of the line length has an immediate effect on the quantity and quality of the saved data records e lf too high a value is selected for the line length the available storage is not used optimally and the number of possible data records is reduced e f too small a value for the line length is selected part of the data is cut off and certain date records may be incomplete Note When changing the line length the transaction data is deleted for the respective track Delete track Via the Delete track option you can select one or several tracks which are deleted after confirming by pressing OK After performing the procedure the option is set back Note As the POS ATM Adapter communicates with the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG or CamServer devices via TCP IP the POS function see Serial channel on page 196 has no influence on the transaction data of this device The transparent data interface Transp data Control int
17. 8 3 Saving window positions 8 3 1 General program windows CTWNDPOS INI The following windows retain your last position even after the program is closed PTZ window Remote list combination window Archive access window Audio archive access window Cascading window POS ATM IIBIS dialogue box Button panel positioning via R01 file does not apply for this window therefore e Zoom window In this window you also define the extension of the window along with the display position located in the top left and bottom right corner e GPS window Window positions are saved in the file CTWNDPOS INI in the CamControl LITE program directory You can delete this file after closing the program to reset the positions File structure The file CTWNDPOS INI is divided into various sections for the individual windows Each section starts with the intemal program window name in square brackets Then the top left corner of the window is defined using the variables LEFT and TOP Example RMLISTPOS_1 LEFT 384 TOP 884 Comment The position 0 0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the first monitor 8 3 2 Window position Image Viewer VIEW10 INI The Image Viewer window is displayed in the basic configuration for alarm messages The configuration file stores the last position and size of this window even after the program has been exited 26936_02 259 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis File structure
18. D amp T Update x y The device was updated with new firmware The old version number is displayed in field x the new version number in field y D amp T Track x Camera track x was initialized Field y initialized y indicates whether this camera track has been divided into partitions for continuous and or event triggered recording Existing image data is removed D amp T Password disabled The reset button on the front of the device deletes all usernames and passwords D amp T Alarm enabled The video system was armed manually or by the software D amp T Alarm disabled The video system was disarmed manually or by the software Critical messages D amp T Track x reached Overwrite protection is activated and the warning threshold percentage warning threshold has been reached for a camera track x D amp T Hard disk full Overwrite protection is activated and hard Track x disk capacity for camera track x is depleted no more pictures can be recorded D amp T Period of recording The minimum recording period for camera reached Track x track x has not been reached D amp T No video signal on This message is written if a video signal error yes input x is detected for video input x D amp T HDD Read Error Hard disk read error Check removable hard x disk in offline mode e g with application ScanDisc Field x indicates hard disk model D amp T HDD W
19. ISDN connection without PABX system Completely de install the ISDN card then and re install it Test another ISDN card Check the ISDN connection and the ISDN line Check the phone number If an ISDN telephone can also be reached at this phone number check the assignment of the MSN make sure that the transmitter is connected and that the correct MSN has been assigned Make ISDN available at the transmitter end or use an external TA with analogue connection capabilities Hybrid TA at the receiver end Check the network system settings 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection error PC is not connectedto Test network access e g at MS message 10060 the network DOS prompt using the ping lt TCP IP address e g of a second registered network PC gt If you receive an error message timeout then your PC does not have network access Establish the connection End of Step 1 TCP IP 9 5 2 Error at Receiver PC Incoming Call Step 3 This section deals with cases when CamControl LITE can call a transmitter and receive pictures but can not accept any alarm call from a transmitter If your PC is also not able to call any transmitter then you should consult the chapter specified in the following see Error at Receiver PC Outgoing Call Step 1 on page 301 No Remote Transmission po
20. If the system is programmed as below the HDD is put into standby mode via V out Press V out for at least Press and hold the V out button on the front of the device for at least 10 10 seconds seconds Alternatively switch the potential free control input V out to ground for at least 10 seconds To do so connect a push button with the relevant contacts on the back of the device Both procedures are equivalent in this case HDD safe power down functions I Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched Timeout mmediatel z Normally opened z IV Stop writing to HDD when Y out was switched for 10 s restart after 3 minutes or power off HDD safe power down The HDD is put into standby mode and does not record any more data The video system signals this state by means of the flashing yellow video signal LEDs depending on the device type V1 V2 V4 V10 The device remains in this mode for 3 minutes e If you do not switch off the video system during this time after 3 minutes the HDD is reactivated and recording is started again according to the device programming In this state HDD in standby mode the device can be safely powered down without this hindering the functionality of the HDD Switching off the video Switch off the video system before removing or replacing the HDD When the HDD is in standby mode neither video data nor audio data where applicable is recorded Nor are any logfile entries written A
21. On With the On option you can activate time alignment via NTP Note When activating time alignment via NTP synchronisation of the time via alarm panel IBIS serial control or CamControl LITE is no longer possible Please be sure to check the video system s time after deactivating the NTP function As the time basis for NTP is the coordinated world time UTC Universal Time Coordinated there may be differences depending on the time zone of the video system s place of installation Correct the time manually where required see Set recorder to PC time on page 118 Synchronisation With the Synchronise every function you can set the time interval in which the video system is to set the time via NTP The standard setting for the synchronisation interval is 6 h NTP Server Address The address of an NTP Time Server can be stated as an IP address or as a symbolic name without quotation marks e 195 145 119 188 e 0 de pool ntp org Note Symbolic addresses can only be processed directly if at least one valid DNS server and the gateway to the network settings were set see Network TCP IP on page 121 The Check Server button is used to verify the previously entered NTP server After pressing the button the entered NTP server is checked for its suitability Relevant status messages are displayed to the right of the button Possible status messages 26936_02 119 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtral
22. WM Action A M Information In the extended evaluation dialogue you can generally change the sorting of the entries by clicking on the column headings Type sequential number Date Event Type column The Type column shows the category of each logfile entry Error Action or Information These categories are available as a filter for the logfile see Filtering the logfile on page 47 column The column sequential number contains the current number of an sequential event The numbering is essentially assigned such that the latest event number when the logfile is called up is given the number 1 In the Date column the date and time are shown in the ISO 8601 format Event The Event column shows the individual events in a short text format For column more information on this topic please refer to the section Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series on page 269 In addition you can use the Filter Time window Search Print and Clipboard menus under logfile to influence various functions and views wee On the right underneath the events there are two numbers 703 703 that provide information about the number of events in the format currently displayed events total number of events stored in the logfile If the number of events is reduced by the Filter and or Time window the left hand value always shows the number of events that are currently displa
23. can vary depending on the connection type and network operator After this time has passed the call can no longer be answered 72 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Accept call automatically This is without doubt the most frequently used setting Incoming calls alarms are automatically accepted Once a connection has been established image transmission starts Camera selective alarm activation Alarm triggering image If you have selected Accept call automatically or Accept call automatically and are using SVR series devices CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile or CamServer as transmitters transmission begins with the image that triggered the alarm If the alarm was triggered by a camera control input the associated camera is automatically activated Accept call and automatic operation This operating mode allows you to carry out completely automated call and alarm processing Incoming calls are automatically accepted and processed in line with the settings When the fixed period of time has passed the connection is closed again No user intervention is required Time limit of connection Inthe Time limit of connection field enter the maximum connection time in minutes When this period of time has passed the connection is closed immediately Camera 1 10 In these boxes you can specify the number of video images that you want to receive from each camera In such a way you can weight the cameras differently
24. less than or equal to equal to or gt greater than or equal to You can link all the selected parameters for the transaction data search using the logical operators AND or OR by making the relevant selection from the Search items combined drop down list In addition to this combined search you can also search according to individual criteria price only for example Now use the First sales receipt or Last sales receipt toolbar buttons to jump to the first last transaction that fulfils these search criteria Sales receipt back or Sales receipt forward shows the previous next sales receipt that fulfils the search parameter Matches with the search criteria within the sales receipt are marked in red line by line If there are no more results that meet your criteria the following message appears Search text could not be found 26936_02 41 CamControl LITE Software Guide Text amp price search ATM data Saving transaction data Printing a data record 4 HeiTel by Xtralis Transaction data of camera 8 type _ Transaction data TN 0002 BCN 22222222 AN 2222222222 30009 Text amp price search Date amp time search ATM search m Time window nee I Transaction number Start Date 99 10 2007 IV Account number 2222 J Bank code number Amount I General AND 7 r Syncronizatiorr Update picture from data IV Select all Items combined by Updat
25. 1 e Camera 1 and 2 x 3 e Camera 1 to 4 x 15 e Camera 1 to 10 x 1023 e Inthe event of changes to the presets a corresponding entry in CamTel INI may need to be added PTZ control via USB joystick PTZ control via USB JOYSTICK 1 Joystick PTZ control disabled joystick CamControl RU e Range 0 Off disabled default 1 On enabled for joystick 1 2 On enabled for joystick 2 e Inthe basic configuration PTZ control via USB joystick CamControl RU is disabled Red frame In multi image displays Quadscreen 10 image camera group in the software triggered camera alarm inputs are indicated by a red frame around the triggered camera image Using the following parameters you control the conditions under which the red frame should be displayed Red frame REDFRAME 1 red frame in multi image displays e Range 0 only display red frame for armed video systems 1 always display red frame default e Inthe basic configuration the red frame is shown regardless of whether the video system is armed disarmed 26936_02 253 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Upper limits for the display of live images from IP cameras Upper limits for the IPCAMSIZE 5 display of live images Defines the upper limit for the display of live images from IP cameras in mega pixels from IP cameras e Range 1 1 Mega pixel 2 Mega pixels 3 Mega pixels 4 Mega pixels 5 Mega pixels default s
26. 2 022222 e cece eccceeeeeceeceeeees 300 9 6 Analytics Detection Problems and False Alarms 0 02 00222222 ee eee eee ee 312 10 Software Licence Contract 200 000 00 lolli cee cence aaa aLa nanana 313 11 Addendum 2 0 0 2 cic ccc cee cece cece eceeeecceeeeceeeeesteeeesceeeeeees 317 2 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 1 Howto Use this Guide This guide provides you with information on all the functions and options of the HeiTel software program CamControl LITE You can use this software for operation alarm verification and configuration of up to 6000 image transmitters This guide relates to the functionality of the current CamTel SVR and CamDisc SVR devices and to the further devices which in terms of their function are largely identical Cam4mobile CamServer and CamDisc HNVR In addition this guide refers to the functionality of the end of 2012 introduced VG VideoGateway systems see VG Device series on page 100 Guide creation date This guide for the CamControl LITE software program was revised in July 2015 In the course of the constant further development of our products the functionality of CamControl LITE will also be continuously updated Information that could not be included in the guide at the time of printing can be found at the end of the guide in the section containing late breaking information see Addendum on page 317 Version information The
27. 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 314 Both parties to the contract agree that it is not possible with the current state of technology to develop data processing programs in such a way that they are perfectly suitable for all applications However the licensor guarantees that the software is suitable for the usage described in the user guide The licensor accepts no liability that the software product meets the requirements and purposes of the customer or that it functions with other programs used by the customer The licensor has neither explicitly nor silently guaranteed that the software has any particular characteristics the customer accepts sole responsibility for selecting the software product as well as for using it and for the results arising from such use The customer must examine the software program and the accompanying material thoroughly on receipt of the same and must report any faults or deficiencies immediately and at the latest within 60 days after the program has been put into operation Latent defects must also be reported immediately after they have been discovered If the customer does not fulfil his duty of reporting such defects then all liability of the licensor is excluded Should the software be faulty then the original data medium on which the software is stored must be correctly packaged and sent back to the licensor The name address and telephone number of the customer as well as a description of the fault and a proof of
28. AUTODISCONNECT Deactivate automatic disconnection in the event of an alarm REFIMAGEWIDTH Specify the size and display time of reference images REFIMAGEHEIGH REFIMAGETIME HTCONNECTSVR HTCONNECTSVRPORT HTCONNECTOWNPORT HTCONNECTTARGETPORT HTconnect UDP target port FIMAGEMODE FIMAGES ONLINEMOTION_ON ONLINEMOTIONCAM Activate HTconnect Server HTconnect connection port HTconnect UDP source port Deactivation Activation of the Image Viewer Number of images for the Image Viewer sequence Configuring online motion detection Selecting cameras for online motion detection Deactivation Activation of the PTZ control via one or two USB joysticks REDFRAME Indication of active camera alarm inputs in multi views only for an armed video system IPCAMSIZE IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT DYNAMICPTZSPEED CBLOG ENABLED ONLINESCR MODE CAMO 4 Specify the initial view SMRESOLUTION Adjust the picture size at 128 x 80 resolution DEQUMODE Adjust the image quality for quadscreen or 10 screen viewing mode ALWAYSONTOP Keep the program window on top at all times PATH LOCAL Define the saving of logfiles and certain INI files locally or globally REMOTEPATH Global storage location target directory for saving the files listed above Determination of upper limits for the display of live images from IP cameras Extended function for optimised display of PAL and NTSC cameras Disabling enabling dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras Allow firmware upda
29. Are the addresses in the file and the remote hardware correct 1 Activate the archive in the receiver setup Make sure that there is sufficient free hard disk space Reselect the frame storage unit and play the required sequences using the Play button double arrow Select the correct archive file or start picture transmission The Play button must be re pressed The software does not carry out any fault correction 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 9 3 Evaluating Contents of CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer General Error Fault Possible Causes Device can not even be 1 The very first time the system is switched on the hard disk is initialised addressed using the null modem cable This procedure can take up to 15 minutes and during this time the disk can not be addressed 2 Incorrect baud rate Archiving Pictures onto the Hard Disk at the Transmitter Allow the device to run for 15 minutes and then re attempt to connect 2 Carry out a hardware reset see product guide Error Fault Possible Causes Frame storage unit is Frame storage unit has entirely full too many been switched off during pictures for the hard disk initialisation e g whena new hard disk is first put into operation Check the archive settings in the frame storage unit Has the required recording method been set Has the memory been accidentally divided into rin
30. Clipboard Power S Whole word J Search from start Seach next Clear hits there are Event texts that contain a hit are highlighted in dark blue A Search next With the Search next button you start a search from the current cursor position within the logfile or continue a search The search stops at every search term found A counter underneath the button shows how many change to the search criteria clears the display of the hits Clear Clicking the Clear button removes the current search term from the input window The display of the number of hits is cleared at the same time Whole word If the Whole word option is enabled you restrict the search to a term that must match the search term as a whole word 48 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Search from If the Search from start option is enabled you make sure that the start search starts from the first item in the selected list If this option is disabled the search starts from the current position within the list Printing out logfile data You can print out the logfile using the Start printing button Fiter Time window Search Print Clipboard J Only selected lines All without filter Start printing If you enable the Only selected lines option you only print out the lines in the logfile that have been previously selected The lines are selected using the usual Windows method All without With the All wi
31. Configuration of the integrated relays page 192 e PTZ control Protocol selection for connected PTZ solutions and transmission of their control files to the receiver PC page 194 e Serial channel Configuration of the transparent serial channel page 196 e Video out Definition of image quality of the video output page 200 e Alarm panel Connection of alarm panels in accordance with the standardised VdS 2465 Enhancement S3 protocol page 202 e Logfile Settings for logfile entry page 207 e Extras Definition of specific device control functions page 208 e Upload Download Loading and saving of configuration profiles to the receiver PC page 213 e Firmware update Dialogue driven procedure for firmware update page 214 e CI Adapter Matrix for allocating additional control inputs page 216 e IP Camera Including IP cameras page 222 e HYBRID Card 4 Programming and activation of DSP functions for the HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR page 231 110 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Underneath this menu the Recorder settings dialogue box has four Cam4mobile VG CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG CamServer VG 4c CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer or three CamTel SVR and CamTel VG buttons Clicking OK confirms the modified settings The configuration data are then sent to the digital image transmission system Clicking Cancel exits the Recorder settings without applyin
32. Continuous recording BJ 2 Camera 2 Q Continuous recording E B 3 Camera 3 Q Continuous recording E 4 Camera 4 Q Continuous recording B 5 Camera 5 o Continuous recording E 6 Camera 6 B Continuous recording B 7 Camera G Continuous recording E 8 Camera 8 Q Continuous recording E 9 Camera 9 o Continuous recording E 10 Camera 10 Classic evaluation dialogue Once you have established a connection to your transmitter in the main panel you can open the Transmitter archive dialogue box by clicking Hoare CamControl LITE first loads the event list The Transmitter archive is divided into two areas The top section contains functions for navigating the extensive archive The middle section contains the archive tree with camera track nodes and a breakdown according to recording type for each camera track Nodes for recorded transaction data of POS systems can also be shown Notes on archive access In conditional refresh mode paging backwards is significantly slower than paging forwards for technical reasons If images with more than one image per second have been saved then either the first or the last image in this sequence with the same timestamp will be shown as a search result This depends on whether you are searching forwards or backwards from the current image 26936_02 35 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Saving image sequences in the receiver archive When play
33. Each camera track can therefore accommodate time controlled recordings for two sets of holidays For example assigning national holidays to Type 1 and company specific holidays to Type 2 allows you to define individual and separate recording times for each group Clicking Copy allows you to conveniently copy weekly profiles to other camera tracks To apply the profile click Insert in the associated Video X in tab Clicking Copy to all timers inserts the weekly profile of the current timer into all other timers You do not need to apply the profile by clicking Insert Note The Copy to all timers function automatically replaces the weekly profiles of all tracks Track specific timer settings are lost as a result Timer controlled recording is the ideal solution if you only want to record at certain times of day or only on certain days of the week holidays because you don t have to change the circuit or any settings Actual recording is controlled in line with the settings of the individual image recording inputs see Event recording 1 2 4 10 on page 180 and see Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 on page 185 Saving preview image for the site archive Preview images 26936_02 If you select Record preview images additional smaller sized images of 256x128 pixels are saved These are required for displaying preview sequences in the site archive transmitter archive These sequences provide a quick overview of images sa
34. GPS Site Archive see Accessing GPS data on page 45 e PC Archive GPS Archive see Accessing GPS data on page 70 e GPS data and speed The GPS position data is specified in the form geographical latitude geographical longitude For the current speed you can choose between three units of measure via a toggle switch e km h Kilometres per hour e mph Miles per hour e kn Knots sea miles or nautical miles per hour Note The accuracy of GPS data is always limited Even with a static location the position data can still therefore vary and a speed in excess of zero be displayed A revolving globe signals that valid GPS data records are being received If GPS reception is disturbed the GPS signal is not sufficiently strong or the connection to the GPS receiver is interrupted the globe will stop revolving after approximately 30 seconds without valid GPS data The font colour for position and speed changes from green to red and instead of valid position data the following warning is displayed GPS Live 2009 03 17 12 37 32 GPS warning V NMEA 0183 GPRMC e 0 5 mph For temporary disturbances the last determined positioned data and the speed is shown in red Use the toggle switch to the right below the globe to switch from the standard display of GPS information to an enhanced GPS window see Extended GPS Live window on page 30 You can only switch between both display modes if valid GPS da
35. In many cases all you need to do is reset the modem or ISDN TA with AT amp F in the factory settings Maximum connection duration In the Maximum connection duration area you can define the maximum possible connection duration for the port e Ifthe On option is not activated no restriction on the connection duration is specified The entry field shows 1 e If you activate the On option you can specify the connection duration with values ranging from 0 to 2 678 400 seconds 0 seconds means the connection is terminated immediately The maximum value is equivalent to 31 days General notes on modem configuration The modem ISDN TA must be configured for RTS CTS flow control The DTR signal interrupts a connection or the establishment of a connection DCD or M5 must indicate an active connection The modem ISDN TA must not accept calls automatically ATSO 0 e The modem ISDN TA must send verbal messages ATV 1 in order for incoming connections to be recognised e The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol e Ifthe ISDN terminal adapter is connected to multiple ISDN data devices with an SO bus all the ISDN devices must be assigned their own MSN generally the phone number without prefix Operation with a telephone system In this case you may have to prefix the telephone number with the outside line number s In some cases there may be problems with the modem s dial tone recognition In this case turn of
36. Inthe Alarm column you select between the following options e Off default setting In this configuration a signal input never activates an alarm Alarm In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm when the video system is armed This function corresponds to the option On which was used up to and including CamControl LITE software V3 83 Note For HeiTel video systems with device firmware 1 77 or older only the options On and Off in the column Alarm are available To use the extended alarm functions which are explained in the following text device firmware V1 78 or newer is mandatory e Fire Panic Continuously armed In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm regardless of whether the video system is armed Entry Exit Arm delay The video system is armed or disarmed within the monitored area In this configuration a signal input activates an alarm after a configurable time delay For every camera channel only one time period can be configured which applies to both Entry and Exit for the monitored object The alarm is camera specific and in CamControl LITE a corresponding message is displayed in the status line e Online Alarm camera name triggered control input Online Alarm Camera 8 50 When an alarm message is given the corresponding camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed analogous to the message syntax of camera alarms In
37. Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras OK Cancel Site archive state Help Motion detection zones Upload Download Load settings from PC 20071128 CV547015 01 58 him mer 20071201 CV500005 01 58 him 20071201 CV547015 01 58 him m Save settings to PC File name 20071205 Save as lt 20071205 CV547015 01 58 him gt CACCLITE376 SVA_IMAGES 20071205 CV547015 01 58 him saved Load settings for PC Save settings to the PC 26936_02 The selection window only shows settings saved on the receiver PC that have the same device type and the same firmware version To load device settings select the desired file from the list Once you click Load setup amessage informs you that these settings will not take effect until you have transferred them to the device To store these settings in the device this dialog must closed with lt OK gt To save device settings enter a File name CamControl LITE adds the serial number of the device and its firmware version to this name The full file name appears between angled brackets on the Save as button Click this button to save the device settings as a mirror image Once the mirror image has been successfully backed up its complete path is displayed The first time a mirror image is backed up CamControl LITE creates the sub folder SVR_IMAGES in the program directory 213 CamC
38. The following delay time are available Off Immediately 1s to10s 15s 20s 30sor60s Symbol used when video is obscured Merge into images In addition to the obligatory display of date time and image number top right you also have the option to display the camera name and or transmitter name in the video image No devices in the SVR and VGseries nor the Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG and CamServer CamServer VG devices support any of the following merge into image options for IP cameras CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices allow merge into video image for IP cameras only in conditional refresh mode Merge camera names If you activate the Merge camera names into images option the camera into images name is displayed bottom centre of the video image Merge transmitter If you activate the Merge transmitter name into images option the name into images transmitter name is displayed top left of the video image If no transmitter name is defined the device serial number is displayed instead Merge date and time If you activate the Merge date and time into images option on CamDisc into images only HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices the date and time for the CamDisc HNVR transmitter is displayed top right in the video image from IP cameras Precondition for merge into image on CamDisc HNVR Analogue video When transmitting and storing analogue video images which CamDisc images HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices can process using the optional
39. These images are shown as soon as the mouse pointer is positioned over the camera button The reference image is displayed until the configured display time elapses The image is also shown for as long as the left mouse button is held and the magnifying glass is positioned over the picture regardless of the configured display time The initial size and display time of the reference images can be specified in the corresponding keys Helle View Setup Site Archive Log file HTconnect configuration HTconnect should generally be configured with the settings in the receiver software see HTconnect on page 77 Activate HTconnect HTCONNECTSVR 1 Activate HTconnect Server Server e Range of values 0 Off HTconnect deactivated 1 On HTconnect activated standard HTconnect connection HTCONNECTSVRPORT 3333 HTconnect connection port e Range of values Valid port number not used by CamControl LITE standard port for HTconnect 3333 26936_02 251 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis HTconnect source port HTCONNECTOWNPORT 4446 HTconnect UDP source port e Range valid port number not used by CamControl LITE default port for HTconnect UDP source port 4446 HTconnect target port HTCONNECTTARGETPORT 4445 HTconnect UDP target port e Range valid port number not used by CamControl LITE default port for HTconnect UDP target port 4445 CamControl LITE and HTconnect Server communicate wit
40. Warming The new settings will cause all stored pictures to be deletetd Save nevertheless I Save as configuration profile Cancel You must confirm changes to hard disk settings by clicking OK Different messages may be displayed depending on the type of change to be implemented If necessary you can save your preferred archive settings in the device permanently by selecting Save as configuration profile see Configuration profile for video systems with removable hard drives on page 112 Alternatively you can load a previously saved profile by selecting Load configuration profile You can also back up a mirror image of device configuration on the receiver PC or apply a previously saved mirror image see Upload download on page 213 Load configuration profile Delete track 1 2 4 10 Select this option for one or more tracks if you want to immediately delete all stored images on the tracks in question during an active connection Images on other tracks will not be deleted The warning that you are about to delete image data only applies to the selected tracks 26936_02 163 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Delete all images and Select this option if you want to immediately delete all images and passwords passwords for the image archive on the hard disk drive during an active connection see Archive passwords on page 161 Format HDD Select Format HDD to format the hard disk drive
41. automatically GPS Site Archive 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 0586 N 010 04 3263 E B 0 0 mph a l Explanation of buttons A detailed explanation of the buttons can be found in the section on the GPS Live dialogue see GPS Live window on page 30 and on the extended GPS Live dialogue see Extended GPS Live window on page 30 Accessing the PC Archive When you access the PC Archive function the GPS archive dialogue box may be displayed The display of the dialogue box is not compulsory when accessing archive images with valid GPS data e Use the GPS Viewer amp button or the View GPS Viewer function to show or hide the GPS dialogue box 5 2 Accessing other archives In addition to being able to access receiver archives created with CamControl LITE you can also edit both CamControl PRO receiver archives and HeiTel export archives It is also possible to access CamDisc SVR archives offline In order to be able to access the removable hard disk drives on the receiver PC you need either an internal or external HDD rack to take the removable hard disk drive You can obtain both articles from HeiTel as accessories ca Click the Open individual archive button or select File Load archive to open the backed up archive files export archives and CamDisc archives on removable hard disk drives You cannot open AVI files in the access program Backing up data If you want to back up the entire
42. e Record preview images Note In some situations these functions can however be defined directly via the user interface for the IP camera For more detailed information please refer to the respective camera manual Starting with CamControl LITE Software V4 07 there is no need to allocate IP cameras by manufacturer and model This has been replaced with allocation by manufacturer and protocol Use the IP camera list with compatibility information to plan and set up IP cameras see Help button for retrieving the IP camera list on page 225 Additionally video systems of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series support video format H 264 minimum requirement device firmware 2 08 or 4 02 Recorder settings CamDisc HNVR Demo P7 at _ Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Camera groups E Motion Privacy zones E Alarms E Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel E Alam panel Log file Extras Upload Download Firmware update HYBRID Card 4 PIR OK Cancel Site archive state IP Camera Manufacturer Protocol IP address DYNACOLOR ype 1 DYNACOLOR z 192 168 35 71 8008 192 168 31 119 DYNACOLOR 192 168 35 74 GRUNDIG 192 168 35 76 8008 80 AXIS 192 168 35 96 GENERIC 1 62 214 6 3 8080 GENERIC 2 62 214 6 3 8080 Of Off Generic GET command 1 im Configu
43. fintemal cameras only i E Connections Camera settings 1 Camera 1 Vv Motion X amera groups Motion detection zones Pits Shes 2 Camera 2 5 Motion gt Alarms Alarm inputs 3 led B Motion 7 4 Camera 4 r Motion 7 Camera position authen E Site archive Aio 5 Camera 5 B Motion 7 Relays i PTZ control 6 Camera 6 B Motion 7 Serial channel nae ut f Video out sai BA 7 Camera 7 a Motion 7 8 Camera 8 C Motion 7 oK 9 Camera 9 a Motion 7 cee 10 Camera 10 D Motion 7 Motion pee Motion Motion alarm active If you select Motion alarm enabled an alarm is triggered when motion is detected in the video image of the camera in question 26936 _02 155 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis If you want to control the recordings of several cameras using the integrated motion detector consider using external motion detectors The integrated motion detection is not designed for outdoor recordings and should therefore be reserved for indoor cameras This avoids false alarms Note So that a connection can be established to your receiver in the event of movement being detected in the video image you must save the telephone number or the IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 Setting sensitivity Motion Motion The integrated software motion detector works with three different levels of sensitivity Select Motion for
44. it is necessary to configure the serial channel on your HeiTel device To do this connect your CamControl LITE receiver software to the transmitter and select Setup In the Recorder settings Serial channel see Serial channel on page 196 dialogue box perform the following configuration e Baudrate 115200 e Mode 8 N 1 e Function Serial Control Next transmit the configuration data to your HeiTel image transmitter with OK Following this programming when the Cl Adapter or ClO Adapter is connected the Recorder settings dialogue box will display the Cl Adapter menu item Note If correctly configured and if the image transmitter is ready for operation the Cl Adapter or CIO Adapter should have been recognised by your image transmitter 60 seconds after switching on The Cl Adapter tab allows you to allocate the 50 control inputs of the Cl Adapter or CIO Adapter In the CamControl LITE software V3 84 or newer and the device firmware V1 78 or newer the alarm function has been extended by the following options e Entry Exit Arm delay e Fire Panic Continuously armed e Alarm e Off For more information on this topic please refer to the section Extending the alarm functions on page 152 With the CamControl LITE software V3 97 or newer and the device firmware V 1 94 or newer the additional functions of the CIO Adapter are supported This affects both the voltage monitored control inputs see Contact CIO Adapter o
45. maximum sensitivity and Motion for minimum sensitivity If you use CamControl LITE software V4 01 or later and HeiTel video systems with firmware V1 96 or later the Sensitivity is configured in the Motion settings menu see Motion settings on page 140 7 10 6 Video loss Open the Video loss tab from the menu under the Alarms node For each camera you can separately specify whether an alarm message is to be triggered if the video signal is lost Recorder settings CamDise ANVR Demo m eso Alarm inputs Pre alarm Site Archive Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position aut_4 gt Device a User Date amp Time Camera name Connect Connections Camera settings Camera groups 1 PTZ Camera a Motion Privacy zones 2 Main Entrance E B Alarms Alarm inputs Pre alarm 3 Xtralis Building Li Camera control inputs Motion detection 4 Xtralis Parking Li Camera position authen ois archive 5 PTZ IP cam backyard Audio Relays PTZ control 6 PTZ Strecke 1 5 Serial channel Alarm panel X 4 m r 7 OK 8 a Cancel 9 Site archive state 10 Help Connect Activate the option in the Connect column if the transmitter should establish a connection to your receiver when the video signal for the corresponding camera has been lost ya Note Even if the option Video signal lost detection is disabled the integrated error relay is triggered if a signal is lost
46. otf ot Ott Ott OFF ot OFF ed with m Tigger event i Of ot or ott ot Ot ot OFF off or ot o Ott ot ot ot ofr ot or ot ot Ott ot otf ot Contact a Normally opent Normally opene Normally opene Normally oper Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opent Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally opene Normally oper Normally opene Normally opene By adding more alarm functions the width for individual columns is so narrow that the column headings cannot be shown in full Thus you can temporarily change the column widths e Position the mouse pointer on the separator line between two columns whose width you would like to change The mouse pointer changes from the standard display to a double line with two arrows pointing outwards To change the column width press the left mouse button and hold it down Now moving the mouse to the left or right will change the width of the columns in question After releasing the left mouse button the chosen width for these columns will temporarily remain After leaving the Recorder settings via OK or Cancel the column widths in the dialogue box Cl Adapter are reset to the default values Inthe Input column only the numbers of the control inputs 1 50 are displayed
47. see Software Licence Contract on page 313 3 3 Installing the Software Proceed as follows 1 Start Windows 2 Insert the CamControl LITE installation CD into your CD ROM drive The CD starts automatically depending on how Windows is configured 3 Follow the menu structure and from the Installation menu select the CamControl LITE software 4 From the subsequent menu select CamControl LITE and then decide the language you want to install the software in 5 Activate installation by clicking OK 6 Click Next to start installation 7 Accept the suggested target folder for installation or specify a different folder of your choice by clicking Next 8 Specify the Start menu folder by clicking Next 9 Confirm selection of other details by clicking Next 26936_02 7 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 10 The installation program provides you with an overview of all selected options Click Install to start the installation process The individual components will be installed on the computer 11 Click Finish to conclude installation Uninstalling the software There are two ways to remove the program from the computer e Click Start and select Programs CamControl LITE Uninstall CamControl LITE or select the path you chose during installation Programs Y ourname Uninstall CamControl LITE e Remove the program installation in the Add or Remove Programs item of the Control Panel Starting the software
48. www your_domain com 10000 Please ensure that symbolic addresses are enclosed in quotation marks and that the port number is then added outside the quotation marks separated by a colon 26936_02 131 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 132 Alarm by ISDN If the internal ISDN card is built into your device you can choose connection between two independent methods of transmission If you have connected an external modem ISDN TA in addition to the internal ISDN TA see Internal ISDN TA Modem on page 129 it must be possible to differentiate between the two transmission paths So that the transmitter can determine which path to use to dial telephone numbers insert a small i or capital I in front of the number to be dialled by the internal adapter If an external modem ISDN TA is not connected you don t need to identify the number in this way Alarm by network Sending an alarm to a receiver IP address is only possible via the connection integrated network adapter see Network TCP IP on page 121 Sending an alarm via an external network connection is not possible Alarm by null modem If the four entry fields for telephone numbers IP addresses are left connection blank alarms will be sent by an existing null modem connection Callback x Execute Callback f If you select Callback for an entered telephone number or IP address you can call back this transmitter on the next redial After
49. 00 25 00 PTZ control 50411 Serial channel Number of images 5 376 Alarm panel X OK Average image size 4 86 4 KICO I Manual input Cancel Current allocated size for events 166 81 GB Estimated required size for events 16 55 GB Possibly there could be more than 5000 Events stored of the configured size Site archive state Either re allocate disk space for another track or for continuous recording or increase the number of events Help Event trigger You can define how events are to be triggered for each connected camera e via the associated camera control input e viaintemal software supported motion detection e viaa serial channel command see Serial channel on page 196 The triggering cause is recorded in the event list for archive access l control input M motion detection and S serial Trigger via contact Trigger via contact Normally opened Normally opened b Normally closed The camera control input of the camera in question can report two states closed switched to ground and open unswitched Select Normally opened from the drop down list to trigger an event when the input is closed Select Normally closed from the dropdown list to trigger an event when the input is open Select Off to switch off control input triggering 26936_02 181 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 182 Trigger via motion detection Trigger via serial command Retrigger at Trigger via
50. 152 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis The camera control input and Cl Adapter CIO Adapterinput are triggered in any order Motion detection Explanations CamControl LITE Software Guide Motion detection Input CI Adapter CIO Adapter The camera control input and Cl Adapter CIlO Adapter input combined via logical OR The camera control input and Cl Adapter CIO Adapter input depending on first and second trigger level e The recording control remains unchanged and is not influenced by expanding the alarm functions e In order fora combined alarm from motion detection and signal input to occur the motion detection see Motion detection on page 155 must be activated and configured for the camera channel in question e The option of alarms from a combination of motion detection and signal inputs is not available for IP cameras e Motion detection as an individual function can only be used in Alarm or Off mode In combination with signal inputs the motion detection for the modes Entry Exit Arm delay and Fire Panic Continuous armed are considered for relevant configurations Configuring camera control inputs From CamControl LITE software V3 84 on the dialogue box Camera control inputs has been redone as a result of the expansion of alarm functions Compared to the previous diagram the camera name has been removed The first unlabeled column gives information on the number of cameras made available by the HeiTel v
51. 16 23 22 BH 2 Camera 2 Continuous recording BH 3 Camera 3 Continuous recording B 4 Camera 4 Continuous recording By 5 Camera 5 Continuous recording E The camera track node with camera number and name branches into the various levels of the data and image recording The transaction data nodes indicate that POS data have been recorded for the camera track in question via a POS adapter A separate dialogue box opens to access this information see Accessing POS data on page 39 This node indicates image continuous recording for the camera track in question see Accessing continuous recordings on page 38 This node identifies event based image recording The events in recordings of this kind are broken down further according to year month date time and event type see Accessing event recordings on page 39 Please note that devices in the CamDisc SVR series can save both continuous and event recordings within one camera track depending on the how the device see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 iny on page 176 is configured Double click the relevant node to switch between the different recordings Accessing continuous recordings 00 00 00 9 k ORCI TEOR et E a el OR Tt a E E Del iat TE Bat ba EON 5 23 59 59 Double click a continuous recording to open the last image in the recording The recorded images for a single day can be accessed using the slider The values on the top le
52. 214 6 18 554 Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to use an image port other than port 80 possibly with video format H 264 only applicable to CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR 62 214 6 18 8008 80 For video systems with the device firmware V 1 94 or later it is possible to specify a different PTZ port as well as a different image port Up to and including device firmware V1 92 the following setting applies e Image port PTZ port Click on the 4 button to access the IP camera lists containing information on the programming of the selected camera IPcam_list pdF http www heitel comfupload downloads miscellaneous IPcam_list pdf The Select menu shown alongside may also appear using which you may retrieve the locally stored compatibility list or download a version from the Internet that may be more up to date An installed PDF viewer such as Adobe Reader is required to display these files 225 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Extended configuration dialogue 226 Configure User name Password Number of Presets x AXIS 214 User demo Password Number of Presets Video format 4 X JPEG v Configurate with Browser Ok Cancel Click the Configure button to open a dialogue box of the same name If you have protected access to image data on your IP camera using User name and Password you can store this access data in the HeiTel device via the Configure dialogue De
53. 26936_02 15 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis the program window Notes e This setting has no effect on tours The automatic processing of alarms remain unaffected e lf you select the Ten screen viewing mode for the initial view the Ten viewing mode will only appear as the initial view for transmitters with ten camera inputs The connection will be opened in Quadscreen viewing mode for transmitters with fewer camera inputs Predefined cameras Inthe Predefined cameras area you define the camera number s that are to be displayed once the connection has been established in the selected mode of operation respectively e Mainscreen amp Fullscreen Select a camera using the pull down menu e Quadscreen Select four cameras using the pull down menu These settings correspond to the parameters in the configuration file CamTel INI in the section ONLINESCR see View during active connection ONLINESCR on page 248 Applications window By activating the option Application as on top window you ensure that CamControl LITE is always kept in the foreground USB Transmitter index with USB Node Activating the Transmitter index with USB Node option causes the CamControl LITEsoftware to display the USB direct connection node in the transmitter directory see Configuring the transmitter index on page 88 The USB direct connection is used to select HeiTel devices that are connected via a USB cable with the rec
54. 4 KM 1 a Video loss Camera position authen real Audio 5 Camera 5 Vv 2 et Relays PTZ control 6 Gana Vv 2 a Serial channel Video out i i A 7 Camera 7 M 2 E 8 Camera 8 m 2 E m Cancel 9 Camera 9 a 2 a 10 Camera 10 m 2 S No pre alarm images can be stored for IP cameras This option is not enabled for these cameras Configuring recording Enabled Selecting Enabled allows you to activate recording for all desired cameras Interval s Determine the minimum interval between two images in the Interval s box Entering 0 seconds as the Interval results in maximum recording speed Note The interval between two images can be longer than specified in Interval s This depends on average picture size image quality and number of activate cameras Image quality and storage capacity Image quality All images are stored in the pre alarm archive with the pre set live image quality see Live video settings on page 133 Storage capacity The internal memory can hold about 1000 high quality images from a camera If you enable all 10 cameras therefore about 100 images can be saved per camera The actual number of stored images largely depends on image content and image quality Deleting the pre alarm archive The pre alarm archive is deleted if e the Pre alarm or Transmitter settings are re set e g after a change or e the device is switched off 26936_02 149 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel b
55. AXIS 35 99 Garden W Camera selection Underneath the displayed image you can switch between the cameras of the active transmitter by clicking the various camera buttons In Recorder settings you can enter transmitter specific camera names to be used as labels for the Camera buttons see Camera settings on page 138 Live camera with no video signal If acamera is selected when no video signal input is connected the missing video picture is indicated by the HeiTel device with the symbol shown here Covered live camera If a camera is selected where its lens is covered the missing video picture is indicated by the HeiTel device with the symbol shown here No live image of an IP camera If a camera channel is selected whose live image is to be supplied by an IP camera and its HeiTel device does not receive any such images the message No video available will be displayed 24 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Possible causes are indicated in the section on how to configure the IP camera see No image from IP camera on page 230 Note The number of camera buttons varies according to the number of video inputs that the various transmitter types have Activity messages from cameras If you have connected the corresponding transmitter inputs with camera control inputs and programmed the transmitter accordingly the button labels change colour red and black according to the status of th
56. Alarm call HDD error transmitter Alarm call triggered by hard disk error of name the image storage device Alarm enable input Status change of the alarm enable input e Connection closed and number of transmitted images e Data to carry out the tour not available because transmitter removed from transmitter list but still included in a tour message data not available transmitter name 20 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Showing archived video images If you want to access the video images in the receiver archive associated with a particular event then just select the event in question in the event list Double clicking the entry automatically starts the CamControl PLAYER and loads the relevant call Note If the desired call is no longer available in the receiver archive then a call received at around the same time is selected see PC Archive on page 78 Exporting or printing the event list The file CTNLOG TXT in the CamControl LITE program directory C CamControl LITE or YOUR_ DRIVE YOUR_PROGRAM_NAME is created or updated every time the Event list button is clicked This file contains the event list in a structured format for further processing or printing As every entry is structured in the same way you can edit this event list in a text editor or in a spreadsheet program or similar application The individual fields of an entry date time event are separated by spaces Each entry concludes
57. Arthurs Films BFrinter S CamControl my E ccimages a cane AudioTracks CasCam cos O de Deviceupdates comma HELPFILES To view any subfolders click a plus sign above Confirm your selection with OK Step 6 The previously selected subdirectory is now entered as the location Hardware Update Wizard Please choose your search and installation options S9 Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found willl be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM M Include this location in the search CACCLITE Drivers x Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware lt Back Next gt Cancel Confirm your selection with Next gt Step 7 If you receive a message regarding the Windows logo test you can skip this test by selecting Continue Anyway Step 8 This dialogue box provides information about the status of the driver installation 26936_02 281 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard installs the software eS SS Bay Linux USB Ethermet RNDIS Gadget Step 9 After the driver has
58. CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 9 Audio transmission The SVR devices CamServer and Cam4mobile can be equipped with the optional Audio Card In such a way you can use a push to talk function to converse talk and listen with the object under surveillance simply through a sound card installed in the receiver PC because the bidirectional digital audio signal is transmitted in voice quality For CamDisc HNVR and CamDisc VG HNVR devices audio functionality is implemented in the basic version Duplex audio live audio transmission and audio recording is possible with the use of firmware V1 92 or higher and CamControl LITE V3 92 or higher a o ALi dii i LL Zeme aa T i Hang up View Setup Log file PA g A f i l Driveway i i f 1 Buildg left side S Buildg back side E Buildg back side W Buildg right side S Buildg right side N lt F1 gt forhelp 425K8 E 1 2 04 Audio control Once you have activated a transmitter equipped with an audio card in the main panel the push to talk button for audio control appears on the bottom right of the screen This button is divided into two and facilitates three types of operation The microphone button is not activated by default in other words the audio data transmitted from the transmitter are output via the sound card of the receiver PC listening If you click the microphone button audio signal is received thro
59. CamControl LITE software via null modem or network e Make sure that the transmitter has suitable firmware 1 52 or newer After successfully establishing the connection to the device open the device settings Recorder settings Device by clicking on the Setup button The status of the firmware for example V 01 52 is displayed to the right of the term Version e Make a note of the serial number of your transmitter as this is needed for Step 3 e Switch to the settings for the leased line Recorder settings C onnections HTconnect see HTconnect on page 137 Recorder settings x Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Madem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect a Device a User Date amp Time HT connect only TCP IP E Connections Network TCP IP Port 3333 Hl Port 3000 and Port 80 are already in use External Modem Intemal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers IP address 1 F On Live video settings IP address 2 M Or dTconnect Camera settings IP address 3 Camera groups Motion detection zones IP address 4 z Privacy zones Alarms IP address5 192 168 131 739 F On Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control n afii of PM Gr K On DA Cancel Site archive state Help e Check whether the Port number for the leased line corresponds with the settings specified in Step 1 The standard setting is Port 3333 26936_02 103 CamControl LIT
60. Check using a Second Receiver Software In order to exclude the transmitter as a possible source of error you should not check the call acceptance of the receiver using the alarm function of a transmitter unless you are sure that this transmitter is working correctly Instead of this you can call your receiver PC using the CamControl LITE from a second PC If the receiver is reachable using this method data is of course not transmitted in this case and the connection is terminated after a short time then the error may be with the transmitter In this case please continue with Step 4 as follows see Error at Transmitter Outgoing Call Step 4 on page 310 306 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Alarm call is not received 1 Incorrect modem 1 Check the modem init string error at the receiver end initialisation and add the AT command Incorrect receiver S0 0 when required settings Check whether the option PABX system automatic call acceptance requires an MSN or automatic operation is Second data device ticked in the Receiver accepts the call at Settings Call Acceptance the same SO bus box Allocate an MSN to the TA or to the ISDN card in the field Receiver Settings Port A CAPI if the PABX system requires one Make sure that all additional data devices have been allocated an MSN To test this disconnect all other
61. DAT may under no circumstances be manipulated Transfer of the TELEFON INI If in the CamControl LITE program directory no TELEDATA DAT file is found then the receiving software will provide the option to import the data from of the TELEFON INI file available in this program directory Click the button Connect in order to open the transmitter directory A dialogue window will offer you the opportunity to import the data from an existing TELEFON INI using OK With Cancel the import is stopped and an empty transmitter directory is displayed a 86x Do you want to import the old TELEFON INI Cancel 26936 _02 9 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 10 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 4 Working with CamControl LITE CamControl LITE is a powerful software program that provides you with a variety of functions for alarm verification routine monitoring and the control of remote control system Using intuitive dialogue boxes you can configure CamControl LITE in line with your personal requirements The software automatically detects the active digital image transmission system and adjusts its functionality and display accordingly This minimises operational errors and incorrect configuration and also guarantees ease of use CamControl LITE Dial PC Archive Setup Event list Xtralis Headquarters D A CH Tel 49 0 431 23284 1 HeiTel Di
62. Due to their higher device performance requirements video formats MJPEG and H 264 are available for the ONVIF protocol only for the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR device series A list of tested IP cameras can be found in the compatibility summary for the IP camera list see Help button for retrieving the IP camera list on page 225 Models marked as ONVIF have already been tested and can be operated over the ONVIF protocol Simply select ONVIF protocol as the manufacturer and enter the IP addresses and related usernames passwords The functional scope of ONVIF integration includes image display using video formats JPEG MJPEG or H 264 as well as the control of PTZIP cameras 26936_02 229 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis No image from IP camera No image If instead of a live image from the IP camera the message No video available is displayed this may be fora number of reasons e NoIP connection to IP camera e Ensure that the IP camera can be reached under the specified IP address or the symbolic name used from the network of the HeiTel device If necessary check the recorder settings for Gateway and DNS server see Network TCP IP on page 121 Note The relevant information can be obtained from your Internet provider or system administrator e Access limitation through user name and password e Check whether live image reproduction of the IP camera is accessprotected by a user name and password
63. Estimated required size for events Messages Depending on your settings for pre and post alarm duration and intervals this field displays for each sequence the number of images that will be recorded when an event occurs Note If the defined recording times are exceeded or more images are recorded than was defined increase if necessary the Desired number of events or reduce the storage capacity reserved for event recording see Combined continuous and event recording on page 177 If the defined recording times are not achieved or if fewer images are recorded than defined reduce the Desired number of events This makes more memory available to the device for the individual events The average image size is the basis for calculating the potential number of events and the related memory requirement for events Please ensure that the average image size in each case is an instant average of recent live images if need be only the average of the conditional refresh images is displayed Under certain circumstances higher space requirements per image must be assumed for a trigger necessitated by significant image changes If the option Manual Input is enabled you can set the expected image size in the range of 2 to 300 KB using the toggle switch The potential number of events and the related memory requirement for events change depending on the image size assumed This field displays the partition size in GB reserved for
64. Example The settings displayed under Automatic operation on the previous page would result in the following 1 Two images are recorded from Camera 1 2 One image is recorded from Camera 3 3 1 and 2 are repeated until the four minutes have elapsed 4 After four minutes the connection is closed Special settings for automatic operation e Once off recording Connection duration 0 Camera field s 0 In this operating mode the number of images specified in the Camera 1 to Camera 10 fields is received once e No recording Connection duration 0 Camera fields 0 A connection is established to the transmitter once and immediately closed again No images are recorded The alarm is noted in the event list however see Event list on page 20 e Recording the alarm triggering camera Connection duration gt 0 Camera fields 0 If you configure the connection duration and camera fields like this then when an alarm is triggered by a camera control input the corresponding alarm camera is activated and recorded for the time specified No further camera switching takes place If the alarm does not involve a camera selective alarm Camera 1 is treated in the same way Note While you are accessing the receiver archive or editing the receiver options if the transmitter index is open or there is already an active connection you cannot accept or process any incoming calls or alarms e Warning signal If you have selected Accept call
65. HTconnect on HeiTel devices and software is 3333 26936_02 77 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 6 5 PC Archive You can save all images received during an image transmission in the receiver archive of CamControl LITE In such a way you can access and edit all calls whenever you want with the archive access program see Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 Receiver archive settings gt PC Archive options Options Archive file CAMARC CTW NTFS gt maximum archive size 512 GB Archive capacity 2000 MB 1 954 GB Unused capacity 25429 MB 24 9 GB Cancel Help Archive activated Select Archive activated to activate the receiver archive Note The images received are only saved when the archive is activated Archive file In the Archive file field give the archive a name with full path Use the file extension CTW whenever possible Do not use the previous extension HTA If you do not specify a path the file will be saved in the CamControl LITE program directory You can also use the suggested file name Note If possible only use directory names with a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters even if your operating system supports longer names Archive capacity MB Specify the size of the archive file in the Archive capacity MB field The archive may be between 1 MB and 2000 MB for hard drive partitions formatted in FAT forma
66. ISDN card as well as transmitters that you reach via the serial interface with an external modem or null modem then in the Transmitter data dialogue box you must select CAPI for those transmitters to be dialled via ISDN see Adding changing or deleting transmitter entries on page 90 Operation via serial PC interface modem Configure the serial interface of your PC with the following settings If you contact your transmitters via TCP IP and or CAPI only then in the Mode dropdown list select Off This releases the serial interface for other applications Mode The Mode drop down list allows you to specify particular properties for operation via serial interface Mode Normal Leased line Nullmodem Inthis mode CamControl LITE automatically detects whether there is a null modem at the selected interface of your PC or not If a null modem cable is detected a connection can be immediately established to the directly connected transmitter device If amodem is connected to your PC and not a null modem cable the receiver software initialises this modem and is then available for dial up connections Switching off Inthe CamTel INI configuration file you can instruct CamControl LITE automatic null not to automatically detect a null modem in Normal mode This may be modem detection necessary for proper operation with certain modems under some rare circumstances Further information on changing this entry can be found in the relevant
67. If necessary enter the access data for the camera in the Configure dialogue see Configure User name Password on page 226 e Incompatible video compression procedure e At present only the JPEG or MJPEG image format is supported for the transfer of images from the IP camera to the HeiTel device Ensure therefore that your camera transfers the images in a suitable format Compressed video transfers with the standards H 264 or MPEG 4 are currently not supported 7 23 1 Supported IP cameras A complete list of the integrated IP cameras is available under http www heitel com upload downloads en 11 technical product information IPcam_ list pdf Generic commands for IP cameras Generally speaking the use of additional IP cameras can only be realised via updates of device firmware Generic GET commands can be used to create commands with which to call up JPEG images for IP cameras whose command structure corresponds to the IP cameras already integrated see Generic GET commands on page 228 These commands allow you to integrate additional IP cameras without firmware modifications Compatible IP cameras and OEM versions Other camera models by a manufacturer may in principle be compatible with the IP cameras listed here so that they function with a model from the list Even if the camera models are by different manufacturers the cameras in question can be the same OEM versions If necessary ask your supplier or manufa
68. Mice and other pointing devices E Mobile devices Modems E Monitors Ll Multifunction adapters d Multi port senal adapters I Network Client Network Protocol 8 Network Service E Non Plug and Play drivers PCMCIA adapters Step 7 Select Microsoft in the Manufacturer list and as Network Adapter Remote NDIS Compatible Device Select Network Adapter we Click the Network Adapter that matches your hardware then click OK If you have an installation disk for this feature click Have Disk Manufacturer Network Adapter Marvell EQIRAS Async Adapter Microsoft Cl Remote NDIS based Internet Sharing Device Motorola Inc Remctet vig n EUSB RNDIS Adapter EE en prince stone patible Device Gl This driver is digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important Step 8 Press Yes on the following dialogue Installing this device driver is not recommended because Windows cannot verify that it is compatible with your hardware If the driver is not compatible your hardware will not work correctly and your computer might become unstable or stop working completely Do you want to continue installing this driver After successful installation of the driver one can now build up a connection via USB to the HeiTel device 26936_02 287 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Driver installation in Windows 7 Step 1 Before you connect one of the approp
69. No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ison TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ison TCPIIP Analogue ISDN TCPIIP Please read the section for your application or for the type of data transmission you are using Analogue Operating an analogue dial modem at your PC page 302 ISDN ISDN card or external ISDN TA page 303 TCP IP Connection via local network cards page 304 Analogue Telephone Network After you have excluded general sources of error see General Errors Faults on page 301 and your PC is obviously able to communicate with the connected modem Checking the Modem with a Telephone Please check your analogue modem by dialling a mobile telephone or normal telephone as transmitter telephone number The telephone should ring and you should hear the carrier signal just as with a fax machine Some of the following errors faults can be excluded by making this check 302 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Receiver PC No connection possible error message No Dialtone or even No Carrier depending on the type of modem Connect message but screen remains black connection is established supported Outside line required e g predial 0 Modem is set to Wait for dial tone Defective connection or connection cable Incorrect mo
70. Off Select CAPI 2 0 If necessary enter your MSN in the MSN field Then click OK 12 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Transmitter data e Click Dial The Transmitter index now opens Click Add In the Transmitter data dialog box that now opens enter the name and the telephone number of a HeiTel compatible transmitter in the corresponding fields You can find a suitable transmitter in the demo transmitter list on the information CD for example Ensure that Prefix 1 is selected Now confirm your details with OK The Transmitter data dialog box closes and you find yourself back in the Transmitter index Establishing a connection The Transmitter index is still open The desired transmitter is highlighted in the transmitter list Now click Dial The software starts dialing and establishing a connection Online e Once a remote connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 4 Connecting via network TCP IP connection quick start Requirements e In order to be able to operate a HeiTel transmitter in a network you need a PC with a network connection and configured TCP IP protocol or an active Internet connection Configuration e Start CamControl LITE Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens In the Options list click one of the connection channels Port A From the drop d
71. Options of selected transmitters UK _ JV Update existing transmitters in transmitter list Cancel V Add new transmitters to transmitter list Device detection The device detection returns the serial number port and IP address of the transmitters found A name is displayed if this has been programmed with the recorder settings see Device name on page 114 Allocation by serial number Using the two letters in the serial number it is possible to allocate the device to a device type The following table contains an overview of the current devices which support device detection see LAN auto detection support on page 124 You can allocate the devices found to a model series even if the name is missing or if the name provides you with little information VG Device series OOO o feemoievem mo SVR Device series 100 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Selected network adapter Selected network adapter Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Paketplaner Minip 192 168 31 66 Realtek RTL8139 Familie PCl Fast Ethernet NIC 2 Paketpla 192 168 115 66 Intel A PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Paketplaner Minip 192 168 3166 Using this selection menu you can select the network segment to be searched by selecting the corresponding network card Current notebooks in particular often have a WLAN interface for a wireless local network in addition
72. Picture Selection Event View Statistic Tools Info Open archive Close archive Delete pictures Write configuration profile Save sequence Strg E Save picture Strg S Save picture with on screen information Print picture Strg P Configure printer 1 M W814003 C00 Exit 5 After confirming the security question with Yes the configuration profile for the removable hard drive will be reset For this process all recorded images will be deleted and archive passwords that have been set will be overwritten TTI hl A Do you really want to set user archive settings All images will be deleted and passwords will be overwritten 6 Successfully resetting the configuration profile is confirmed with this message xi e 1 Configuration profile successfully written After finishing this procedure the removable hard drive will be close to delivery condition This means that neither a valid configuration profile nor configuration data from previous installations nor valid image data will be found in the given storage medium Note If you access the hard drive with a file browser such as Windows Explorer the file structure of a HeiTel removable hard drive will be displayed If you attempt an evaluation of these archive data with the CamControl PLAYER software you will receive an error message stating that this is not a valid archive file MM ix x File M WY814003 C00 is not
73. Port Baud COM1 7 115200 ha Init prefix Prefix 1 Prefix 2 JATEWV1SO 0 ATD r Maximum connection duration M On 1 s Connection without time limit Offline Take call Response to incoming calls alarms as discussed on page 72 User User configuration as discussed on page 74 Extras Additional functions as discussed on page 75 HTconnect Configuration of the HTconnect function as discussed on page 77 PC Archive Receiver archive configuration as discussed on page 78 Port A Configuration of communication settings as discussed on page 80 Serial channel Configuration of the transparent channel as discussed on page 85 Tours Program automatic calls to various transmitters as discussed on page 86 Configure transmitter index Maintain transmitter list and supplement reference images as discussed on You can make a few additional settings in the CamControl LITE configuration file CamTel INI see Program parameters CamTel INI on page 245 Further functions for selected transmitters can be configured in the R01 files see Transmitter specific configuration files starting on page 261 Note 26936_02 If the Setup button is not available grey the current user does not have system access see User on page 74 71 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 6 1 Take a call In the Take call dialogue box you can adjust CamControl LITE s re
74. Stop playback Next picture Last picture A j Pre alarm bar Slider Playbackspeed Loop playback Enable Disable control 150 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 10 4 Camera control inputs Open the Camera control inputs tab from the menu under the Alarm node Camera control inputs allow you to control and monitor your system on an individual camera basis Alarm inputs Pre alarm Site Archive Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position aut_4 gt Connections a Camera settings Linked with Camera groups Trigger level Mode Motion Motion Privacy zones Alarms 1 Normally opened z Alarm Z fio s z Alarm inputs Pre alarm L Nomaly opened P N X 10s d Camera control inputs 2 Nirmal opened of is Motion detection Video loss 3 Normally opened z Fire Paric X fi Os z a Site archive 4 Normally opened x Entry Exit is 4 3 3 4 a Camera position authen Audio Relays PTZ control 0s Sadan 5 _ Normally opened z Off Ea fio s E Alarm panel Log file 6 Normally opened X Off xj 0s m Extras Upload 2 Download Se ee ai m r 7 Normally opened X Off thd 10s v R OK 8 Normally opened Off na fi Os z E Cancel S 3 Normally opened Ba Off X 10s gt i Site archive state _Site achive state _ 10
75. The DTR signal interrupts a connection or the establishment of a connection e DCD or M5 must indicate an active connection e The modem ISDN TA must not accept calls automatically ATSO 0 e The modem ISDN TA must send verbal messages ATV 1 for recognition of incoming calls e The modem ISDN TA must not send echo messages ATEO e The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol e Ifthe ISDN terminal adapter is connected to other ISDN data devices with an SO bus an MSN may need to be assigned to the ISDN TA generally the phone number without prefix Operation with a telephone system In this case the telephone number must be prefixed with the outside line number s In some cases there may be problems with the modem s dial tone recognition In this case turn off the modem s dial tone recognition frequently ATX3 Alternatively you can insert a pause after the outside line number s e g We wait for dial tone ISDN network operation The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol Note Many of the above settings are factory defaults and can be activated with AT amp F If you are still experiencing problems always consult your modem and transmitter manuals 7 4 4 Internal ISDN TA Modem Go to the Internal ISDN TA Modem tab via the selection menu under the node Connections If the internal ISDN Card or alternatively the PSTN Card for analogue telephone connections is installed configure it us
76. Xtralis Variables for camera specific dialogue box You can configure variables for the buttons list boxes These variables are then sent when a button is activated deactivated or when a function is selected The variables or control functions are in line with the display mode s selected using the MODE variable Single double list box indexed Speed 2 The simple or double indexed list box possible values for MODE 2 3 18 19 is used for specific cameras and serves to control relays and or specific camera functions If a function is selected in the top or bottom drop down list then the receiver software sends the command stored in the R01 file to the device dome P T head remote adapter etc via the digital image transmission system The position of the text in the drop down list is specified by means of consecutive numbering x range from 1 to 99 The number of the labelling text must match that of the corresponding command CTx Text for top list box max 12 characters CMDx Command for top list box The bottom list box can be defined indexed on the basis of the entry selected in the top list box In such a way 99 entries in the top list box can each be combined with 99 options in the bottom drop drop list CyPNUM Number of entries range from 1 to 99 for the bottom list box The value y defines the reference to the command in the top list CyPTx Text for the bottom list box The value y specifies the r
77. Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide x Extras Device Log file User Date amp Time T Last caller Connections F7 Change of inputs Camera settings Camera groups I Only when armed ile I Temperature Privacy zones Alarms IV Video signal loss detection Site archive Aulo p Service Relays PTZ control IV Alarm call in case of reboot h Sena chemel IT Alarm call in case of defective Hard Disk E Alarm panel IV Routine call every 24 hours mm 3 E Upload Download IP Camera Extra HYBRID Card 4 I Use without hard disk drive Hang up and redial on alarm Release access for PTZ Relay Audio after 30 v seconds IV Preemption 0K Software video signal lost detection Immediately X Cancel Merge into images 5 IV Merge camera names into images Site archive state IV Merge transmitter name into images V Merge date and time into images Service Alarm call in case of Following a device restart triggered by switching on or for example by a reboot configuration dependent restart such as following an IP address change the telephone number or IP address stored in the entry Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 is dialled when this option is checked Note If at the same time as the alarm Alarm call in case of reboot a notification of a defective missing hard drive is given the hard disk error alarm see Alarm call in case of defective hard disk o
78. a FIFO basis first in first out The oldest images are replaced by new recordings after a certain period of time The four or ten storage areas depending on the model prevent other cameras from overwriting the recorded images however Note For IP cameras there is no storage of pre alarm images 26936 _02 51 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 7 1 Accessing pre alarm images Once you are connected to an active CamTel SVR transmitter click Fialky lto open the Transmitter archive dialogue box The most recent image of the first camera with pre alarm images automatically opens If the Pre alarm button is disabled there are no images in the transmitter archive In this case check whether the pre alarm function has been activated for at least one camera under Recorder settings Alarm Pre alarm see Pre alarm CamTel VG and CamTel SVR only on page 148 Transmitter archive controls Archive access is controlled with the buttons at the top of the Transmitter archive dialogue box Transmitter archive CamTels Lis L gt Lt Show first oldest image One image back One image forward Play the pre alarm sequence from current image position Last most recent image Changing Using the Camera buttons you can switch between the individual camera cameras in the same way as during live operation Image When playing back transmitters archives the camera name is shown on number Date the left underneath
79. a receiver that was triggered by this camera control input or the alarm input In the case of CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices recording with an active camera control input depends on the settings Online signalling CamControl LITE displays the camera name on the camera button in red instead of black for active camera control inputs of active connections This makes it easy to track transmitter side events You can also have alarms signalled acoustically by making a setting in a transmitter specific R01 file see Extended software settings on page 266 Extending the alarm functions Requirements In the CamControl LITE software V3 84 or newer and the device firmware V1 78 or newer the alarm function has been extended by the following options Functions e Entry Exit Arm delay The video system is armed or disarmed within the monitored area The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the Cl Adapter Cl1O Adapter delay the alarm by a configurable time period For every camera channel only one time period can be configured which applies to both Entry and Exit for the monitored object e Fire Panic Continuously armed The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the Cl Adapter CIO Adapter always trigger an alarm regardless of whether the video system is armed e Alarm The
80. and format depend on the IP camera e CamDisc VG CamDisc VGs CamServer VG Cam4mobile VG CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs CamServer Cam4mobile e The recording of images by analogue cameras depends on the programming for the conditional refresh mode e Image recording by IP cameras always takes place as fullscreen image regardless of the parameters set for the conditional refresh mode Image size and format depend on the IP camera 7 11 2 Archive passwords Open the Passwords tab from the menu under the Site Archive node This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices You can protect the image archive against unauthorised access with one or two passwords These passwords must be entered before the archive can be accessed locally or via a remote connection 26936_02 161 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Recorder settings E x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms E Site archive Video settings Password 1 Password 2 Current password Current password New password New password E POS ATM Audio Track settings Confirm password Confirm password E Video 1 in E Video 2 in f Video 3 in E Video 4 in E Video 5 in OK Cancel Site ar
81. are advised to select a suitable tariff on pay to use connections such as DSL or UMTS Since the connection between the transmitter and the receiver software is permanently established as it were whilst the data volume as described above is relatively modest on a resting connection a volume tariff should generally be a more costfavourable option than a time based tariff for this application You are advised always to make checks at regular intervals on the data volumes used for the correspondingly configured connection and on the costs incurred under the chosen tariff With leased lines via DSL or UMTS 3G you are making use of third party provider services as a user Note Please note that HeiTel Digital Video GmbH has no influence on and assumes no liability for the function and availability of services obtained from other parties 6 9 6 4 Extended functionality of the HTconnect Server From software version 1 07 of the HTconnect Server component of the CamControl LITE software package version 3 99 or later communication from the software modules has been switched from Windows messages to UDP User Datagram Protocol 26936_02 105 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Extended HTconnect Server window 2011 08 22 08 02 59 HT connect Connect attempt from 192 168 31 180 accepte 2011 08 22 08 02 51 HT connect Connect attempt from 192 168 31 176 accepte 2011 08 22 08 02 50 Status server started on port 4444 2011
82. are described in detail in the ISDN adapter manual The following functions are described in the following Function Description msn Query set MSN ireset x Automatically reset ISDN TA every x minutes show Show configuration 276 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide TA PPP V5 246 c Copyright Stollmann E V GmbH cmds O Hayes prot 10 X 75 isdn O DSS1 fress ects 1 cded I catei 2 castri 0 bsize 2048 start 1 dbits 8 sbits 1 prty 0 br 8 115200 or O adaptive Lets be 88 90 dtes Q tii 2 n20 I0 Ki 7 Function pesin O O dial hayespar Export content of adapter register 002B0D0A08031 010400 8 8 3 Installing and using ISDN cards If you are using an internal ISDN card instead of or in addition to external ISDN terminal adapters a CAPI driver is installed Your operating system accesses the ISDN resources through this CAPI driver Programs configured to use internal cards also use the CAPI interface to communicate with these devices CamControl LITE supports the direct use of ISDN cards via the CAPI interface see Port A on page 80 8 9 Installation of device drivers To operate your CamControl LITE software it may be necessary to have particular drivers installed The drivers which are part of the scope of delivery are found in the subdirectory Drivers in your CamControl LITE software Device dependent installation procedures e CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 Cam
83. base address of the alarm system in accordance with VdS protocol requirements from which your HeiTel device receives the relevant messages These messages are used to control certain device functions You input the address using hexadecimal values Composition of address Address Enabled pff On activation On de activation On both Single contact single transmitter Address supplement sub address In the Enabled column you specify under what conditions this message is to trigger additional functions of the relevant line Off On activation On de activation or On both The standard setting is Off Po In the Camera column you assign a camera number ranging from 1 to 10 to the individual control inputs to which the triggering of the respective control input refers The camera number is selected via a rocker switch The range of values comprises the number of camera inputs on your image transmitter The standard setting is 1 26936 _02 205 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel CamControl LITE SoftwareGuide i sSSCSCSC TI by Xtrallis Xtralis Preset You allocate presets to the individual control inputs via the Preset column An allocation only makes sense for connected PTZ systems or dome cameras for which the presets have been programmed accordingly For other cameras select the option Off On dome protocols with transmission of hexadecimal numerical values up to 127 presets position 0 to 126 are s
84. been successfully installed you will see this final dialogue box Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for E Linux USB Ethernet ANDIS Gadget Click Finish to close the wizard Back Complete the driver installation by selecting Finish 8 9 1 4 Installation of the USB driver for SVR s series The USB direct connection requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 12 MBit s If you use the USB direct connection with a CamDisc HNVR you can obtain a maximum nominal transfer rate of 480 MBit s Please note that only devices are supported that are equipped with a modified front board starting Nov 2011 This function can be used with the following devices if their firmware is of version 1 72 or later e CamDisc HNVR 10 device serial number NV9xxxxx e CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s device serial number WS1xxxxx and WV1xxxxx e CamServer 1 CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 device serial number WBxxxxxx WCxxxxxx and WD 1xxxxx The USB drivers for these devices can be found in the Drivers subdirectory of CamControl LITE software as of version 3 80 e PL2502NW_v20044 exe Driver file for Windows 2000 and Windows XP e pl2502vista exe Driver file for Windows Vista e pl2501win732b
85. cece eeeceeeeceececececeneesesteeeeceeneeeeeeees 190 E13 Relays ttc ooo bot beeen aot fe i eet de hb oe Vette Ses ae 1S 192 T14 PTZ Control cs oces sacs wees os wie eee a Reine Adee eee ogee he Os oitlte 3 194 7 15 Serialchannel 0 2 22 c cece c cece cece cece ceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 196 26936_02 1 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis FAO WIGCOIOUT se oe ee Oe I ck NA aed Bl trical toe N 200 TAT Alarm Panel xsse2s 0 2 nse nee eh Ds et TA Ny DO ES ON 202 7 18 Logfile E E e cece cece EAEE 207 TETI EXTAS pene iene i Soni pt shee lee iene Aah go SULA tee Nore an cee pill ng Aa Nana 208 7 20 Upload download a a a a a a ia iada a aaa T 213 7 21 Firmware update 22 22 2222 e cece cc ceee cece ecceeeeteeeeees 214 7 22 Cl Adapter and CIO Adapter 0 000 e cece eeeeeeeeees 216 TAPA SIP Gamers sa fare asec ahi Bienen eee oe tan fis on EEEE 222 7 24 HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR 231 7 25 PlR Integration s a a a e c cece cece ccc ccc cece cece a A 233 7 26 Analytics Allocating IntrusionTrace Licenses 22002 0 22222 e cece eee eee 238 7 27 Analytics IntrusionTrace Configuration 2 220 000 0000 0 2222 cece cece cece cece eee ee ee ee 239 8 Configuration configuration files and configuration examples 245 8 1 Overview of the used IP Ports 22 0 2 2222 c cece cece ee cc ccceeeec
86. channel Video out EMA Message to be sent Message to be receiver Extras Upload Download es i ok Cancel Site archive state Help Events to be send to GMZ Address Moo fot foo Event a Address Via the address you specify the base address of the alarm system in accordance with VdS protocol requirements You input the address using hexadecimal values Composition of address x x y y z z Single contact single transmitter Device Area Address supplement Aadress sub address In addition to the address entered the following 39 addresses are generated by the program meaning that 40 addresses are available to you for alarm messages to be sent A tabular assignment of Address Event and where necessary Camera number completes the possible messages 26936 _02 203 CamControl LITE Software Guide 204 HeiTel by Xtralis In the Event column you assign an alarm event to the predefined Address Tamper input Aux 2 Temperature Change of settings Motion You can choose from the following events Off No event was defined for this address There is no message Alarm enabled Device armed The device has been armed either via the Al a d control input or via the software function depending on the device configuration Alarm input A device alarm was triggered via the Al in control input This input functions independently of the statu
87. clicking OK Thereafter close the connection When changing the IP address settings the device will restart Enter an available IP address or an IP address allocated to you by your internet service provider in the IP address box factory setting 192 168 31 95 Your digital image transmission system can be dialled at this address Check this address with your network administrator to ensure that it is and will remain a unique address within the network If you are planning a new local network user addresses should be in the address range from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 255 254 the standard range for private network addresses The range could be 192 168 31 1 to 192 168 31 254 for a network covering 254 addresses for example If your network is connected to the Internet via router by dedicated or dial up line or if it is part of your company intranet enter the subnet mask of your sub network in the corresponding box You can find out the relevant subnet mask from your network administrator or internet service provider If you are planning a new local network you should set the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 allows the allocation of 254 network addresses If your network is connected to the Internet via router by dedicated or dial up line or if it is part of your company intranet enter your gateway address in the corresponding box You can find out the relevant gateway address from your network administrator or internet service provider
88. confirmation prompt will appear distinguishing between cases attention ee Delete group You can delete appendant transmitters by pressing ALL e OK deletes only the selected group while the subordinated transmitters will be retained as individual transmitter entries within the transmitter list e All deletes the selected group including all subordinated transmitters from the transmitter list If a group in the transmitter list is checked then you will reach the dialogue Enter group name with the button Modify which is used to modify the name of this group Enter group name xj Demonstration Kiel IP Cancel Tours Tours are not completed for groups but only for individual transmitters So that tours see Configuring tours on page 86 can be completed for transmitters subordinated to groups all transmitter data of the transmitter index in the drop down menu are displayed above the button lt Add see Add on page 86 Camera window when dialling a group Demonstration Kiel IP FH Demo Kiel CamDise svr IP PTZ oF Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP After you have dialled a group for example Demonstration Kiel IP you will see an additional window to the selection of all accessible cameras in the group 96 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide First dial of a group Demo Kiel CamDisc swr IP PTZ dome Camera Ke mmm 3 Static Camera Kiel Demo Kiel CamTel swr IP Whe
89. connected to the Building transmitter two images will be received and archived from Camera 1 four from Camera 2 two from Camera 3 and ten from Camera 5 This procedure will be repeated until a Time limit of connection of 10 minutes has elapsed and the connection is closed Minimum If the Time limit of connection is 0 minutes the specified number of connection duration images would be received and archived from the relevant cameras once Then the connection would be closed Notes on tours CamControl LITE can only carry out tours if the software is not blocked from doing so by receiver archive access configuration of receiver options or another call Follow up processing of tours If tours overlap Tour 001 starts at 11 55 a m and lasts 10 minutes and Tour 002 starts at 12 00 p m or are interrupted for some other reason they are post processed as long as e No settings have been changed on the receiver side in the meantime e The program has not been ended and restarted in the meantime e The next tour will be continued on the same day A tour that had already started will however also be continued on the next day 26936_02 87 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 6 9 Configuring the transmitter index With CamControl LITE you can establish a connection to a transmitter manually yourself carry out tours automatically and process incoming calls alarms The individual transmitter entries also form the basis for
90. corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the CI Adapter ClO Adapter always give the alarm when triggered regardless of whether the video system is armed This function corresponds to the option Connect which was used up to and including CamControl LITE software V3 83 e Off The corresponding configured inputs camera control inputs or inputs for the Cl Adapter C 1O Adapter never give the alarm when triggered Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs In addition to giving an alarm for external camera control inputs or motion detection under the conditions named above see Requirements on page 152 a combination of camera alarm inputs or inputs to the Cl Adapter CIO Adapter and to the internal motion detection can result Your HeiTel video system processes the combined alarm triggers from the device internal motion detection and signal inputs over a time interval 5 seconds A signal input is always reported as the cause of alarm The following table sheds light on this alarm behaviour Trigger with the preselected time interval 5 seconds Reason for alarm 1 Trigger level 2 Trigger level Motion detection Camera control input Camera control input Camera control input Motion detection Camera control input Motion detection Input Cl Adapter CIO Adapter Input CI Adapter CIO Adapter Input Cl Adapter CIO Adapter Motion detection Input Cl Adapter CIO Adapter
91. current version of CamControl LITE replaces all previous versions The software has been approved for the following Microsoft operating systems Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Vista and Windows XP 1 1 Guide on how to read this guide This guide for the CamControl LITE software addresses various target groups Operators Operators are generally normal software users They will receive all necessary information in the following sections of this guide e Working with CamControl LITE page 11 e The Program Interface page 16 e Establishing a connection page 18 e Thecentral control panel page 22 e Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer page 34 e Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG page 51 e Offline Access page 63 Installers Installers require general instructions on handling this application as well as information about the software installation including update and configuration They will receive all necessary information in the following sections of this guide e Installing the Software page 7 e Receiver Software Settings page 71 e Working with CamControl LITE page11 If additional adjustments are necessary information on INI files additional drivers and supplementary software in section Configuration configuration files and configuration examples on page 245 For more information regarding the programming of the HeiTel devices refer to section Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile
92. data record button prints the data of the current sales receipt with the associated image The following information is also printed out file name with path name serial number of the transmitter camera name with time and date 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Synchronisation When accessing camera tracks with transaction data the of image and Synchronisation function provides the following two options sales receipt e Update image from receipt When selecting transaction data the first time relevant image in a sequence is shown e Update receipt from image When playing back image data the associated receipt is shown Accessing IBIS data In contrast to the POS and ATM transaction data IBIS data is not transmitted to your HeiTel video system via an intermediate POS ATM Adapter but rather only via a connected IBIS Adapter with appropriate configuration of the serial interface Another node in the tree structure of the event list indicates the availability of IBIS data Click the button in front of the IBIS data node to open a dialogue box in which you can access these data Only Camera track 1 with IBIS data has its own node and therefore its own access dialogue The IBIS data dialogue box offers the same buttons as operating elements as are found in the Transaction data see Control Elements on page 39 dialogue box CamControl LITE provides you with two ways of accessing recorded IBIS data
93. entered as the location Confirm your selection with Next gt Step 6 This dialogue box provides information about the status of the driver installation 26936 _02 289 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Installing driver software o If you receive a message regarding the Windows logo test you can skip this by selecting Continue Anyway gt Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device gt Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software obtained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software from other sources may harm your computer or steal information Y See details Step 7 After the driver has been successfully installed you will see a final dialogue box Complete the driver installation by selecting Finish Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device Video Gateway USB Remote NDIS Network Gadget 290 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Driver installation in Windows Vista Depended from firmware and software version you are requested to install an USB driver after having plugged inthe USB cable Follow the instructions in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 279 Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Dr
94. event recording You can change the size of this partition in the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 Depending on the settings for pre and post alarm sequences and the specified number of desired events the storage capacity required by event recording per camera track will be displayed immediately Note This value is an estimate because it depends on several automatically changing factors The actual value will be different from this estimated value Below the values for reserved and estimated required storage capacity messages concerning event size settings may be displayed 184 Desired number of events exceeds possible number of events If the desired number of events exceeds the possible number of events the following message will be displayed Current allocated size for events 3 22 GB Estimated required size for events 4 45 GB Possibly there is not enough HDD capacity allocated to record 1500 events of the configured size Please increase the track division size or increase the event patition size or reduce the number of events In this case you can reduce the number of desired events increase the camera track or increase the partition for event recording see Track settings on page 175 and see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Possible number of If the desired number of events is
95. in the picture file You can check the authenticity of these images with the archive access software 66 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Image authenticity check Image is not valid Checksum is not equal Check image Cancel To open the dialogue box for checking individual images select Tools Image authenticity check You can load the picture to be checked in the Check image dialogue box If the picture is authentic the message The image passed the authentication check is displayed If the authenticity check produces a negative result the image is judged INVALID and the additional error message Image is not valid Checksum is not equal appears The authenticity check will return an INVALID result if e the image has been modified e the image was not created by a HeiTel system e the image was created with older versions of CamControl 4 pre V2 23 CamTel Windows software or the HeiTel Player pre V3 11 The Load image dialogue opens automatically when the results of the check are confirmed Another image can now be checked Another picture can also be loaded by clicking Check image 5 1 5 Exporting image sequences Exporting image sequences In addition to exporting individual pictures you can also export entire image sequences for a specific period of time You can save the sequence either as an AVI clip avi or as an HeiTel export archive hpx AVI clips If y
96. in this configuration menu because these addresses are taken from the menu Phone number amp IP addresses see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 26936_02 137 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis IP address 5 The IP address or symbolic address in this field is user definable You must include the appropriate separators when entering this IP address e g 124 124 124 124 If you are using a DNS service you may enter a symbolic address here For the system to recognise the entry as a symbolic IP address you must put the address in quotation marks e g www your_domain com The IP addresses of your DNS service must be entered on the Network TCP IP dialogue window see Network TCP IP on page 121 Activation IP address Using the On option activate the receivers to which a HTconnect 1 to IP address 5 connection is to be established by the transmitter For HTconnect connections invalid entries such as telephone numbers are greyed out No connection to these receivers can be made with HTconnect 7 5 Camera settings The Camera settings tab allows you to make the following settings for transmission and recording for the individual cameras e Activation e Camera name e Brightness e Contrast e Colour In the case of CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 you can only program the Activation and Camera name options see Activation on page 138 Recorder settings
97. leased line is suitable for transmitters with DSL UMTS connections with dynamic IP addresses thereby eliminating the need for DynDNS entry Dynamic Domain Name System entry with the corresponding providers and for devices within company provider networks where the firewall restrictively prevents incoming calls Recorder settings x External modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect 4 Device User Date amp Time E Connections m HTconnect only TCP IP Network TCP IP Pott p333 El Port 3000 and Port 80 are already in use External Modem Intemal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers IP address 1 T On Live video settings E Mail IP address 2 VV Gr Camera settings IP address 3 R Gn Camera groups Motion detection zones IP address 4 www your_domain con Vv On Privacy zones Alarms IP address 5 192 168 131 79 Vv On Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Cancel Site archive state Help Enter the port for HTconnect connections The standard setting is Port 3333 Please note that this port must match the settings made for the receiver software see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 102 For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl LITE press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page 245 P IP address 1 to IP The address entries for IP address 1 to IP address 4 cannot be changed address 4
98. length Delete track Soyal Card 100 57 Reader All other POS ATM IBIS data tracks are set to 0 Confirming with OK causes existing POS ATM IBIS data to be overwritten Using this configuration the video system allows up to 2 000 000 transactions of the Soyal Card Reader to be logged Note For recording Soyal data only the first POS ATM IBIS data track can be used If you reduce the track size of this data track you can assign free percentage values to additional tracks proportionately and use these where necessary to record POS data The following Soyal data is recognised and can also be evaluated Armed status Time of the card reader Card ID Card Reader ID and Card valid invalid The Soyal data is accessed in the same way as ATM data The Set values for SOYAL recording button may be disabled greyed out Set values for SOYAL recording If necessary follow the information positioned to the right of the button and change the configuration for the Serial channel see Serial channel on page 196 26936 _02 171 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 11 5 Keywords You can call up the Keywords dialogue window via the selection menu under the POS ATM IBIS node which is subordinate to Site archive This menu item is only available for devices of the CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer and CamDisc SVR series x POS ATM Keywords Adapter Device aa 7 a SE
99. menu you open a dialogue window with the name Device detection in local area network by left clicking on the function LAN device autodetection Search for devices in local area network After opening the window the CamControl software will automatically search through the local network for current HeiTel devices SVR series Cam4mobile series CamServer CamDisc HNVR and will list the devices found including the following information serial number name P port and IP address As aresult of this search only those devices are displayed that will fulfil all of the following conditions e The device is operational and connected to the network e A fixed or dynamic IP address of the local network was assigned to the device e The device has the respective firmware available minimum requirement Firmware 1 38 and the function LAN auto detection support was activated see LAN auto detection support on page 124 26936_02 99 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Device detection in local area network x M Search for devices in local area network Selected network adapter Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Paketplaner Minip 192 168 31 66 Serialnumber_ Name Pot IP address Cv547015 CamDise svr 10 1 3000 192 168 31 170 CV529013 CD svri0 7 PTZ2 3000 192 168 31 221 CV547016 CD svr10 8 3000 192 168 31 222 M0620030 CM 4 H13 3000 192 168 31 227 MV631013 CM 10 14 3000 192 168 31 228 ea a e
100. minimum height is essential to avoid false alarms due to detection of small objects An object will only generate an alarm if its height is greater than the specified value The value is expressed in metres For detecting humans a typical minimum height is 0 3 metres because the person could be crawling To avoid detection of momentary motion e g a bird crossing the scene To avoid detection of small motion e g of the leaves of a tree moved by the wind 7 27 2 Calibration To calibrate the scene click the Calibration button in the Intrusion configuration dialogue window Calibration is mandatory as the detection is based on 3D measures Make sure calibration is done carefully at a point near the camera and further away in the detection area Speed and size calculations in the areas closer and further than these points will be less accurate and can lead to false alarms and missed targets there Correct calibration will eliminate many false alarms and allow reliable detection as intended 240 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide First select the desired unit of measure feet or metres and define the actual height of the reference object preferably a person Then you can use a snapshot from live or recorded images to draw the measure of the persons Image A shows the image of the object near the camera Image B shows the image of the same object far from the camera For calibrati
101. modem cable For CamDisc SVR and Transmitter is CamTel SVR devices enter a switched off not in baud rate of 115200 the factory setting or device detects the baud rate defective automatically auto baud rate Null modem is detection connected when Check the transmitter use device is switched on the transmitter manual Test the COM port with another device and program e g mouse or modem and Hyper Terminal Switch the transmitter off for a short period and switch it back on after connecting all cables correctly When connecting devices 1 Harddisk cannot be 1 Remove the hard disk from with a hard disk the addressed the unit when switched off Connection Status Hard disk is not check and or clean the dialogue box appears entirely formatted contact strip of the removable Setup or Setup HDD is device has been frame not fully loaded After switched off too Test the hard disk in the PC connection is established soon using Scandisk thorough the hard drive archive can surface test untick not be read out Automatically fix errors 9 5 No remote transmission possible Troubleshooting for problems arising during remote communications via telephone and computer networks is divided into several thematic sections that you should read through systematically The errors faults are categorised in the individual sections according to the various methods of data transmission No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes
102. node In the event of an alarm you can inform up to two recipients by email with or without an alarm image using the E Mail function Recorder settings x Network TCP IP Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai Device Ena User Date amp Time Z Send email in case of alarm Connections 7 Send email in case of picture waming threshold reached Network TCP IP aon Extemal Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Dutgoing mail SMTP Phone amp IP numbers smtp heitel com Live video settings E Mail HT connect User information Camera settings PA Camera groups Motion detection zones alarmdemo heitel com Privacy zones 2 Te Alarms Ee Site archive Audio Relays Optional message or link PTZ control nee es or lin B pr Alarm report transmitter location hitp 192 168 31 170 oK Destination in case of Alarm Destination email address 1 Cancel info your_domain com 7 Alam image as attachment Site archive state Destination email address 2 alarm control_centre gmx net Alarm image as attachment Send email incase of Activate the Send email in case of alarm see Send email in case of alarm alarm on page 136 option if in addition to the alarm notification by modem ISDN or network connection See Phone and IP numbers on page 131 amessage should be sent via email 134 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LIT
103. of live images makes it possible to view the area monitored immediately Our systems open up completely new areas of application and additional markets Break in or false alarm Our range of devices also includes our CamTel SVR or CamTel VG products With an external modem or an optionally integrated ISDN card we provide you with easy to install high quality products for remote video surveillance The recording of images from before the actual alarm was triggered means you have a concrete basis on which to make alarm verification decisions in a matter of seconds Powerful receiver software At the heart of our products is the CamControl LITE software which allows you to configure and access all HeiTel products This software product is included with our hardware and is available in various languages It allows you to install and control our products with ease using typical personal computers Integrated evaluation software With our CamControl PLAYER you can evaluate and process archived images quickly and conveniently The CamControl PLAYER software allows you to evaluate both PC receiver archives and video recordings on CamDisc SVR or CamDisc VG removable hard drives The software is a stand alone product and is available free of charge It allows third parties police public prosecution service etc to review original files in order to preserve evidence or suchlike Professional video management CamControl PRO is the latest developmen
104. of this input Closed or Open while On means that it detects a state change Opening Edge or Closing Edge Depending on the values in Recording interval s and Number of images video images are recorded by the associated camera Motion The integrated software motion detector can be activated for input states Closed or Open Recording takes place if the device detects the relevant input state and motion in the video image Define recording details in the Recording Interval s and Number of images boxes The integrated software motion detector can be set to three levels of sensitivity Select Motion for maximum sensitivity and Motion for minimum sensitivity The image is then checked for movement every 300 ms Graphical The diagram directly above the input states shows which input states are representation activated deactivated for recording Red means active and black inactive Recording interval s This field defines the recording interval between consecutive images The recording interval applies to all operating modes You can enter values between 0 and 999 seconds in increments of 1 10ths of a second 0 seconds results in maximum recording speed The recording interval can be greater that the set value if recording is not in conditional refresh mode or if several cameras are recording simultaneously Number of images The Number of images field defines the number of images to be recorded if the image archive eithe
105. org General notes on the OpenStreetMap project e OpenStreetMap is a project with the goal of creating a free map of the world Volunteers collect or discover geo information with for example a GPS device by walking or driving through the white areas on the existing OpenStreetMap map This process is called mapping or cartographising In prepared form these collected raw data result in material for maps e Based on this volunteer collaboration the degree of geoinformation coverage varies widely around the world It ranges according to region from very detailed to not yet covered e The collection of data is constantly being expanded 8 10 2 Uninstallation of the GPS Data Viewer The GPS Data Viewer software can be uninstalled via two different methods 8 10 2 1 Uninstallation via the Control Panel e By selecting Start Menu Control Panel Add and Remove Programs you will get an overview of the installed software e Select the GPS Data Viewer software e f necessary check the Support Information to verify that the desired installation has been selected Under Support Information the installation path to the GPS Data Viewer software will be displayed e Click on the Remove button GPS Data iewer Uninstall x 2 j Are you sure you want to completely remove GPS Data Viewer and all of its components e After confirming the security question with Yes the software will be uninstalled xl 1 GPS Data Viewer was successfully
106. predefined command sequence ATEOV1 amp D2 amp C 1S0 0 IFC 2 2 generally ensures correct initialisation of the internal 3G UMTS modem Note With the installed Sierra Wireless card MC 7304 or MC 7354 the initialisation command must be set network modes all Initialisation command 2 A further command sequence enables further provider dependent adjustments of the internal 3G 4G modem where necessary Reset Adapter Every This drop down list menu allows you to specify how often you want to reset the internal 3G UMTS modem Certain installations may require the internal 3G UMTS modem to be reset at periodic intervals in order to ensure the availability of the device Please note that this interval is reset after each connection and that the adapter cannot be reset during active connections e With recording pause Select this option to pause the recording of image data during resetting of the adapter MTU This setting for MTU Maximum Transmission Unit is provider dependent standard value 1500 MRU This setting for MRU Maximum Receive Unit is provider dependent standard value 1500 Internal GPS Activate this setting if you are using the internal GPS feature of the 3G 4G wireless module Activate this tick box if you are using an active antenna 7 4 2 1 Provider data The following provider data was researched and tested in May 2011 This data is subject to change always get the current 3G 4G access data from your provider G
107. prepared in fuller detail and contains where necessary the optional supplementary text or link and or the alarm image Alarm message location transmitter location http 192 168 31 170 Unit CamDisc VG 10 1 CV651028 Reason warning threshold continuous recording reached camera 01 Camera 1 Date 2008 12 02 15 24 01 All messages within the body of the email that were generated automatically by the email function contain text information only in English 136 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Alarm image An alarm image as attachment is not generated for this warning even if this option is enabled for the target address 7 4 8 HTconnect Call up the dialogue window HTconnect via the selection menu under the node Connections In HTconnect the current HeiTel devices have a leased line between the transmitter and the receiver software This service is only available for TCP IP connections Note Please also take note of the configuration notes for CamControl LITE software see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 102 For this the TCP IP leased line is always initiated by the transmitter The correspondingly configured HeiTel devices establish a resting permanent connection to the receiver for this For this leased line via TCP IP each transmitter which is connected with a receiver generates a data volume of around 6 bytes per minute for the resting connection The use of the TCP IP
108. prevents installation including virus scanners before are shown The installation program _ Installation CD is Use the original installation reports an error defective CD Download latest program version from our website Category Service Downloads 9 2 Operating CamControl LITE 9 2 1 Video Frame Transmission Error in the Screen Display Error Fault Possible Causes Colours are shown with Defective or incorrect Use anew or updated driver or try errors disturbance to the graphics adapter another colour palette 16 bit 24 right of the logo bit or 32 bit at a resolution of 800x600 Screen logo is shown Incorrect screen settings Change the screen settings incorrectly Resolution 800x600 16 bit Pictures in archive are Missing or incorrect 1 Select asmaller screen faulty graphics driver resolution 800x600 2 Select another colour palette 3 Use another screen driver Pictures are shown with Missing or incorrect Select a smaller screen resolution faulty gaudy pixels graphics driver 800x600 26936_02 297 CamControl LITE Software Guide Remote Module Pan and Tilt Systems Relay 16 Error Fault Possible Causes No operating window appears in the software Control file R01 is missing Control file RO1 has been named incorrectly Control file RO1 has The remote system does not function although the software displays the operating window been copied to the w
109. recorded after the specified search start is returned If there are no sales receipts after this specified time the last most recent sales receipt recorded is returned You can navigate the search result using the toolbar buttons First receipt Previous receipt Next receipt and Last receipt HeiTel by Xtralis 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Text amp price x search POS Transaction dat data 22 12 05 17 14 J3 00 Text amp price search Date amp time search Time window Start Date 2103 2005 X Time 09 52 32 H End Date 23 12 2005 x Time 09 32 50 Order 0519 22 12 2005 1 2 59 22 12 2005 1 1 79 22 12 2005 1 1 79 22 12 2005 1 14 89 22 12 2005 1 11 59 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 22 12 2005 1 ee e090 Search parameter IV 1 Camte a S F 2 opeaera2 I Price b gt oO i IT Price p gt ot I Price b x oO Search items combined AND Y Syncronization Update picture from receipt Update receipt from picture In the Time window area you can define both the Start and End of the search period by entering the Date and Time Alternatively you can select all transaction data allocated to the camera track in question by clicking Select all You can specify up to four text under Search parameter You can also specify a price if you wish When checking the price you can choose between lt
110. remote control interface RS 232 e g remote adapter e g operator console ISDN analogue LAN H TCPAP In order to be able to use the transparent channel you must be using a transmitter with an additional external interface such as CamDisc SVR or CamTel SVR see Serial channel on page 196 Receiver r options m External serial channel Options Extras Pen HTconnect TA PC Archive Select On to activate the serial channel on the PC Port From the Port drop down list select an available COM interface for the transparent channel Baud Select an appropriate transmission speed Refer to the manufacturer s specifications of the external device that you want to connect You can choose from a variety of transmission data formats Transmission data format 8 N 1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 8 N 2 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 8 E 1 8 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 8 0 1 8 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit 26936 _02 85 CamControl LITE Software Guide 6 8 Tours HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE allows you to automatically dial into certain transmitters at preset times and to receive a configurable number of video images from selected cameras If the receiver archive is active on the PC all the images received are saved In such a way you can automate routine checks and assess the received images at a later point in time You can program up to 100 tours each w
111. s 7 DeeP Bee pre Keyword Al 1 2 3 44 45 mG M7 8 9 10 E Connections Camera settings receipt r wpilririeiririedeie ie Camera groups i J 4 J Motion detection zones Pia toes EE a e a a a E a Alarms E Site archive E lalalala laulalala Video settings J J 4 Passwords He a oe Solo le lie ee E POS ATM IBIS ead i oe et it ied oe a tet fet dapter Audio iF i 1 j 4 Track settings Bs sls lalolslalslasls E Video 1 in E Video 2 in 8 Video 3 in a A ed b oh et Net Wek ted Set it a ae oe iS a eo E Cancel era ef te Pea eft te ee i Site archive state eicirie le le le lie te le le Help Keyword The Keyword allows you filter the data These rows contain the keyword identifying the beginning of a new transaction The row with the keyword appears in blue when you are accessing this data Via the following options All and 1 up to 2 4 or 10 you can determine to what camera tracks the individual keywords apply Camera allocation The assignment of transaction data to the respective camera tracks is performed via the configuration of the POS ATM Adapter 7 11 6 Adapter You can call up the Adapter dialogue window via the selection menu under the POS ATM IBIS node which is subordinate to Site archive This menu item is only available for devices of the CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer and CamDisc SVR series 172 26
112. see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 Symbol for Video loss 156 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide When an alarm message is given the corresponding camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same manner as the reporting of camera alarms Note In order to establish a connection to your receiver when the video signal is lost you must enter the phone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 7 10 7 Camera position authentication Open the Camera position authentication tab from the selection menu under the Alarm node For every analogue camera track you can generate up to two reference images CamDisc HNVR This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Camera position authentication can only be programmed for the activated analogue channels see HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 231 Note Ensure that the scene used for camera position authentification is adequately lit under all operating conditions this is an essential requirement Ensure that no image noise shadows or similar have a negative influence on the position authentification function Recorder settings xj Alarm inputs Camera control inputs Motion detection Video l
113. serial transmission speed set on your transmission device default on reset factory setting usually 115200 Baud e Thenclick OK 26936_02 11 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Establishing a connection e Click the Dial button to establish a direct connection to the transmitter via the null modem cable Online e Once the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 2 Dial up connection with modem or external ISDN TA quick start Connection Preparation e Connect the modem or the ISDN TA to an available COM port on your PC and turn on the device Exit all programs that may be using your modem or the IDSN TA also fax programs Configuration e Start CamControl LITE and click Setup The Receiver options dialog box opens In the Options list click one of the connection channels Port A Deactivate the TCP IP option if necessary From the drop down list in the Modem group select Mode Normal From the Port drop down list select the COM port to which you connected the modem or the ISDN TA From the Baud drop down list select a suitable serial transmission speed ISDN connections 115200 Baud analogue connections 38400 115200 Baud In the Init prefix field you can enter an AT command to initialise your modem see Port A on page 80 In the Prefix 1 field enter ATD e Click OK The dialog box closes and the softwar
114. significance Requirements The following minimum requirements apply to the device series mentioned above e Firmware 1 76 or newer e To reset the configuration profile e CamControl PLAYER 3 48 or newer e alternatively CamControl LITE 3 85 or newer or CamControl PRO 3 85 or newer either one with the integrated PLAYER software 3 48 or newer Saving as configuration profile Save the current configuration profile after closing the device parameters in the dialogue box Save Recorder Settings by selecting the option Save as configuration profile once The data will be stored in a nonvolatile memory in the device Save Recorder Settings xj Do you really want to save the new settings Load configuration profile Note If you use device reset to reset the video system to its state upon delivery even a saved configuration profile will be deleted If necessary use the function Upload Download see Upload download on page 213 to store the existing device configuration prior to a device reset With this procedure you will ensure when exchanging hard drives in delivery state or whose configuration profile has been reset see Resetting configuration profile on page 112 that the configuration profile used is the one stored in the video system for configuring the recording tracks Notes e Forvideo systems with device firmware 1 74 or older a stored configuration profile for configuring the recording tr
115. smaller than the possible number of events exceeds events the following message will be displayed desired number of events Current allocated size for events 3 22 GB Estimated required size for events 3 10 GB Possibly there could be more than 1500 Events stored of the configured size Either re allocate disk space for another track or for continuous recording or increase the number of events As more events could be recorded you can increase the desired number of events Alternatively you can allocate hard disk space not required because of fewer events to another track or to continuous recording see Track settings on page 175 and see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 Note Event size will always be adjusted to desired number of events as long as the minimum event size is reached The desired number of events is therefore achieved Event recording with a Soyal Card Reader In order for event recording to be triggered via the Soyal Card Reader it is necessary to define event recording for camera track 1 For the other camera tracks triggering is not possible via this card reader 7 11 11 Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 Open the Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 tab from the menu under the Site Archive node or from the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab These menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer series devices You can modify t
116. svr10 1 IP Ctrl x Main entrance LAN device autodetection FH Demo CamTel svr10 1 IP B Demo CamTel svr10 2 IP FR Demo CamTel svr4 3 IP B Demo CamTel svr4 4 IP E Ja Demonstration Kiel IP FH Demo Kiel CamDisc svr IP PTZ O B Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP aa Demonstration Molfsee ISDN O HF Demo CamDise svr10 1 ISDN Demo CamDise svr10 2 ISDN PTZ Demo CamDisc svr4 3 ISDN Demo CamDisc svr4 4 ISDN MAF Nemo CamTel swin ttt ISMN zi Modify Add Delete Ruildina front zi 7 b A Dial Cancel Help Mean Disc Device or group dial i ey Demonstration Kiel IP FH Demo Kiel CamDise svr IP PTZ o Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP To dial a transmitter or a group you start by double clicking on the transmitter or on the group node or ona transmitter of the respective group Alternatively you can also check first a transmitter a group or the transmitter of a group and then start the dialling process by clicking the Dial button If a group is dialled then the checked transmitter is always dialled first Popup menu With a right click on the list of transmitters a context sensitive popup menu is opened which may contain the following entries e Add new group e Add new transmitter e Cut checked transmitter Ctrl X e Paste cut transmitter Ctrl V e Add new transmitter to group e LAN device autodetection see Device detection in local area network on page 99 e Show transmitter
117. switched to the monitor output e The Opening Edge drop down list is set to On to record images when the closed recording input is opened Once this happens the relevant camera is switched to the monitor output e The recording input is open and Motion Motion or Motion is selected in the Open drop down list Once a movement is detected the transmitter switches to the corresponding video input If motion is detected at different cameras the camera with the highest number is switched example motion for edge recording on camera 1 and camera 3 camera 3 will be switched to the monitor output e The Closing Edge drop down list is set to On to record pictures when the open recording input is closed Once this happens the relevant camera is switched to the monitor output 7 16 0 3 Camera of last recording Displaying image recording Select Display camera of latest image recording if you want to switch to the camera that last recorded an image to the monitor output 26936_02 201 CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 17 Alarm Panel For its current devices HeiTel offers a connection to alarm panels in accordance with the standardised protocol VdS 2465 supplement S3 protocol enhancement for interface connection of video monitoring systems on alarm systems HeiTel by Xtralis This protocol enables a functional interconnection of HeiTel image transmitters with alarm panels via the TCP IP network protocol Core functions of bot
118. the control input for the variants Normally opened and Normally closed e Camera alarm If the Normally opened or Normally closed contact is operated depending on the type of circuit a camera alarm is activated Manipulations of the detector line such as interruption or short circuit cause triggering as soon as the CamDisc VG 4c no longer measures the predefined control resistance of 10 kOhm 440 Normally closed BS 8418 _ Ri R Control input Ri Rt 1 5 KQ 41 In the wiring variant Normally closed BS 8418 with two resistances a distinction is made between three different states e Not triggered The figure shows the safe state not triggered of the detector line or the control input e Camera alarm If the Normally closed contact is operated a camera alarm is activated e Sabotage alarm If the detector line is interrupted or shorted a sabotage alarm is activated 296 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 9 Troubleshooting The following chapters should allow you to be able to determine the reasons for a fault or error and to independently arrive at a solution The individual chapters are structured systematically by theme Text passages should only be skipped when they contain a reference to additional information 9 1 Installation problems Type of Error Fault Possible Causes The computer crashes or Another active program Closeall running programs Windows error messages
119. the camera within the device firmware Please refer to the overview in this guide See Supported IP cameras on For IP cameras integrated via a Generic GET command see Generic GET commands on page 228 there is generally no PTZ support 195 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 15 Serial channel The transparent serial channel provides a simple way to transfer control data for remote control between receiver PC and transmitter during image transmission As shown in the illustration data can be transmitted via connected terminals see Serial Channel on page 85 The settings are updated immediately during the current connection when you click OK Redialling is therefore not required Receiver PC COM 2 LJ COM 3 ISDN analog GSM LAN CJ null modem cable TCPHP V 24 LJ 1 modem cable as mye oS LJ PC as O terminal PC as I O terminal Recorder settings a xi Serial channel Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Baud rate Mode Camera groups 3600 z Jema zl Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Function DESI Site archive Transparent ka Audio Relays Vi E EMA Extras Upload Download Firmware update IP Camera OK Cancel Site archive state Help Baud rate Select an appropriate transmission speed for the external serial interface from the drop down list Refer to the manufacture
120. the cursor moves to field containing the incorrect entry CamControl LITE will not start until the user has logged on correctly This process is logged in the event list see Event list on page 20 together with the user name User logoff or change To exit the software click Close If User Management is active the User identification dialogue box prompts you to re enter your password before the program closes It is also possible to switch users by entering another valid user name and password Both program end and user change are logged in the event tree Note If there is one active connection to a transmitter the first time you click Close this connection is closed 4 2 2 Initialisation Error Port A i xj X The COM identifier is invalid or unsupported All important system components are configured and initialised as far as possible on program start If an error occurs the corresponding message will appear Do not ignore these messages Deal with the underlying cause Possible causes include Selected COM interface does not exist COM ports have be multiply assigned by other programs ports or the serial channel CAPI driver not installed Incorrect AT command during initialisation of modem or ISDN TA Modem or ISDN TA not switched on during initialisation or connected to a different COM port 26936 _02 15 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Modem and ISDN TA initialisation Port A Initialise m
121. the evaluation of this logfile is the CamControl LITE software version 4 02 46 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Storage capacity The battery buffered logfile permits 16 383 lines of up to 64 characters each to be stored approx 1 MB In parallel to this the transmitter logfile may also be written to a removable storage medium removable hard disk or CF This logfile has 1024 lines with up to 64 characters each approx 64 KB If the maximum number of lines is exceeded the oldest entry is always overwritten when a new line is created FIFO x Type Date vent S l 4 1 2011 06 09 13 21 49 Login demo NW 0 R 46 C rA 2 2011 06 09 13 21 44 Logout demo 0 CMD i 3 2011 06 09 13 21 44 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 4 2011 06 09 13 21 25 No video signal on input 01 x 5 2011 06 09 13 21 10 No video signal on input 01 Z 6 2011 06 09 13 20 21 Login demo NW 0 R 47 C 7 2011 06 09 13 20 19 Logout demo 0 UNK 8 2011 06 09 13 20 19 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 4 9 2011 06 09 13 20 16 Login demo NW 0 R 47 C 4 10 2011 06 09 13 20 14 Logout demo 0 UNK i 11 2011 06 09 13 20 14 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 rA 12 2011 06 09 13 20 11 Login demo NW 0 R 47 C 4 13 2011 06 09 13 20 08 Logout demo 0 CMD Li 14 2011 06 09 13 20 08 Caller 0 192 168 031 066 7 15 2011 06 09 13 20 05 Lonin demo NW NR 47 c Fa 703 7 703 Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard F Eno
122. the recipient without keeping any copy for himself and only after the recipient of the product agrees to all of the regulations contained in this licence contract 26936_02 313 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 3 3 3 4 3 5 The customer may not change modify or process the software product in any way without previous written agreement from the licensor The customer is not authorized to rent lease sub licence or lend the software product The licensor reserves the right to change this software product and its accompanying materials at any time as well as the right to its further development improvement or replacement by a newly developed product The licensor is no way obliged to inform the customer regarding changes new developments and further developments or improvements to the software product Neither is the licensor obliged to provide the customer with such Period of Use 4 1 4 2 A licence contract in accordance to these regulations is made for an unlimited period of time A licence granted by these regulations loses its effectiveness without need of cancellations when the customer infringes one of the regulations contained in this contract The customer agrees bindingly in such acase to return or to destroy all copies of the software product according to the wishes of the licensor Destruction of the software package must be confirmed in writing to the licensor Guarantee 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4
123. the transmitter index is nearly reached and if additional transmitters are being supplemented via the function Device detection in local area network see Device detection in local area network on page 99 then the transmitter list is only filled until the maximum number of entries is reached The user receives no feedback notification regarding transmitters which it may not have been possible to add USB node and device grouping The transmitter list can include a supplementary USB node USB direct connection for individual transmitters In addition to this you can create a grouping of several devices USB node You activate or deactivate the USB node amp USB direct connection by going to Receiver options Extras see Transmitter index with USB Node on page 76 88 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide With integrated drivers for the USB interface see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 on page 277 a connection to the transmitter can be established This corresponds to a network connection with a maximum transfer rate of 9 7 MBit s For the CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s devices please observe the conditions of use of the USB connection see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s a
124. to equipment The danger could be loss of data physical damage or permanent corruption of configuration details Warning This icon is used to indicate that there is a danger of electric shock This may lead to death or permanent injury Warning This icon is used to indicate that there is a danger of inhaling dangerous substances This may lead to death or permanent injury Contact Us DACH Asia 86 21 5240 0077 Australia and New Zealand 61 3 9936 7000 www xtralis com www heitel com i 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Table of Contents 1 How to Use this Guide ___ 2 22 00 22 n ee eec cece cceeeeeees 3 1 1 Guide on how to read this guide 000000 o cece cece cece cece cece nann 3 2 Introductions ens he tt ee DIA Ot tllted SS lates SNS lates GSE ee s 5 3 Installing the software 0 00000 ccc cece cece cece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 3 1 Hardware and Software Requirements 22222222 cccceeeeeeeececeees 7 3 2 Licensing regulations 1 002 222 e eee c cece c cece cece ceeeeeeeees 7 3 3 Installing the Software 1 2 0 0 elec cece ccc cece eee e eee eeeeeeceteeeeeeeneeeeeeees 7 3 4 Updating the Software _ 0 20 222 cocoon ccc ccc cece cece ee ceeeeeeeees 8 4 Working with CamControl LITE 0000000 000000 cee cece cece eens 11 4 1 QUICK Staite Rok a ca aoe a teas hae AC Cun nt A kets atta OG A atl 11 4 2 Starting the program
125. to a LAN interface for a cable based local network Note Please note that the following device detection is only limited to the local network segment that you have selected via the network adapter e Network card 1 IP address 192 168 31 66 Search area network segment 192 168 31 0 to 192 168 31 255 e Network card 2 IP address 192 168 115 66 Search area network segment 192 168 115 0 to 192 168 115 255 Start search Via the button Start search you will initiate another search Choose one or more devices from the list in order to use the offered options see Options for the chosen transmitter on page 101 Device selection You select a device by left clicking on the desired entry If there are several devices to choose from that follow one after the other check the first of the desired entries by left clicking then click and hold down the shift key thereafter check by way of another left click on the last entry of the desired devices All entries in between are also checked For optional selection click on the control Ctrl key and hold it down With a left click check all desired device entries The option Select all checks all device entries of the current list Options for the chosen transmitter The button OK is only activated if at least one device entry is selected With OK the following options are implemented for the checked device entries if they were activated Update existing transmitters in transmitter lis
126. to use the software product However you may return the product to the dealer from which you have purchased it for a full refund Use of the Software 1 1 Excepting 3 2 the licensor grants the purchaser the non transferable and non exclusive right to use the enclosed software product within the scope of the following conditions for his exclusive use only 1 2 The permission to use this software product is limited to its use at a single computer workstation irrespective of whether this is a PC workstation within a network or any other multistation computer system or whether this is a single workstation that is not connected to other computer workstations If the software product is to be used at more than one computer workstation then you must either purchase the appropriate number of licences as full individual software versions or a multi user licence right to copy the software or purchase of additional original data media and or manuals which then permits the purchaser additional rights to multiple use of the software 1 3 The permission to use the software on single non networked PC workstations includes the right to install the delivered software from the original data media onto the mass storage of the hardware used as well as the right to load the program into its working memory 1 4 When using the software within a network or on any other multi station computer system this permission of use includes the right to install the purchase
127. tours Opening the transmitter index transmitterindex B Pe Toa M Transmitter list 27 6000 I amp USB direct connection 3 Demo CamDisc svr10 1 IP F Demo CamDisc svr10 1 ISDN F Demo CamDise svr10 2 IP PTZ B Demo CamDise svr10 2 ISDN PTZ Demo CamDisc svr4 4 IP POS B Demo CamDisc svr4 4 ISDN POS B Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 IP B Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 ISDN B Demo CamTel svr10 1 IP FH Demo CamTel svri0 1 ISDN T Demo CamTel svri0 2 1P F Demo CamTel svr10 2 ISDN F Demo CamTel svr4 3 IP F Demo CamTel svr4 3 ISDN F Demo CamTel svr4 4 IP FR Nema PamTel owed td ISN Modify Add Delete Dial Cancel Help You open the Transmitter index by clicking Dial as long as connection establishment has been configured for serial or TCP IP dial up connections You can use the transmitter list in this dialogue box to maintain or select the saved transmitters If the transmitter is connected directly to the receiver PC via the special null modem cable or a dedicated line then when you click Dial the transmitter is immediately activated see Port A on page 80 6000 transmitters The Transmitter index can manage up to 6000 transmitters The transmitters are sorted alphabetically in the transmitter list The current and maximum number of transmitters is displayed alongside the heading Transmitter list in the form 27 6000 Note If the maximum number of transmitters for
128. transmission of live images as well as archive access to HeiTel VideoGateways You can use the following HeiTel devices with CamControl LITE HeiTel Video Gateways Note IntrusionTrace is only available with CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx as well as ipVG and only in combination with JPEG MJPEG cameras not H 264 When using analogue cameras we highly recommend using the analogue realtime cards in the equipment Digital video transmission systems CamTel VG Digital image transmitter with up to ten video inputs Multi Unicast server for CamTel SVR network and dial up connections and access via the communication connections CamTel V 24 Digital image transmitter with ten video inputs integrated alarm image storage and transparent serial interface for operation with external modem null modem analogue ISDN TCP IP CamTel ISDN As for CamTel V 24 but with integrated ISDN TA instead of a serial interface for external modem operation CamTel PSTN As for CamTel V 24 but with integrated analogue modem instead of a serial interface for external modem operation CamLine V 24 Digital image transmitter with two video inputs for operation with external modem null modem analogue ISDN TCP IP CamLine ISDN As for CamLine V 24 but with integrated ISDN TA instead of a serial interface for external modem operation 6 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 3 Installing the software CamControl LITE is an ope
129. via the transparent serial interface For this application note also the configuration of the serial interface see Soyal Card Reader in conjunction with a HeiTel video system on page 199 The IBIS and Soyal parameters are only available for data track 1 Track size Via Track size you can perform a percentage distribution of memory available for the transaction data and thus carry out an individual assignment for the specific tracks Regardless of the device type of the digital frame recording system by HeiTel 150 MB of hard disk capacity is reserved for the transaction data e VG video systems All video gateways of the VG Series reserve one percent of their hard disk capacity for transaction data e SVR video systems Irrespective of the device type of the digital frame recording system from HeiTel 150 MB of hard disk capacity are reserved for transaction data The sum of individual tracks must not exceed 100 as the track distribution would otherwise be reset to the device specific standard value per track 26936_02 169 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Cam4mobile VG 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4c CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamServer 2 CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamServer 2c CamServer VG 4c Cam4mobile 4 Cam4mobile 10 CamServer 2 CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc HNVR 10 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10 CamDisc SVR 10s Number of 4 4 10 2 tracks Standard
130. zone Select the time zone of the location of your digital image transmission system The associated time appears immediately in the Calculated Date and Time for the device box If necessary you can configureCamControl LITE in such a way that every time a connection to the transmitter is successfully established its internal clock is synchronised with the time of your receiver PC see Time synchronisation on page 75 see Time synchronisation TIMESYNC on page 257 Extra holidays CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer only and the same devices of the VG series Add as type 1 gt The calendar in these devices allows you to select a total of 25 days to be saved as special holidays in the timer See Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 of the digital image transmission system Each selected day can be allocated to one of two holiday types Timer operation distinguishes between these two types by allowing separate settings for both see Holidays on page 179 This allows you to Add as type 2 gt configure two separate and independent sets of holiday rules To add a holiday select the corresponding date in the calendar and then confirm the type by clicking Add as type 1 or Add as type 2 as appropriate Toggle Type Clicking Toggle Type allows you to reassign the selected holiday as the other holiday type Delete Entry To remove a holiday first select it and then click Delete Entry This
131. 0 Connect cmd recy port 4445 Clicking the Show configuration button opens an additional window in which the current configuration of the HTconnect Server is displayed If necessary you can adjust the configuration of the IP ports used manually in the CamTel INI see HTconnect configuration on page 251 106 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 6 9 7 Multiple transmitter entries Within the transmitter index it is possible for transmitters to appear more than once in the list of transmitters Among the uses for this procedure is to make available for one transmitter alternative entries for different connection types Since in the case of transmitter initiated dialling procedures the user check can also be realised via the transmitter list you must ensure that where the list of transmitters contains multiple transmitter entries valid user names and passwords have been entered for each of these entries Multiple transmitter entries in the transmitter list are identified by the device serial number The serial number is generally automatically added to the transmitter entries following a dial up via the relevant connection type Transmitter index xj B POFTA m Transmitter list 576000 amp USB direct connection B CamDise HNYR 10 1 IP CamDisc HNVR 10 1 ISDN CamDisc SVR10 1 IP CamDisc SVR10 1 ISDN Show transmitters with equal serial number Add new group Add new transmitt
132. 08 22 08 02 50 HT connect server started on port 3333 M Status Active connections 2 Total connections 2 Search WC111501 Found NV900444 192 168 31 180 connected 2011 08 22 08 02 59 WC111501 192 168 31 176 connected 2011 08 22 08 02 51 Update connected devices Show configuration From the program version mentioned above the HTconnect Server program window contains a search function using the serial number of the video system and two additional buttons The Update connected devices button updates the list of video systems connected via HTconnect and Show configuration displays the current configuration of the HTconnect Server in an additional window Searching for a video system Before conducting a search you should always update the list of video systems to the latest status using the Update connected devices button You search for a video system within the program window by entering the required serial number into the Search input field After you have entered a full serial number format YZxxxxxx the HTconnect Server indicates that it has found a video system with the message Found In the list of video systems connected by HTconnect the relevant entry is shown and highlighted in grey Configuration of the HTconnect Server x HT connect server port 3333 Disconnect timeout 75 Command interval 60 Command mode 0 Status server running 1 Status server port 4444 Status server cmd timeout
133. 1 files on page 262 26936_02 57 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 8 2 Using the R16 Adapter You have the option of connecting a R16 Adapter to devices in the CamDisc HNVR CamServer CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR series The remote adapter has 16 relays for remotely controlling additional switching functions Button panel Barrier2 up Site lights A button panel with up to 16 buttons can also be configured for special functions this panel is displayed when you select the associated camera You can trigger a variety of remote control commands with these buttons which you can label as you wish A number of additional functions are also available e Youcan configure different commands for clicking and releasing the buttons e Youcan configure commands that are sent when a button is clicked and repeated at variable intervals until this button is released e Instead of the buttons having a toggle function you can also define them as switches Configuring the button panel You can configure and customise the button panel using so called R01 files see Function and structure of R01 files on page 262 4 8 3 Global switching procedures In addition to PTZ control and the R16 adapter which are generally camera specific you can also define global switching procedures Position of control elements Relay 2 Light on If you define global switching procedures i e switching procedures that are to be a
134. 131 The connection will not be closed if the existing transmission media do not match the registered numbers or addresses or if dialling is only possible by null modem connection If you do not want this automatic disconnection for special receiver PCs e g PCs in a security centre automatic termination can be deactivated for these computers in the CamTel INI configuration file Further information on changing the AUTODISCONNECT entry can be found in the relevant section see Auto disconnect on alarm on page 250 You can also prevent specific users from configuring automatic termination in the device s user management see User on page 115 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Release access for PTZ Relay Audio after If several users are connected to a HeiTel device at the same time the functions for controlling PTZ audio and relay are passed on aftera variable period of time If unused functions are released after 60 seconds for example then these user rights are passed on 60 seconds after the previous user stopped using them The time each user dialled in determines the order of priority in the first instance In such a way the user who dialled into the digital transmission system first is authorised to use PTZ audio and relay functions for the period of time specified in the settings If the user uses one of these functions then he can continue to use that function for the define
135. 256 approx 23 The average picture size very much depends on image content and video or camera signal quality Images from high resolution cameras with high contrast and detail require more storage capacity than low contrast images with many uniform areas IP cameras When IP cameras record images the recording quality cannot be adjusted using the function described above Generally speaking image size and format can be adjusted with IP cameras via an integrated configuration menu In exceptional cases these parameters can be adjusted via a Generic GET command see Generic GET commands on page 228 Conditional refresh Conditional refresh mode only requires the differences between successive images to display the full image In many cases only parts of ascene changes Certain areas of the image such as a background wall do not change at all or only very little e g due to changes in lighting Recording in this way often requires less than half the hard disk storage capacity of working with full images which in turn increases recording speed by up to twice as much in some cases Select On to increase recording capacity and speed Note Conditional refresh mode applies to all cameras and therefore to all hard disk tracks IP cameras When IP cameras record images the following conditions apply e CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Images are recorded depending on the programming for the conditional refresh mode Image size
136. 26936_02 221 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Note The Hang up and redial on alarm see Hang up and redial on alarm on page 210 device function does not take into account a colour marking on the camera following an alarm however the correct camera is displayed in the individual image display 7 23 IP Camera The IP Camera dialogue box allows you to use an IP camera see Supported IP cameras on page 230 in place of an analogue camera Minimum requirements for HeiTel devices Firmware1 74 222 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Limited scope of function when using IP cameras 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide Whilst your HeiTel device will always offer the full scope of functions when connected to analogue cameras limitations can arise when using IP cameras General camera functions are retained but may be ignored by the IP camera in question The relevant functions and buttons are disabled and greyed out The restricted functions for IP cameras apply to the following functions Live transmission quality and conditional refresh mode Brightness contrast and colour Motion detection and motion fields Privacy zones Camera position authentication Video settings in the Site Archive e Where applicable conditional refresh mode without function for CamServer VG CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer CamDisc SVR and Cam4mobile devices in connection with IP cameras for the relevant camera tracks
137. 4 Starting connection in different views In manual mode you can also start CamControl LITE in a view other than full screen mode You can choose between zoom quadscreen or 10 screen viewing mode The initial view is configured with Receiver options Extras see View at start of connection on page 75 or via CamTel INI see Specifying the initial view on page 256 26936_02 19 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 4 5 Event list CamControl LITE logs important events in an event list To view the list click the nll button in the central control panel i 2014 07 22 07 43 52 Program started iz e e 2014 07 21 17 09 19 Program over 2014 07 21 17 09 12 204 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 17 08 57 Call at CamDisc YG HNVR Demo 2014 07 21 17 08 51 6159 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 16 53 06 Call at CamDisc YG HNYR Demo 2014 07 21 16 49 29 132 Pictures Connection closed Dial 2014 07 21 16 49 20 Call at CamDisc YG HNVR Demo 2014 07 21 16 41 18 446 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 16 40 59 Call at CamDisc YG HNYR Demo 2 2014 07 21 16 29 20 70 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 16 29 13 Call at CamDisc YG HNVR Demo 2014 07 21 16 05 47 181 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 16 05 29 Call at CamDisc YG HNYR Demo Setup 2014 07 21 14 45 21 243 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 14 45 10 Call at CamDisc HNVR Demo 2014 07 21 12 33 25 1167 Pictures Connection close
138. 4mobile VG 10s Cam4mobile VG 4c www heitel com e CamDisc VG HNVR www heitel com e CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 Cam4mobile 10 www heitel com e CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c www heitel com e CamDisc HNVR 10 www heitel com In addition the firmware versions current at the time of your version of CamControl LITE was released are available in the subdirectory DEVICEUPDATES To perform a firmware update please use the Firmware update dialogue see Firmware update on page 214 Serial number Every transmitter is identified by a unique serial number provided by the manufacturing plant The serial number is located on the bottom of your device MAC address The MAC address Media Access Control is the specific hardware address of the integrated network interface Ethernet This address provides a unique device identification of the device within a network The MAC address may be required by the network administrator in some circumstances in order to configure network components such as switches routers or firewalls Devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR and CamDisc VG HNVR series have two network interfaces The relevant MAC addresses are displayed in the TCP IP Connections network see Special network configuration with CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 125 configuration dialogue 114 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE
139. 6 N 010 04 3263 E amp 0 0 mph ere Explanation of buttons A detailed explanation of the buttons can be found in the section on the GPS Live dialogue see GPS Live window on page 30 and on the extended GPS Live dialogue see Extended GPS Live window on page 29 Differences in the evaluation of the Site Archive When you access the Site Archive you can if necessary choose between two different procedures for archive image evaluation e Evaluation with optimal functionality The display of the dialogue box is not compulsory when evaluating archive images with valid GPS data e Use the GPS Viewer button or the View GPS Viewer function to show or hide the GPS dialogue box e Evaluation with optimal speed The display of the dialogue box is compulsory when evaluating archive images with valid GPS data Exiting the Site Archive To exit the Site Archive click Live for the active transmitter or close the Transmitter archive dialogue box in question If the associated dialogue boxes for accessing transaction data are also open then these are closed as well 26936 _02 45 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 6 2 Accessing the transmitter logfile Transmitters with an integrated removable hard disk such as the CamDisc SVR devices log all important events in the transmitter logfile Any errors that occur e g No video signal on input 01 as well as the reaching of critical operatin
140. 7m Increase minimum time e g to 4s Use a directional area directed perpendicular to the roadway Increase minimum distance e g 2m Remove the spider and its web Do not use ring lighting on the camera attracts insects Use a petroleum jelly or grease barrier to prevent spider from reaching the lens Use mask areas but leave minimum target height between bottom of mask and top of detection area so that targets are not truncated For more details refer to the IntrusionTrace Design Guide document no 21814 312 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 10 Software Licence Contract Please read all of this software licence contract carefully It stipulates the legal regulations by which you are allowed to use the software package that you have purchased The term software package comprises software products including updates epigrams changed versions additions or copies as well as printed material and online or electronic accompanying materials This licence contract is not a contract of purchase The copy of the software product contained in this package as defined below and all other copies that you are entitled to make within the scope of this contract remain the property of HeiTel referred to in the following as the licensor By installing this software product you agree to the regulations set forth in this contract If you do not agree to this contract then you are not entitled to install or
141. 8 E Subnet Mask 2 es z Gateway 192 fise Port I Obtain DNS server addi DNS Server 1 1 2 DNS Server 2 p f2 5 g M Masimum transmission speed gt 400KB s 313 MBW s z Motas 4 3 MBW I Web Server Automatic disconnect after 30 min z Port 80 z IV Web API LAN auto detection support 100 MBit and 1 GBit You select the interface to be programmed via the 100 MBit the Ethernet device network interface and 1 GBit the IP Camera device network interface buttons The relevant MAC address for the network interface in question is also displayed For the interface selected you can select the Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP option or set the parameters manually for IP address and Subnet Mask For a detailed explanation of these parameters please refer to the previous section see Network TCP IP on page 121 Global network The other network parameters such as Gateway Port DNS Server 1 parameters DNS Server 2 Maximum transmission speed Web Server Automatic disconnect after Web API and LAN autodetection support are configured globally for both network interfaces The Obtain a DNS server address automatically option can only be enabled if for at least one network interface the option Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP was enabled see 100 MBit and 1 GBit on page 125 For a detailed explanation of these parameters please refer
142. 936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide x POS ATMABIS Keywords Adapter IP Port of all connected adapters Date amp Time Port 5000 Connections Camera settings Camera groupe Name amp Version IP address ies Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms POS Adapter V2 31 NA719005 192 168 31 176 POS 1 E Site archive Video settings POS Adapter V2 31 NB724003 192 168 31 180 ATM 4 Password is HDD POS ATM IBIS Keywords Track settings Video 1 in Video 2 in Video 3 in BE OK ss Cancel Site archive state Help Port With Port you can set the IP port which your CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer or CamDisc SVR device expects as recorder for establishing the connection Up to ten POS ATM Adapter can be connected with the recorder For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl LITE press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page 245 Foo Note Requirements for communication between the CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer or CamDisc SVR device and the respective POS ATM Adapters is that the devices are in the same IP address range e g 192 168 31 x and that the IP port of the POS ATM Adapter corresponds with this value for the destination This IP address including the port address is programmed on the POS ATM Adapter as Target Recorder Aft
143. A CH Tel 49 0 431 23284 1 HeiTel Digital Video GmbH info heitel com Hamburger Chaussee 339 345 www heitel com 24113 Kiel Germany lt F1 gt for help FIRMA TXT The text shown in the central control panel is saved in the file FIRMA TXT in the receiver software s program directory C CAMCONTROL LITE YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_PROGRAM NAME You can edit this file with a simple text editor Simply replace the text after the equals signs with your own text ADRESSE FAl Tragen Sie in der Textdatei FA2 FIRMA TXT in Ihrem FA3 CamControl LITE Verzeichnis FA4 Ihre Support Adresse ein FA5 Enter Your support address FA6 in the textfile FIRMA TXT in FA7 Your CamControl LITE directory If you don t want any text to appear at all then either delete the file or delete the text after the equals signs 8 5 Transmitter specific configuration files All the settings necessary to operate the digital image transmission systems are saved in the individual devices themselves This means that all the transmitters work completely independently of the receiver PC used to configure them Furthermore a transmitter device is fully operational and accessible even if it is connected to from another PC workstation Transmitter dependent control files R01 files have also been introduced for even greater flexibility These files allow you to extend the functional scope of your image transmission system to almost
144. AXIS 35 99 Test 4 lt F1 gt for help 14 62 KB 1 271280720 So F You can adjust the quality of transmitted images in line with your requirements using the slider Select a lower image quality for a higher refresh rate If you need high detail definition then select a correspondingly higher image quality Image quality is configured separately for each camera Once a connection has been established the image qualities configured in the transmitter are used see Video settings on page 160 Image quality Adjusting the image display Depending on the display size selected for the CamControl LITE program window and the image quality selected the slider is supplemented on the left hand side by an up down control This up down control for adjusting the image size is only provided for the normal view in connection with images displayed in an enlarged size You can use this control to vary the display size of the live images The images can be reduced in size down to the original size such as 128 x 80 pixels at lowest image quality These settings are stored separately for the respective image quality and are retained even after ending the program 22 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide PTZ Camera 4 J Main Entrance Xtralis Building Xtralis Parking PTZ IP cam backyard res a Adjusting the image display for IP cameras Since the images from IP cameras can be of differen
145. B connection is always 192 168 138 95 and cannot be changed Simultaneous use of two devices via USB will inevitably result in IP address conflicts Additional driver installation If you are trying to connect to your HeiTel device using the direct USB connection but using a different USB port on your PC Laptop Windows may require that the driver be loaded again particularly on XP 8 9 1 2 Requirements 1 PC Laptop with USB 2 0 hi speed interface USB 2 0 type A to B printer style cable for connecting to the transmitter with a maximum length of two meters 3 CamControl LITE or CamControl PRO software 4 One of the following HeiTel VideoGateway device series with the appropriate firmware and CamControl software Please note the requirements of the dependent installation processes 278 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide e SVR series page 279 CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 Cam4mobile 10 e SVR s series page 282 CamDisc HNVR 10 CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2c CamServer 2 e VG series page 284 CamServer VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamTel VG 4 CamTel VG 10 Cam4mobile VG 2c 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s CamDisc VG HNVR 8 9 1 3 Installation of the USB driver for SVR series Currently the USB function can only be used with the following devices if their
146. Before you can use the integrated PTZ control you must install the relevant data protocols for your camera system so that incoming remote control commands from CamControl LITE can be converted into control commands that are compatible with the camera system in question for example a dome The installation procedure is described in Recorder settings see PTZ control on page 194 PTZ control operation CamControl LITE automatically provides you with easy to use control elements for various remote options 4 8 1 1 PTZ control in full format and zoom view CamControl LITE now also offers direct PTZ control by means of the Windows mouse pointer in the full format and zoom views in addition to the controls in the PTZ window see Classic PTZ control on page 55 Heilel f Hang up View gi F Setup 4 D Site Archive Log file Qe BP R 4 ei Camera 1 i Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 n Relay 1 Close lt Fi gt fohep Onire 700KB E 1 17074 Mouse pointer appearance When you move the mouse pointer over the live image in full format Fullscreen or zoom view the appearance of the mouse pointer changes depending on where it is located e Direction arrows When the mouse pointer is displayed as one of the eight possible direction arrows the connected PTZ camera will be tilted or panned in the indicated direction when the left mouse button is pressed e Z and
147. CamControl LITE Software Guide July 2015 Documen t 26936_02 Software Version 4 41 HEITEL by xtralis HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Intellectual Property and Copyright This document includes registered and unregistered trademarks All trademarks displayed are the trademarks of their respective owners Your use of this document does not constitute or create a licence or any other right to use the name and or trademark and or label This document is subject to copyright owned by Xtralis You agree not to copy communicate to the public adapt distribute transfer sell modify or publish any contents of this document without the express prior written consent of Xtralis Disclaimer The contents of this document is provided on an as is basis No representation or warranty either express or implied is made as to the completeness accuracy or reliability of the contents of this document The manufacturer reserves the right to change designs or specifications without obligation and without further notice Except as otherwise provided all warranties express or implied including without limitation any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are expressly excluded General Warning This product must only be installed configured and used strictly in accordance with the General Terms and Conditions User Manual and product documents available from Xtralis All proper heal
148. Camera 7 Group 4 Group 4 Audio 8 Camera 8 Relays 9 Camera 9 acs O PTZ control 10 Camera 10 Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Download Firmware update Group 1 Group 3 Group 4 7 f Group 5 m E E EN 4 ok Cancel Help 26936_02 139 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Creating camera groups Pol The Pool contains all the cameras not assigned to a Group Group names Quadscreen Ten Fullscreen Mainscreen Zoom window Entrance areas Exterior shell You can give the individual groups a name in these two four fields Meaningful group names make it easier to select the desired group in the central control panel later The camera groups Entrance areas and Exterior shell have been defined in this example Note To be able to select a group as a view in CamControl LITE it must consist of at least two cameras Creating a group To assign the cameras to individual groups just drag and drop them like you would in Windows Select a camera from the Pool or from another Group and then holding the left mouse button drag it to the desired Group You can move a camera from a Group back into the Pool in the same way Note Each camera can be allocated to one group only Multiple allocations are not possible 7 7 Motion As of the device firmware V1 96 HeiTel video systems have an enhanced video motion detection function Only the CamControl LITE software V4 01 or later should be used to conf
149. Check whether one of the two options automatic call acceptance or automatic operation is ticked in the Receiver Settings Call Acceptance box 26936_02 305 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Call is accepted from a Transmitter can not dial At the transmitter end during an telephone alarm call from existing connection transmitter is not received lt Enter the AT command X3 in the modem init string Enter dial prefix 1 ATD Check the telephone number entered is a number required for an outside line Make sure that your alarm detector contact is not continually connected CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR e Arm Your device if necessary Test your alarm detector the camera button in CamControl LITE is highlighted in red when a camera alarm detector input has been triggered End of Step 3 analogue telephone network ISDN Network To check whether your receiver is not able to accept alarm calls via ISDN then you must first be able to call your receiver from an ISDN data terminal data service If you call your receiver using a modem then the receiver will only accept the call when a hybrid adapter is attached to it that is able to receive call from both analogue as well as ISDN sources In this case you can also consult the instructions for analogue telephone networks see Analogue Telephone Networks on page 305
150. Control PLAYER Clicking the Print current data record button prints the data of the current data record with the associated image The following information is also printed out file name serial number of the transmitter camera name 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Synchronisation When accessing camera tracks with transaction data the of image and Synchronization function provides the following two options sales receipt e Update picture from data When selecting transaction data the first time relevant image in a sequence is shown e Update data from picture When playing back image data the associated sales receipt is shown Evaluating Soyal data In contrast to the POS and ATM transaction data Soyal data is not transmitted to your HeiTel video system via an intermediate POS ATM Adapter but instead only via a connected Soyal Card Reader with appropriate configuration of the serial interface The evaluation is conducted in the same way as the evaluation of ATM data described above see Text amp price search ATM data on page 42 The following options are available as possible search filters e Armed status e Change in armed status e CardID e Card reader ID e Card valid invalid Accessing GPS data If valid GPS data exists for the current image data of the Site Archive the following dialogue box may open automatically GPS Site Archive 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 058
151. E Software Guide Send email incase of Activate the Send email in case of picture warning threshold is reached picture warning see Send email in case of picture warning threshold reached on page threshold is reached 136 option if in addition to standard notification see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 a message should be sent via email is Note Requirements e Ensure that the IP addresses for Gateway and DNS Server see Network TCP IP on page 121 have been correctly configured If possible you should maintain a dedicated email account used only for HeiTel device alarm notifications The following information is required for the programming Outgoing mail server SMTP user name or email address of the account and the corresponding password The relevant information can be obtained from your Internet Service Provider ISP or the responsible system administrator Server information Outgoing mail SMTP Under Outgoing mail SMTP enter the corresponding DNS domain name of your SMTP server e g in the form aaaa bbbb cccc The alarm message by email function is not supported if an IP address is specified User information Account name Under Account name enter the email address or user name for the email account intended to serve as the sender The sender address consists of the account name and SMTP domain If however the account name contains an sign the account name will be us
152. E Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis e Using the On option activate the receivers to which a leased line is to be established by the transmitter e The address entries for IP address 1 to IP address 4 cannot be changed in this configuration menu since these addresses are transferred from the menu Recorder settings Connections Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 e The only freely selectable address is IP address 5 Step 3 Modify an existing transmitter entry or create an entry for the corresponding transmitter The dialogue box Transmitter index is accessed via Dial Transmitter index and then either via the Modify button for existing entries or via Add for new entries e Complete the entries and activate the HTconnect option in the Serial number section The serial number can now be edited xl M Transmitter name Reference images CamDisc svi 10 1 mM IP address Phone number dial prefix fi 92 168 31 170 3000 Prefix 1 M CAPI Prefix 2 Serial number CV547015 J HTconnect Username amp password Auto passwords gt Username M Password OK Cancel Help e If you are changing an existing transmitter entry check whether the serial number noted down previously in Step 2 matches the existing entry e Foranew entry enter the serial number previously noted down in Step 2 in the corresponding field e Complete entry by clicking O
153. F and F buttons are for controlling the focus Click OK to close this dialogue box A live image in line with the preview is then shown in mainscreen or fullscreen viewing mode PTZ control via keyboard You can control the direction a the following keys a a t R Use the following key for zoom and focus 56 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Insert F Numerical pad Delete a Numerical pad 4 8 1 4 List box and button panel for PTZ control In both PTZ control options a list box and a button panel are available if these have been defined witha corresponding R01 file for the respective transmitter List Box Tour 1 Dome Menu If your PTZ camera has additional functions such as fixed positions automatic camera tours configuration commands or such like you can select these from a list box CamControl LITE automatically opens an operating panel when you select a relevant camera Button panel Camera 2 Preset 1 Preset 3 Tour 1 Colour Mono A button panel with up to 16 buttons can also be configured for special functions this panel is displayed when you select the associated camera You can trigger a variety of remote control commands with these buttons which you can label as you wish Configuring list box and button panel You can configure and customise the list box and button panel using socalled R01 files see Function and structure of R0
154. HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Recorder settings x PTZ control Device User Date amp Time E Connections LOADER Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Sensormatic 1 00 Privacy zones Sony V1 E Alarms Ultrak V1 13 E Site archive Vicon 1 00 Audio VideoTec 1 02 VIDO 1 02 Vista V1 03 Videotronic 1 02 Cylindercamera V1 02 Serial channel Video out Extras J Update internal PTZ control Upload Download Firmware update No control file R01 installed ZCONFO1 004 ZCONFO2 004 ZCONFO3 004 OK Cancel IV Update control file R01 Site archive state I Deactivate PTZ Help Update internal PTZ Select this option to transmit the selected protocol to the internal PTZ control control system You must update your PTZ control when you commission your external device and PTZ control for the first time if you want to apply a new version of the protocol to the PTZ control system or if you want to remotely control another external device with PTZ control When you activate this function the Update control file RO1 option also becomes available Note PTZ control update can take several minutes with narrow bandwidth connections Do not close the current connection until all the data have been transmitted and the status window has closed 194 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Update control file R01 Deactivate PTZ PTZ
155. HYBRID Card 4 see HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 231 merging date time and image number into the image is obligatory Merging the camera name and or transmitter name into the display can be activated as an option globally for all camera channels Video images from IP CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices allow merge into video cameras image for IP cameras only in conditional refresh mode If you have activated one or more of the merge into image options listed for the transmission and or storage of video images from IP cameras please check for both modes whether you have similarly activated conditional refresh mode as a requirement for display e Connections Live video settings see Conditional refresh mode e Site Archive Video settings see Conditional refresh Note The display size of the merge in options available on IP cameras is dependent on the respective image resolution 212 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 20 Upload download The Upload Download function allows you to save the settings of devices as a mirror image on the receiver PC and to apply previously backed up mirror images to a device You can also transfer a backed up image from one device to another if the devices are of the same type and have the same firmware version Recorder settings J x Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups
156. IBIS the deviceinternal automatic summer winter time changeover is not carried out see Summer time settings on page 118 If consecutive IBIS data records are receive d with valid date and valid time the time is synchronised once a minute For devices with a hard drive CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer or Cam4mobile a logfile entry is written for every time synchronisation IBIS data records Complete IBIS data records contain Date Time Wagon number Line Course and Station GPS function for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG The GPS Global Positioning System function was primarily designed for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG devices A GPS receiver is connected to a Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG via the serial interface Note The GPS receiver must supply data with the GPRMC data record according to the NMEA 0183 standard 198 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Configuration of GPS The GPS function is used to store way points of HeiTel devices The following programming is generally a requirement for this e Baud rate 4800 e Mode 8 N 1 e Function GPS Note Depending on the GPS receiver baud rate and mode can vary and must be programmed in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications Soyal Card Reader in conjunction with a HeiTel video system The Soyal Card Reader is connected to the HeiTel video system via the serial interface Soyal access control generally contains the following functions
157. If this option is selected the last caller is written to the logfile shortly before the connection is closed Note To determine the last caller for the external modem ISDN TA enter the relevant AT command for modem initialisation in Recorder settings see External modem on page 128 The command depends on the modem ISDN TA employed refer to the appropriate manual If this option is selected the result of input status changes i e input closed or open is written to the logfile The Only when armed option enhances this function If it is selected then changes to inputs are only logged if your CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamTel VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer is armed If this option is selected the operating temperature at dial up is written to the transmitter logfile Note For temperatures of 70 C and over the message Temperature very high is written to the logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 This message is entered even when Temperature is not selected HeiTel video systems that are equipped with the device firmware V 1 96 or later must always write the temperature to the transmitter logfile on login 207 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Video signal loss If this option is selected a corresponding message is written to the detection transmitter logfile if a video signal to be recorded is lost for at least a def
158. K 6 9 6 2 General information about HTconnect Please take note of the following information regarding HTconnect e All connections to transmitters which have been configured in the manner described above have been initiated by the respective transmitter as a standing connection However for the user these alarm connections present themselves as receiver calls Under some circumstances the details may deviate from a regular receiver call e During this quasi receiver dialling in exceptional instances a regular alarm imminent at the same moment can be activated instead of the desired transmitter e The theoretical limit for HTconnect connections is specified by the receiver software CamControl LITE which is limited to 6000 transmitter entries Please note that the use of large numbers of HTconnect connections can result in performance drops when operating the receiver software CamControl LITE e Foreach connected transmitter a data volume of approximately 6 bytes min is generated e Call Accept must not be switched off in the receiver software settings e The HTconnect Server is managed as an independent program by the receiver software and should remain minimised in the taskbar A flashing symbol indicates that one or more connections are established to correspondingly configured transmitters e Since correspondingly configured transmitters always establish a connection to the receiver software CamControl LITE from their end the availa
159. N adapter It can transfer data via a B channel at 64 000 Bit s It is operated at the serial interface like a modem You don t need special drivers or application programs for the TA PPX It can therefore be used with standard PC without any problems Active ISDN adapter PPX 1 008 PP2 5 373 PPP 5 275A firmware to be used Serial interface with up to 115 200 Bit s DSS1 protocol Euro ISDN 64 000 Bit s X 75 V 120 Included in delivery ISDN adapter ISDN connection cable modem cable data medium with manual plug in power pack included in delivery for PPX Approvals German BZT approval European approval Receiver Initialisation for receiver PC ATE1V1B10S0 0 ATD establish connection Dial D 26936_02 275 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis MSN Setting the MSN Multiple Subscriber Number e f several ISDN TAs or devices with the ISDN service attribute data service are connected to your ISDN SO bus then every device must be assigned an MSN i e a telephone number at which it can be reached This number must be at the end of the initialisation string Connecting the adapter to the transmitter Transmitter Initialisation with MSN for current devices e ATEOV1B10S0 0 2123456 M 123456 is the MSN Status of the LEDs on the TA PPX TA PP2 TA PPP seus C LEDs off No current or device defective L1 flashing L2 off ISDN SO bus not ok L2 flashing Device defective L1 on DTR on Cor
160. On the IBIS data dialogue box 1 the search options Date amp time search and Text amp price search are offered Simple Date amp time search Station DAMPERHOF STRASSE 0000 Text amp price search Date amp time search Date 03 12 2008 z Time 11 23 14 Syncronization Update picture from data C Update data from picture Enter the Date of the search or select it using the calendar function You can enter the Time of the search start in hours minutes and seconds using the buttons next to the time input box or using the keyboard Click Search to start the search The first sales receipt recorded after the specified search start is returned If there are no sales receipts after this specified time the last most recent sales receipt recorded is returned You can navigate the search result using the toolbar buttons First receipt Previous receipt Next receipt and Last receipt 26936_02 43 44 Text amp price search IBIS data Saving IBIS data Printing a data record E CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 0000 Text amp price search Date amp time search f Time window f IBIS search Start IV Wagon number Date 0003 I Line I Course IV Select all Items combined by AND v r Syncronization Update picture from data C Update data from picture In the Time window area you can define both the Start and End of the search period by
161. Phone number IP address Callback 192 168 31 66 3001 Vv 01711234567 ss S a 004943471234567 B Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms W Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Number of re dials Pause between re dials Pause between repeating list IV Always call all numbers Cancel Site archive state Help Phone numbers amp IP Here you can enter up to four telephone numbers or IP addresses addresses network operation to be called successively in the event of alarm The transmitter will start dialling the first entry top priority Enter the complete telephone number including prefix Use special characters or letters only if absolutely necessary You may prefix the telephone number with the outside line number s here You must include the associated separators when entering an IP address e g 124 124 124 124 If you are using a DNS service you may enter a symbolic address here For the system to recognise the entry as a symbolic IP address the address must be set in quotation marks e g www your_domain com The IP addresses of your DNS service must be entered in the Network TCP IP tab see Network TCP IP on page 121 For network alarms you can complete the alarm call number by adding a port number Here the port number must be separated from the alarm call number by a colon Phone number IP address figat 68 31 66 3001
162. Software Guide Device name A transmitter can be uniquely identified any time using its serial number However using a transmitter name will make things a lot easier The Device name max 20 characters is shown in the window title bar of the receiver software during active connections To make it easier to access connections later the device name is used in both the event list and the receiver archive The device name can be faded into the current video image see Extras on page 208 7 2 User The User tab allows you to add up to 25 different users Moreover it allows you to create individual user profiles that specify what each user can do in and to the device in question Recorder settings xi User Device Dae ER Registered users Enter new user E Connections Camera settings I Password expires after Camera groups saanen 12 __ weeks Motion detection zones A Privacy zones Waning E Alarms 3 days in advance Site archive Audio Delete User Relays PTZ control Serial channel Mayor Video out G EMA User password Extras Upload Download Password confirmation IP Camera Live cameras Archive cameras Options M Camera 1 Ol Ol M Camera 2 L Camera 2 M PTZ V Camera 3 Camera 3 Remote functions ok Camera 4 Camera 4 Audio V Camera 5 Camera 5 Transparent channel Camera 6 Camera 6 Manually alarm enabling Cancel Camera 7 Camera 7 C Internal relays M C
163. StreetMap to represent the position data on the map Installation You can find a corresponding installation program for this selection in the subdirectory Install_ GPSDataViewer of the CamControl LITE software starting with Version 3 84 1 Find the subdirectory Install_GPSDataViewer and open it 2 Start the program GpsDataViewerSetup exe The installation will take place exclusively in English With Next you can continue the installation with Back you can jump back one dialogue box and with Cancel you can cancel the procedure 5 x Welcome to the GPS Data Viewer Setup Wizard f Setup GPS Data iewer This will install GPS Data Viewer Y 1 2 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup 3 Select the target directory for the installation of GPS Data Viewer To do this it is mandatory that you install this additional software in the program directory of yourCamControl LITE software Please verify the suggested program directory and if necessary correct the path by using the function Browse 8 Setup GPS Data iewer 5 x Select Destination Location N Where should GPS Data Viewer be installed f a Setup will install GPS Data Viewer into the following folder UTION fou MUST select the directory where the receiving software is already installed To continue click Next If you would li
164. Tel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 page 277 e CamDisc HNVR 10 CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 page 283 e VG device series page 284 8 9 1 Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 Technical Product Information No 14 01 Product Version CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR Cam4mobile CamDisc SVR 10s CamDisc SVR 4s CamServer 1 CamServer 2c CamServer 2 CamDisc HNVR CamServer VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2c 4c CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamTel VG 4 CamTel VG 10 Cam4mobile VG 2c 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam4mobile VG 10s CamDisc VG HNVR February 2014 Installation of the USB device driver Short description Installation of the USB device driver for use of the USB direct connection 26936_02 277 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Download Current SVR SVR s VG Series Firmware Version http www heitel com en service downloads dir 02 firmware updates 02 firmware updates Download http www heitel com en service downloads dir 01 demosoftware 01 CamControl LITE camcontrol lite 01 demosoftware Demo Version Download http www heitel com en service downloads dir 01 demosoftware 03 CamControl PRO camcontrol pro 01 demosoftware Demo Version 8 9 1 1 Introduction The use of the USB direct connection for connection to the H
165. Tel video system supplies valid GPS data the position data and the current speed including further additional functions are displayed on the following dialogue box GPS Live 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 0586 N 010 04 3263 E B 0 0 mph s Display of the dialogue box is compulsory when valid GPS data is received Note Ensure that the serial interface of the HeiTel video system is programmed correctly see GPS function for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG on page 198 26936 _02 29 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 5 2 1 GPS Live window In addition to position data and the current speed the GPS Live window offers additional functions relating to the display of the position or the route in Google Earth or OpenStreetMap Note Please note the licence terms and conditions of use for Google Earth or OpenStreetMap Window title bar Alongside GPS the window title bar includes the word Live when displaying live images The following date and time display shows when this data was received or recorded Whilst valid data records are being received GPS data is updated by the HeiTel video system approximately every three seconds and is also recorded with the image data where necessary In the case of a live image connection the video system transfers the GPS data to the CamControl LITE software at the same rate When the Site Archive or the PC Archive are accessed alternate window titles arise e Site Archive
166. The VIEW10 INI file lets you define the position of the top left corner of the window LEFT TOP and the window size WIDTH HEIGHT Example POS LEFT 829 TOP 643 WIDTH 450 HEIGTH 380 Comment The position 0 0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the first monitor Function of the Image Viewer The window is divided into four quadrants to display the alarm images Top left The image triggering the alarm is displayed Top right The first image transmitted following a successful connection is displayed Bottom left The second image transmitted following a successful connection is displayed Bottom right A sequence of up to 15 images is displayed starting with the alarm triggering image and followed by a maximum of 14 transmitted images following a successful connection Configuration of the Image Viewer The Image Viewer is activated and the number of images for the image sequence configured with CamTel INI see Image Viewer configuration on page 252 260 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 8 4 Changing the informational text FIRMA TXT If CamControl LITE is not connected to a digital image transmission system then an instruction text is shown in the central control panel You can change this text and include for example the address of your dealer or the address and telephone number of a contact for support queries Dial PC Archive Setup Event list Xtralis Headquarters D
167. This entry lets you define a vertical displacement of the application e The position 0 0 corresponds to the upper left corner of the first monitor 8 2 4 9 Audio mode AUDIO Classic audio mode MODE 0 Set audio mode to classic display e Range 0 off 1 on default e In classic audio mode the Push to talk button is no longer available The Listening and Speaking buttons are available in this mode see Audio transmission on page 60 8 2 4 10 Specified path for logfiles Specified path If CamControl LITE version 4 02 or newer is used the receiver logfile the transferred device logfiles and the CTWINPOS INI are saved in the local program directory of the software or the relevant subdirectories If necessary a different target path can be selected PATH Path selection LOCAL 1 selection of local or global specified path 1 default setting e Range 0 off 1 on default e If you set the parameter LOCAL 0 the target directory specified under REMOTEPATH is used for saving the listed files 258 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Path details REMOTEPATH target path for saving the listed files e Range valid Windows path or UNC path Universal Naming Convention to the changed target directory Example e C DATA LOG Windows path details e fileserver data log UNC path Make sure that the specified target directory for saving exists and can be accessed over the network
168. V Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched Timeout immediately z Normally opened z IT Stop writing to HDD when V out was switched for 10 s restart after 3 minutes or power off Use of the Aux in2 To use the potentialfree control input Aux in2 additional programming is control input necessary e Timeout Timeout lets you configure a period of time for which the video system waits while activated by Aux in2 before the HDD is put into standby mode If activation is deactivated using the control input Aux in2 within the defined waiting period the HDD is not put into standby mode If the control input Aux in2 is deactivated after the HDD was switched to standby mode the HDD is immediately reactivated Independently of Aux in2 the HDD remains for at least 10 seconds in standby mode Contacts Using the parameters Normally closed or Normally opened you define in what switching state the standby mode for the HDD is to be activated Activate the standby mode for the HDD depending on the programmed contact assignment opening or closing the connection between Aux in2 and ground using a button or switch Depending on the selected timeout interval either a button or a switch will be available to change the status Write logfile entry Before the HDD is put into standby mode the device writes the logfile entry HDD deactivated including date and time HDD safe power down The HDD is put into standby mode and does not record an
169. V1S0 0 Prefix 1 ATD Prefix 2 m Maximum connection duration Cancel l On 1 s gt Connection without time limit Help 7 gt Network operation TCP IP TCP IP Activate TCP IP if you want connections to be established to one or more transmitters over the network see Connecting via network TCP IP connection quick start on page 13 Port In addition you directly set the communications port through which the HeiTel devices communicate with the CamControl LITE software The standard value for HeiTel devices and software is 3000 Note This value should now only be programmed through this program window The configuration file CamTel INI should no longer be used to edit the port number see Port number on page 248 Requirements e The receiver PC must be equipped with a network card and connected to a network The TCP IP protocol must be correctly installed The transmitter can be reached at a valid IP address within this network or through a gateway e Alternatively Internet access may be sufficient Notes e You can enter the TCP IP addresses of your transmitters like a telephone number in the IP address Phone number Dial prefix box under Transmitter Index Transmitter Data The separating points must be entered between the segments of the address e g 123 123 123 123 You can also enter symbolic IP addresses in this box see Configuring the transmitter index on page 88 e If you onl
170. VG 4 and CamTel VG 10 serial number CFxxxxxx und C Xxxxxxx 284 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide e Cam4mobile VG 2c 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 and Cam4mobile VG 10s serial number MCxxxxxx MPxxxxxx and MXxxxxxx Driver installation in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 Step 1 Turn on the VG device also applies to SVR SVR s HNVR devices and plug the USB cable in the front connector of the device Plug the other side of the USB cable into the USB port of the computer Step 2 Got to the Device Manager you can find it in the Control Panel System Device Manager and select in section Other devices the node RNDIS Ethernet Gadget or Ethernet USB RNDIS depends on the connected HeiTel device gt File Action View Help e m B mlg E amp Audio inputs and outputs ji Computer a Disk drives Display adapters 4 DVD CD ROM drives 5g Human Interface Devices Ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 host controllers Keyboards A Mice and other pointing devices amp Monitors KP Network adapters gt Other devices Bp PCI Serial Port fy RNDIS Ethernet Gadget m Print queues BB Processors Software devices Sound video and game controllers lt Storage controllers jM System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Step 3 Click with the right mouse button on the selected device and select Update Driver Software from the popup menu
171. Z The camera zoom functions are controlled by pressing the left mouse button when these pointers are shown 26936_02 53 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 20 40 60 80 v Default A single click right on the control symbols Z or Z allows you to adjust the zoom speed for PTZ IP by a pop up menu in 4 steps At the beginning of a connection the speed is always set to default Note The behavior of dynamic controlled PTZ IP cameras depends on the functionality of the camera as well as the depth of the implementation of the driver e F and F The camera focus functions are controlled by pressing the left mouse button when these pointers are shown e Default mouse pointer The default mouse pointer is shown when the pointer is located in the middle of the image When you press the left mouse button the view changes from full format to zoom or vice versa e Right clicking When you right click within the live or zoom view this opens the PTZ window which contains corresponding PTZ controls and a miniature view of the live image see Classic PTZ control on page 55 PTZ control in the zoom window In addition this PTZ control also functions in Zoom window see Zoom window on page 27 mode A single right mouse click calls up the context menu instead of the classic PTZ control Alternative zoom control using the mouse wheel Zoom in Zoom out From version 4 41 CamControl LITE supports zoom
172. a 5 720 288 bd Audio i Track settings 6 Camera 6 720 288 F E Video 1 in E Video 2 in 7 Camera 7 720 288 Bd Video 3 in J Video 4 in 8 Camera 8 720 288 hal Video 5 in gt ce aE ma a Camera 9 720 288 x OK 10 Camera 10 720 288 y i ip z Cancel M Conditional refresh V On Site archive state Help Archiving Recording quality 720 288 720 200 512 256 Select the desired image quality for archive video images from the Recording quality drop down list for each camera Remember that high recording quality produces far more detailed images for later evaluation However more detailed images require more storage capacity and a correspondingly longer transmission times for remote access The following table provides an overview of typical storage capacity requirements for the different 160 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide recording qualities of the CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series It will help you find a suitable compromise between image quality storage capacity and transmission time The information refers to operation with fullscreen images Conditional refresh mode not activated Conditional refresh mode allows you to reduce storage capacity requirements considerably Quality and resolution pixel Capacity requirement KB 720 x 288 approx 46 720 x 288 approx 34 512 x
173. a certain maximum size e CamDisc HNVR 1 3MB e CamDisc SVRs CamServer CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamTel SVR 512 KB Note If necessary configure your IP camera so as to ensure that the limit values given above are not exceeded Generic GET commands These commands can be used to create commands to call up JPEG images for IP cameras that have a similar command structure to the IP cameras previously integrated These commands allow you to integrate additional IP cameras without firmware modifications For the manufacturer GENERIC 1 the Generic GET command 1 is used whilst for GENERIC 2 the Generic GET command 2 is used Maximum string length For the Generic GET instructions a maximum of 150 characters are available 228 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Examples Add to Generic 1 Add to Generic 2 Close Display of the Examples button is optional and depends on the GenericExamples PCam txt file This button is only displayed if for this file valid examples exist for Generic GET instruction in the program directory of your CamControl LITE software Click the Examples button to open a dialogue box in which to select from examples of Generic GET commands e Select the desired camera model e Use Add to Generic 1 and or Add to Generic 2 to copy the relevant example string to the field in question e Exit this dialogue by pressing Close Note The inserted string
174. a connection has been established the Execute Callback dialogue box is displayed for about four seconds Click Skip Callback if you don t want to call back The current connection will remain active in this case If you click Execute callback or wait four seconds the active connection will be closed and the transmitter will dial the first number or address activated The status bar in the control field will indicate successful callback by the reason for connection Online Callback Note For your transmitter to be able to call you back at least one user must have been created see User on page 115 Number of re dials Number of re dials defines the number of redial attempts in the event of failure to establish a connection Pause between redials Pause between re dials s is the interval in seconds between re dial attempts Pause between Pause between repeating list s is the interval in seconds between a repeating list failed attempt to dial one of the four telephone numbers IP addresses and the next attempt Always call all If Always call all numbers is selected the transmitter tries to establish numbers successively a connection to every telephone number IP address entered If this option is not selected an attempt is made to reach one of the specified receivers starting with the first telephone number IP address If the option is active for a callback the transmitter attempts to establish a connection with every num
175. a valid archive file You can use a hard drive prepared in this way in other HeiTel video systems with removable hard drives Provided that the device has firmware version 1 76 or newer and a configuration profile has been saved see Saving as configuration profile on page 112 this profile will be used for configuring this hard drive 26936 _02 113 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Note For video systems with device firmware 1 74 or older a stored configuration profile for configuring the recording tracks will not be used Instead the recording tracks will be configured according to the factory settings 7 1 Device Recorder settings Car Device x User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Version Y 04 21 Camera groups Alarms Serial number VN313083 Site archive Audio MAC address 00 30 26 f0 5b e9 Relays Serial channel Device name CamDisc VG HNVR Demo Alarm panel Log file Extras Upload Download Firmware update IP Camera HYBRID Card 4 PIR OK Cancel Site archive state Help Version The version number of your device s firmware is displayed here This number allows you to verify that your device is up to date Current firmware versions can be found on our website organised by device type e CamTel VG 4 CamTel VG 10 CamDisc VG 4 CamDisc VG 10 CamDisc VG 4s CamDisc VG 10s CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4c CamServer VG 4c Cam4mobile VG 4 Cam
176. acks will not be used Instead the recording tracks will be configured according to the factory settings e When you use a hard drive that was previously used in another HeiTel video system and whose configuration profile has not been reset the configuration of the recording tracks from the previous device will continue to be used Resetting configuration profile To enable removable hard drives that have already been used in other HeiTel video systems to accept a transmitter specific configuration profile these hard drives must be reset to near delivery state 112 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Resetting configuration profile The configuration profile can only be reset when the removable hard drive is operated in offline mode When a HeiTel video system is running the configuration profile cannot be reset The following step by step instructions describe how to reset the configuration profile 1 Turn the video system off and if desired switch the hard drives 2 If desired carry out an evaluation of the removed hard drive with the CamControl PLAYER in offline mode inaPC Kit CamDisc USB and save relevant archive information e g video sequences or logfile entries in another medium 3 Leave the removable hard drive in the connected PC Kit CamDisc USB 4 To reset the hard drive configuration select the program option File Write configuration profile from the CamControl PLAYER software Eile
177. addition to camera names the control input of the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter that has been triggered is shown in parenthesis 219 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Entry Exit timeout Linked with motion 220 Inthe Entry Exit timeout column you select a time period This field can only be configured when in the Alarm column for the corresponding signal input the function Entry Exit has been selected The configurable time period for the delay for an alarm for disarming or arming is configured via a pull down menu Possible values are 10 s default setting 20s 30s 40s 50s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 7 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 25 min and 30 min Note Disarming When the monitored area is entered Entry an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful disarming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered signal input as the reason for the alarm Arming When the monitored area is exited Exit an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful arming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered signal input as the reason for the alarm Note that for multiple inputs to monitor the armed disarmed area the configuration for the signal inputs in question must be configured appropriately Linked with Motion Inthe Linked with motion column you choose between the options On or Off default se
178. al line available or other ISDN characteristics such as closed user group is set Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver 1 Get an ISDN MSN Check the ISDN cable Check the connection using an ISDN telephone Check the telephone number 303 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver When operating an ISDN telephone system you are not able to dial out but entered incoming calls are recognised for data Incompatibility between the PABX system and the ISDN adapter CAPI ISDN card is defective not correctly installed or lt 0x9997 gt can not be addressed Message Time Out CAPI ISDN error Message Layer 1 Protocol error lt 0x3301 gt CAPI Receiver is not an ISDN Message incompatible transmitter destination lt 0X34D8 gt End of step 1 ISDN network Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver TCP IP 304 No network connection 1 TCP IP or subnet possible mask computer settings are not correct No IP address entered at the PC Number for outside line has not been No MSN entered PABX system has not been configured Check the telephone number Settings Port A Entera MSN Check the settings of the PABX system Use the ISDN adapter with another program Hyper Terminal Fritz Data and evaluate the error messages Test the ISDN adapter at an
179. ally accessing a removable hard drive The access speed is limited by the bandwidth of the TCP IP connection File Picture Selection Event View Statistic Audio Tools Info The menu bar has an additional symbol in the top right hand corner indicating a network data transfer A rotating two colour ring in the online version of the CamControl PLAYER indicates the data transfer Evaluation with optimal functionality uses a discrete TCP IP port This port can be changed if necessary in the file CamTel INI see TCP IP port for Evaluation with optimal functionality on page 248 34 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Note If you select Evaluation with optimal functionality archive evaluation always takes place using the maximum available bandwidth of the connection The bandwidth limit programmed in the device see Maximum transmission speed on page 123 is ignored when this function is selected If necessary select Evaluation with optimal speed see Evaluation with optimal speed on page 35 since this function takes the bandwidth limit into account 4 6 1 2 Evaluation with optimal speed When you select this option the following classic evaluation dialogue opens Transmitter archive CamDise swr t0 1 xj 25 November 2005 v 14 00 00 00 00 00 ae 23 59 59 020000 gt T Preview qa c ok ss Sl B 1 Camera 1 a EF Transaction data ct
180. ame serial number Camera number Camera name date and time of image recording Printing date 36 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Configuration parameters and image information Image search according to time and date 25 November 2005 x 14 00 00 If you know the time and date of the recording you are looking for then you can access the relevant image ina sequence directly by entering this information Preview 09000 9090 IV Preview d gt slowest slower 0K oe normal Fast faster fastest The sequence is not saved in Playback mode if the Preview option is selected If the Record preview images option in Recorder options Video X in see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 is selected the sequence is shown at the lower resolution of 256 x 128 pixels for a faster overview If the Record preview images option is not selected in Recorder options the sequence is played back at normal resolution but is not saved Playback speed Clicking the arrow between the Playback and Last image buttons opens a list in which you can set the playback speed The ability to adjust the playback speed is particularly useful for fast TCP IP connections In such a way you can adjust the playback speed and also archiving if necessary in line with your needs The system and the bandwidth of the connection to the transmitter are the decisive factors influencing playba
181. amera 8 Camera 8 Disconnect in case of alarm f Camera 3 Camera 9 Log file Site archive state Z Camera 10 Camera 10 Z Archive access optimal speed M Archive access opt functionality Managing users Creating new users In the Enter new user box enter the name or identification of a new user max length 20 characters Click lt Add new user to add the new entry to the list of Registered users If at least one user is registered in the transmitter and this user was not created in the User Management of the receiver software see User on page 74 the user will be prompted for their user name and password when a connection is being established CamControl LITE will not establish a connection if a non registered user or a wrong password is entered CamDisc svri0 1 User name Password Note The user is logged on automatically if the user logged on in CamControl LITE is set up in the User Management of the device User password This entry field allows you to define a password for the user max length 10 characters You must re enter your password in the Password confirmation box for verification If your entries do not match an appropriate message will be displayed when you click OK Note If using HeiTel video systems internationally refrain where necessary from using country specific special characters for user name and password 26936_02 115 CamControl LITE Software Guide H
182. amera by double clicking on the camera name A simple left click on the camera name will present the name in red font and will display if applicable the respective reference picture The reference pictures must first be allocated to the individual cameras in the Transmitter data see Inserting and editing reference images on page 93 In this view it is possible with a left click in the reference picture to switch to a separate presentation of the camera list and reference picture Demo Kiel CamDisc svr IP PTZ Static Camera Kiel Test pattem The separate window of the reference picture can be positioned and scaled freely However these settings are only temporary and can not be stored Dome Camera Kiel D Important information about the camera window e The camera switching is completed from the multi views e The camera switching is completed only when live pictures are displayed and not in the transmitter archive e A camera switching to a camera of another device will lead to a hangup and a redial These are logged individually and each will generate its own receiver archive e When recreating a group the transmitter names in the camera list are displayed instead of the camera names of the transmitter After dialling the respective transmitter the camera list is updated accordingly e To make sure that the grouping will also function smoothly in the event of an alarm all transmitters must be dialled once by the recei
183. amp T V out input opened The control output V out has been opened yes n Status messages for serial control D amp T External Serial command XXXX has been successfully command XXXX OK processed XXXX four digit command D amp T External Serial command XXXX has not been command sucessfully processed XXXX four digit XXXX ERROR command Status messages for Cl Adapter CIO Adapter 26936_02 273 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis D amp T External input xx Input for the Cl Adapter C1O Adapter has yes no cam yy closed been closed xx Input for the Cl Adapter C1O Adapter 01 50 yy Camera number configured in the sender setup at the time the camera is triggered 01 10 D amp T External input xx Input for the Cl Adapter C1O Adapter has cam yy opened been opened xx Input for the Cl Adapter CI1O Adapter 01 50 yy Camera number configured in the sender setup at the time the camera is triggered 01 10 Status message for the HDD safe power down functions D amp T HDD deactivated The logfile entry is written before the hard disk yes yes is deactivated via one of the HDD safe power down functions Positive messages D amp T Video signal ok on This message is written if a valid video signal was detected following a video signal error for video input x 8 8 Configuring data transmission devices The next section explains how to set up devices for transmitti
184. and CamServer and VG devicespage 109 26936_02 3 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 4 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 2 Introduction Thank you for choosing a HeiTel product Years of experience in developing and manufacturing CCTV software and hardware have resulted in this well thought out and reliable product designed for a wide range of applications Competent digital video partner HeiTel has been a pioneer in digital image archiving technology and remote digital video surveillance since 1990 and has now become an internationally recognised manufacturer in the field Rapid developments in all areas of hardware and software have made possible the development of increasingly complex and functional systems Digital image archiving Our range of digital image archiving equipment includes CamDisc SVR or CamDisc VG The flexibility offered by the removable hard disk for decentralised access using a typical PC makes it a cost effective product for recording digital video with all the features expected on the market Remote digital video transmission All our products can be connected to the public telecommunications network ISDN PSTN or a computer network TCP IP and can therefore be operated remotely The saved video images can be quickly and comfortably accessed in spite of the still relatively low bandwidth of the telephone network The transmission
185. any extent see Function and structure of R01 files on page 262 These files are created and saved on the receiver PC Many additional functions and enhancements for operating and controlling connections can be configured in these files on a specific transmitter basis Note You can create edit the R01 files with a text editor Before editing these files always create a back up that you can re apply later if necessary 26936_02 261 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 5 1 Function and structure of R01 files VG series SVR series devices CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer have a remote control concept that supports the connection of dome cameras pan tilt heads and video crossbars from various manufacturers HeiTel also offers a R16 Adapter with 16 relays The adapter is connected to a device The relays can also be controlled from the receiver PC You must configure the R01 files accordingly in order to be able to use remote control Your receiver software supports common PTZ products and their control protocols When installing PTZ protocols you can decide whether you want the R01 file on your receiver PC to be updated for the selected product see PTZ control on page 194 Generally speaking these R01 files are designed as templates for your customisations They can contain commands for camera 1 camera 1 to 4 or camera 1 to 10 CamControl LITE automatically provides you with easy touse control eleme
186. arth Note Please activate this option only after opening Google Earth or OpenStreetMap If you enable both the Track option and the Auto option the individual positions are automatically displayed in Google Earth joined together by lines Depending on the update interval you can follow the track on the map HeiTel by Xtralis 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide You specify the update interval for automatic display Auto from the dropdown menu You can choose from the following values 1s 2s 4s 10s 20s 30s 45s 60s 120s 180s 300s and Off On the GPS Live window the interval relates to the date on which GPS data is received On the GPS Archive and GPS Site Archive windows it relates to the time interval between the recorded images If necessary you can enter a suitable time to reduce the update frequency and give the Google Earth or OpenStreetMap software more time to locate and update the position You can also adjust the density of positions when the Track option is enabled Use the Clear button to delete all entered positions on the map Google Earth is closed Google Earth or OpenStreetMap update interval The default setting for the Google Earth or OpenStreetMap update interval can be adjusted Locate the GPSTr0100 ini file in the program directory of your CamControl software Open the file with an editor In the Options section locate the entry msGooglelnterval Options m
187. at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection No Carrier 1 Incorrect and or defective ISDN or V24 cable Incorrect TA configuration TAnot set to Euro ISDN DSS1 Incorrect MSN entered in TA Port speed at the transmitter has incorrectly been set to 230400 baud TA defective or No connection No Answer Connect message black screen No Carrier incorrect Firmware PABX system not configured for data services Incompatibility between the PABX system and the ISDN adapter Device is not connected to the S0 bus Incorrect telephone number PABX system does not accept the transmitter Call has been accepted by another data device Incorrect protocol is set at the TA End of Step 2 ISDN network 26936_02 1 Check the ISDN connection cable contacts and the V24 cable Does the TA signalise the presence of an ISDN line Switch off the modem and transmitter for a short time and then back on switch modem back on first Check the modem init string at the transmitter add SO 0 and set the port speed to 115200 baud Enter the correct MSN Reset the transmitter to the factory settings then enter the special modem init string for the modem being used Set the TA to Euro ISDN DSS1 Replace the TA or have the TA updated Check the settings of the PABX system Test the ISDN adapter at an ISDN connection without a PABX system Check the ISDN connection cab
188. at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ison TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCPIIP Analogue ISDN TCPIIP First try to narrow down the error Aided by the following steps check which function can not be correctly executed by your system Step 1 The receiver can neither call your own transmitter nor another transmitter demo transmitter Consult see No remote transmission possible on page 300 Step 2 The receiver can call other transmitters e g demo transmitter but can not establish a connection to your own transmitter Consult see Error at Transmitter Incoming Call Step 2 on page 307 Step 3 The receiver can establish a connection but can not accept incoming calls Consult see Error at Receiver PC Incoming Call Step 3 on page 305 300 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Step 4 Your receiver can be called by other transmitters but can not be called by your own transmitter alarmed Consult see Error at Transmitter Outgoing Call Step 4 on page 310 Steps 1 to 4 each refer to a chapter that can be consulted for troubleshooting when an error or fault occurs If the error fault can not be assigned to one of the four possibilities listed above then begin with the reference in Step 1 9 5 1 Error at Receiver PC Outgoing Call Step 1 If
189. automatically or Accept call and automatic operation you can activate visual and acoustic notification of incoming calls by selecting Warning signal If you have a sound card the file ALERT WAV in the program directory of the receiver software is played You can replace it with a file of your own If ALERT WAV has been deleted or the receiver PC does not have a sound card short warning signals are emitted by the PC loudspeaker as acoustic notification 26936_02 73 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis ALARM 6 2 User User Management provides you with a simple way of controlling how CamControl LITE is used All users must identify themselves with their name and password on program start and program end The names of the users are logged in the event list You can differentiate between simple operating personnel and system operators with access to all settings Receiver options User list Mayor h Delete user Password 7 M System access Options I Modify transmitter index New user Add user Cancel Help Deleting a user Click Delete user to delete the user selected in the User list from User Management Password In the Password field you can enter a password for the user selected in the User list The password may contain a maximum of 10 characters Note If using HeiTel video systems internationally refrain where necessary from using country specific special characters for
190. ber address entered for a callback Note With appropriate relay configuration failure to establish a connection to a receiver in the event of alarm will be reported see Relays on page 192 Refer to your product guide for more information 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 4 6 Live video settings Open the Live video settings tab from the menu under the Connections node You can configure live image resolution and quality for each installed camera and for the individual multiple views Groups Quad Ten Moreover you can opt for conditional refresh transmission mode In the case of CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 you can only program the Conditional refresh option see Conditional refresh mode on page 134 Note For digital transmission systems with local continuous recording CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices and HeiTel VG VideoGateways the settings for transmission are made independently of those for archiving see Video settings on page 160 Recorder settings x Device User Date amp Time E Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Phone amp IP number Live video settings E Mail HTconnect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Network TCP IP Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Li
191. bility of one or more transmitters for receiver calls can be restricted in particular immediately after start up of the receiver software or in the event of changes to the transmitter settings If necessary you are informed of this via this information window when dialling the transmitter manually 104 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide PORT A Error Cannot build up connection Status Transmitter not available at the moment This window is also displayed if the leased line to the receiver has been deactivated on the corresponding transmitter and the HTconnect option on the receiver software at the receiver for this transmitter is still activated in Transmitter index 6 9 6 3 Notes regarding use of third party services We wish to draw your attention to the fact that when using HTconnect a correspondingly configured transmitter permanently attempts to establish a connection to the receiver As soon as the connection is established then per transmitter and per receiver a data volume of 6 bytes per minute respectively is generated If this is calculated up for a calendar month of 31 days the resting connection in itself generates a data volume of around 270 kilobytes per transmitter for each receiver If a transmitter establishes TCP IP leased lines to the maximum possible number of receivers five then the data volume is estimated to be around 1 35 megabytes per month For that reason you
192. bove dialogue box informs you where applicable once after every connection on the expiry of a user password s term of validity To change the user password the current password a new password and a repetition of this password as confirmation is required If the new password and confirmation differ a relevant warning is displayed Only on correct entry in the three text boxes is the Change button activated in order to change a password The password can either be changed via this dialogue or alternatively users with authorisation to change the device setup can make a relevant modification of the password Notes All recipients using these user data may have to be adjusted to the changed password before connecting to this server again e CamControl LITE Transmitter index Receiver options User e Event Management System Master Data Management e CamControl MV Camera list Edit e CamControl iPhone CamControl iPad Transmitter list Edit e CamControl Android Transmitter list Edit 116 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Creating a user profile Live Arch cameras ive cameras le og In these fields select those cameras to be activated for the user in question during live transmissions and those additional cameras to be activated while saving images during archive access If a user selects a disabled camera a lock icon against a black background will be displayed instead of a video image Options This field allows you
193. browsers Click OK to confirm your activation settings and then close the connection between the CamControl software and the transmitter by clicking Hang up in the main menu The device will then re initialise This can require up to 120 seconds depending on the device type and configuration 123 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis The default port of your transmitter unit for the Web Server is 80 It may be necessary to change the default port number if want to set up more than one transmitter unit at one IP address via router or if port 80 has already been allocated in your network or cannot be used minimum requirement CamControl LITE V3 87 and device firmware 1 84 If you change the port for the Web Server and no longer use the standard port this modified port applies for all Web server and Web API connections including CamControl MV CamControl WM and CamControl iPhone These applications must be programmed accordingly For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl LITE press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page245 mall Note To connect to the Web Server the device s symbolic name e g http webserver1 heitel com or IP address e g http 62 214 6 12 must be entered in the Web browser address bar Examples with modified Web Server port 81 e http webservert heitel com 81 e http 62 214 6 12 81 Configuring connection If the Web Server is active you can select t
194. c svr4 4 IP POS 3B Demo CamDisc svr4 4 ISDN POS FH Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 IP 3B Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 ISDN T Demo CamTel svr10 1 IP T Demo CamTel svr10 1 ISDN FR Demo CamTel svr10 2 IP B Demo CamTel svr10 2 ISDN B Demo CamTel svr4 3 IP FH Demo CamTel svr4 3 ISDN B Demo CamTel svr4 4 IP F Nemo CamTel swrd HA ISNN zi Modify Add Delete Dial Cancel Help SVs OLH E vies CamDise svr10 1 IP Main entrance Biuiltines froint zi You can add up to eleven reference images for every transmitter entry in the Transmitter index see Inserting and editing reference images on page 93 6 9 2 Adding changing or deleting transmitter entries The Transmitter index dialogue box has three buttons with which you can add a new transmitter to the list change an existing entry or delete an existing entry Modify Add Delete These buttons may be greyed out and inactive indicating that the user currently logged in is not authorised to modify the transmitter index see Modify transmitter index on page 74 Supplementary information Please make sure to note the information in the following sections when adding transmitter entries e Inserting and editing reference images page 93 e Device grouping cascading page 95 e Device detection in local area network page 99 e HTconnect TCP IP leased line page 102 e Multiple transmitter entries pag
195. camera selective image search is only available in single image viewing mode It is disabled in the Four or Ten screen overview modes 5 1 3 Multi screen view In addition to single image viewing mode you can also choose between Four and if necessary Ten screen viewing mode to access the receiver archive You can make this selection using either the View menu or the following toolbar buttons Full screen view of the archived images for a single camera 1 camera Multi screen view of four archive images 4 cameras You can switch cameras by right clicking to create a group for example Multi screen view of ten archive images 10 cameras You can switch cameras by right clicking to create a different sequence of camera tracks for example This view is available for archive images of transmitters with ten video inputs 26936_02 65 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 5 1 4 Exporting individual images CamControl LITE s archive access software allows you to export the current individual image in different ways Image file Select File Save picture or click the Save picture button to save the current image to file either in BMP or JPEG format You can also save an image in CamControl LITE by selecting File Save picture with on screen information If you select this method of saving the camera name number as well as the transmitter name serial number are shown in the image file Print picture Select File Pri
196. ce via alarm panel or IBIS the device internal automatic summer winter time changeover is not carried out see Summer time settings on page 118 Time alignment via NTP Time Server NTP HeiTel video systems can be set for an automatic time alignment via the NTP Time Server NTP means Network Time Protocol and is a standard for aligning the clocks of computer systems in network environments minimum requirement CamControl LITE V3 88 and device firmware 1 88 118 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis The video systems use the following protocols during time alignment e RFC 1305 see http tools ietf org html rfc 1305 e RFC 4330 see http tools ietf org html rfc4330 Recorder settings CamControl LITE Software Guide Date amp Time Device 5 ee Device NTP NTP Settings Camera settings M On Camera groups Synchoniss avery NTP Satver address Motion detection zones Privacy zones 6h O uk pool ntp org 4 Alarms E Site archive Audio Check Server Relays PTZ control Serial channel Time Zone Video out A GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berin Bem Rome Stockholm Vienna z tras Upload Download Firmware update Extra holidays IP Camera Paa July 2010 rae Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 2 2412 1234 Add as ype 1 gt 1284 oK 6 7 8 39 1011 ste 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 pea 2 i 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 EAN kefi 2 27 2 23 30 3 Site archive state E Help Delete Entry NTP Settings
197. ces 26936_02 157 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis e Red Red fields are used to mark image areas that are not applicable to the camera position authentication check e Yellow Yellow fields are used to mark image areas that provide a low but sufficient number of usable edges for vector analysis These areas are only applicable to the camera position authentication check to a certain degree e Green Green fields are used to mark image areas that are highly applicable to the camera position authentication check A video image is applicable to the camera position authentication check and can be stored as reference image 1 or reference image 2 if at least four image areas can be detected as applicable for analysis If not the Store button is deactivated and is grayed out Under different lighting conditions different relevant edges can be used as the basis for camera position authentication It is therefore possible to store up to two different reference images for each camera track These reference images show for example different lighting situations such as day and night for the analysis For this analysis the camera image is divided up into eight fields and are checked for usable vectors If at least four fields contain usable vectors the reference image is classified as Applicable see Applicable on page 158 Applicable edge vectors of the reference images are stored in the flash memory of your device Thi
198. chive state Current password An existing password must be entered in the Current password box If you enter an incorrect password an appropriate message will be displayed when you click OK Re enter the password in the Current password box lt Current password is wrong New password Enter any new password in the New password box It can havea maximum of 8 characters Confirm password You must re enter your password in the Confirm password box for verification If your entries do not match an appropriate message will be displayed when you click OK Re enter the password in the Confirm password box lt New password and confirmation are different Note You cannot access the CamDisc VG archive if you forget the passwords If you do you must delete all images and all passwords before you can work with the image archive again see HDD on page 162 7 11 3 HDD Open the HDD tab from the menu under the Site Archive node This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices Recorded images are saved on the hard disk drive of your CamDisc SVR or CamDisc HNVR or Cam4mobile or CamServer This tab provides you with general information regarding your hard disk drive You can configure several parameters 162 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide L Vide
199. chive state IntrusionTrace h IntrusionT race h Number of Licences 8 566D9E54 F802 4A9E B6F0 672C638A78D5 Maximum number of IntrusionTrace h channels running on this device type 8 W On M On M On W On F On F On F On F On F On 10 F On oor onmaewn Boxeslive Boxes s archive 566D9E 54 F802 449 B6FO 672C638478D5 Vv 7AOCCSCF 7760 4393 95E C D 3BF158F5503 a 6326BCF1 222F 4414 80B4 23B4925D 520F qa 131ED268 3D72 4F74 B7D0 309BDE4BB3D8 a No License No License No License No License No License No License Open configuration tool v X v v v v Close Configuration windows u u u a a Vv aaqa w um u u a Note Before you can allocate licenses to cameras you have to obtain licenses using the Xtralis license exchange tool Please refer to the Xtralis Xchange Tool User Manual document no 27816 Allocate the available licenses to the desired camera channels by activating the checkboxes and selecting a license from the list 238 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 27 Analytics IntrusionTrace Configuration Note IntrusionTrace is only available with CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx as well as ipVG and only in combination with JPEG MJPEG cameras not H 264 When using analogue cameras we highly recommend using the analogue realtime cards in the equi
200. ck speed The settings in this menu do not generally affect the actual playback speed when working with low bandwidth connections Status bar with operating status and number of images OK 40 048 The operating status of the transmitter archive is shown on the left of the status bar The number of images in the currently active sequence is shown on the right e images from continuous recording multi track recording e images from event recording multi track recording Image number Date amp Time When playing back image archives the camera name is shown on the left underneath the image in the main panel while the current image number with respect to the total number is shown on the right underneath the image in the main panel together with the time and date of the current image An asterisk in front of the image number indicates that an archive image is in the process of being transmitted Event list of the transmitter archive In the case of multi track recording the camera tracks are initially arranged hierarchically in the event list in the lower section of the Transmitter archive 26936_02 37 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Transmitter archive CamDisc svr 10 9 xj 29 November 2005 x 08 50 48 a 00 00 00 B 1 Camera xj uF Transaction data Continuous recording Event recording Curent event Fs 2005 E November FFs 297 1172005 16 00 00 Aq 16 30 05 Aa 16 23 38 5
201. connection to the device in the login order indicated in field w O one 1 two etc This attempt failed due to unknown user and or wrong password Depending on connection mode and configuration the following additional information can be displayed Field v connection established by e IM internal remote data transmission adapter e g ISDN card EM external remote data transmission adapter e g MODEM NW Network NM Null modem UB USB UN Unknown Field y Reason for connection e R Receiver dialup e A Alarm call triggered by device e S Service call triggered by device every 24 hours Status messages to the multipolar terminal block D amp T Control input x The control input indicated in field x has been yes n closed closed o D amp T Control input x The control input indicated in field x has been yes no opened opened o D amp T Alarm input closed The alarm input has been closed n D amp T Alarm input opened The alarm input has been opened D amp T Alarm enable input The alarm enable input has been closed yes no closed D amp T Alarm enable input The alarm enable input has been opened yes no opened D amp T Aux input x The Aux input indicated in field x has been yes no closed closed D amp T Aux input x The Aux input indicated in field x has been yes no opened opened D amp T V out input closed The control output V out has been closed yes no D
202. control of IP cameras 26936 _02 CamControl LITE Software Guide Select this option to update the control file R01 to the receiver PC Select the appropriate control file for your external device from the drop down list The transmitter dependent control file is saved in the sub directory RMCTRL of the CamControl LITE program directory see Transmitter specific configuration files on page 261 Update the control file when you commission your external device and PTZ control for the first time if you want to transmit a new control file version to the PTZ control system if you want to remotely control another external device with PTZ control Note Updating the control file for your transmitter will overwrite the existing R01 file All previous entries will be deleted If you select this option PTZ control for this device is deactivated and the protocol for your extemal device deleted A status window is displayed during deletion The transmitterspecific control file R01 file on the receiver PC is also deleted Port A Connection Status _ Deleting Remote Adapter please wait Deactivating PTZ functions on the device in question means that PTZ control is no longer available to any of the transmitter s users PTZ control of IP cameras takes place independently of the functions described above The requirement for PTZ control of these cameras is the permanent implementation of
203. control using the mouse wheel Zooming zoom in or zoom out occurs for 0 5 seconds after the mouse wheel is operated once Operating it again within this timeframe extends the zooming by a further 0 5 seconds The window with the video image to be zoomed in out must be active in order for the mouse wheel to be used in this way If necessary the window may have to be selected with a mouse click Note The PTZ functions on an IP camera do not occur continuously but must be repeatedly called up with a mouse click This behaviour may also be reflected in the use of the mouse wheel for the zoom function 4 8 1 2 PTZ control via USB joystick CamControl RU In order to use the PTZ control via the USB joystick CamControl RU it is necessary for this functionality to be enabled via the CamTel INI see PTZ control via USB joystick on page 253 54 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide USB joystick CamControl RU a S 2 A CamControl RU top view The USB joystick CamControl RU has three axes X Y and Z and twelve buttons The X and Y axes of the joystick control the pan and tilt functions while the zoom functions are controlled with the Z axis by twisting the upper part of the joystick Using the twelve buttons you can also call up presets for the camera as defined in an R01 file The presets that can be called up correspond to the preset functions 1 to 12 stored on a button pa
204. cturer whether your camera model is command compatible with an IP camera from the list 230 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 24 HYBRID Card 4 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR The HYBRID Card 4 dialogue window is only displayed for you when using a CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR If your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR is equipped with one or two correctly installed HYBRID Card 4 expansion cards you can connect up to four or eight analogue cameras Minimum requirement for CamDisc HNVR devices firmware 1 82 Minimum requirement for CamDisc VG HNVR devices firmware 4 02 x HYBRID Card 4 Device 1 User HYBRID Card 4 1 Function Enabled Date amp Time E Connections 1 BF547 2 01 02 00 01 701 01 Analogue Video Vv Camera settings Camera groups 2 2 BF547 01 02 00 01 701 01 Analogue Video Vv Motion detection zones mae Privacy zones 3 3 BF547 2 01 02 00 01 701 01 Analogue Video Vv Alarms Site archive 4 4 BF547 01 02 00 01 7 01 01 Analogue Video Vv Audio S gt Relays a Serial channel HYBRID Card 4 2 Function Enabled EMA 3 Extras 165 Analogue Video f Upload Download 3 Fimwai update 26 Analogue Video E IPC TG amn Analogue Video r 489 l Analogue Video E E Cancel Site archive state Help The individual analogue video channels are activated via the HYBRID Card 4 dialogue window Each installed HYBRID Car
205. d The settings are now applied to the specified cameras An alarm in a detection zone is indicated by a red rectangle You can analyse recorded alarms using the archive For more information refer to Accessing the Site Archive on page 34 and to the CamControl Player Guide 244 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 8 Configuration configuration files and configuration examples The following sections contain information on additional configuration options using program and transmitter specific configuration files The configuration of various data transmission devices will also be explained by means of examples 8 1 Overview of the used IP Ports If when configuring the Recorder settings the option to change the address of IP ports exists Network TCP IP page 121 HTconnect page 137 Web Server page 123 POS ATM Adapter page 172 and Alarm panel page 202 you can access an overview of the used IP Ports via the button positioned after the port address If possible conflicts arise when entering a port address manually the colour of the question mark symbol changes to red Calling up the overview displays the overlapping port addresses in red See Overview with notification of possible conflicts on page 245 Overview of used IP Ports This overview shows the port addresses set for the functions and their usage status xi Function Port In use Network TCP IP 3000 Yes Web S
206. d 2014 07 21 12 32 34 Call at CamDisc HNYR Demo 2014 07 21 12 27 34 124304 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 10 45 58 Call at CamDisc HNVR Demo 2014 07 21 10 45 50 0 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 10 45 49 Call at Cam4Mobile Demo Kitl PC Archive 2014 07 21 10 42 43 6861 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 10 32 33 Call at Cam4Mobile Demo Kitl 2014 07 21 10 30 05 309 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 10 28 16 Call at Axel CD G4c 2014 07 21 10 23 49 5264 Pictures Connection closed 2014 07 21 10 16 36 Call at CamServer 2 Relay hd Xtralis Headquarters D A CH Tel 49 0 431 23284 1 HeiTel Digital Video GmbH info heitel com Hamburger Chaussee 339 345 www heitel com 24113 Kiel Germany Help Close lt F1 gt for help Offline CJ The following events are logged together with time and date e Program start with user name if available e Program end with user name if available e User change e Connection start with reason for connection Call Transmitter name Normal receiver call Timer call transmitter name Tour Routine call transmitter name Daily service call function not available in all models Alarm Transmitter name Alarm call triggered by the alarm input Callback Transmitter name Automatic callback on alarm function not available in all models Alarm camera name Transmitter Alarm call triggered by camera control name input
207. d 4 enables four analogue video channels to be activated HYBRID Card 4 1 With the HYBRID Card 4 correctly initialised for each video channel the DSP information is displayed e g BF547 01 02 00 02 01 00 e Ifin place of a code similar to this there is only a hyphen displayed it means the DSP in question was not recognised e If only a hyphen is displayed for each of the four channels then no expansion card has been installed or the expansion card in question is not correctly installed e The HYBRID Card 4 1 provides DSP support for analogue video channels V1 to V4 on the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR HYBRID Card 4 2 With the HYBRID Card 4 correctly initialised for each video channel the DSP information is displayed e g BF547 01 02 00 02 01 00 e lf in place of a code similar to this there is only a hyphen displayed it means the DSP in question was not recognised e If only a hyphen is displayed for each of the four channels then no expansion card has been installed or the expansion card in question is not correctly installed e The HYBRID Card 4 2 provides DSP support for analogue video channels V5 to V8 on the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Function The DSP function selected is displayed in the Function column Currently no selection is possible The entry is set to Analogue Video 26936_02 231 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 232 Enabled The Enabled column i
208. d CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer The Site Archive menu item and all sub menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices This dialogue box is not available if you are using CamTel SVR CamTel VG devices Continue reading from the next section see Audio on page 190 E Site archive Video settings Passwords HDD E POS ATM IBIS Keywords Adapter Audio Track settings E Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Video 2 in Video 3 in Video 4 in Video 5 in Video 6 in Video 7 in Video 8 in Video 9 in Video 10 in fe Fe AE FE A Ee Local image archive settings You can make the following settings to the local image archive of your CamDisc SVR CamDisc VG device 26936 _02 159 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis These include in particular e defining camera related image recording quality assigning passwords for protection against unauthorised access to the archive deleting recording tracks images passwords and the logfile formatting the hard disk configuring the recording of transaction data POS ATM and IBIS configuring the recording of audio data defining the size of individual recording tracks e selecting the recording type live image transmission and or recording and or archive access e configuring event and continuous r
209. d Contrast can be adjusted in a value range of between 0 contrast and 200 On principle all devices adjust themselves to the video signal received In certain cases however you may need to adjust brightness and contrast to get a satisfactory image quality Colour Select On in the Colour column to transmit and archive the video signal in colour Deselect this option for black and white transmission and archiving Note Black and white operation e Black and white images require less storage space e Video signals from B W cameras should always be transmitted and saved in black and white 7 6 Camera groups The Camera groups tab allows you to group several camera inputs These camera groups allow you create customised sets of overviews which you can then call up in the central control panel up by mouse click see Changing screen view on page 27 For devices with up to two camera inputs such as CamServer no camera groups are available Maximum number of groups The maximum number of groups depends on the number of camera inputs Number of camera inputs Maximum number of camera groups x Camera groups User Poot Group names Date amp Time 1 Camera 1 l Connections 2 Camera 2 Group 1 Entrance areas Camera settings ican Camera groups ACanead Group 2 Exterior shell Motion detection zones z Privacy zones 5 Camera Group 3 Group 3 a Alarms 6 Camera 6 Site archive 7
210. d in the Description column Logfile command overview General messages D amp T Initialisation of The hard disk was re formatted This was no no hard disk drive either triggered by the corresponding function in the configuration menu or by accident in the accessing PC due to deletion or modification requiring automatic re formatting D amp T Power on V x Device switched on restarted Field x indicates firmware version number D amp T Power off The device was switched off This entry is not no written to the file until the device is switched on again D amp T Logfile cleared x Logfile was deleted by the Delete logfile no y function in the Site archive configuration menu Field x displays name of registered user and field y displays order of login O one 1 two etc D amp T Setup changed Device configuration was changed or at least no no x y the configuration menu was exited with OK and not Cancel Field x displays name of registered users and field y displays order of login O one 1 two etc D amp T Files renamed x File names on a removable hard disk from no y another device were renamed The old serial number x can be used to determine the device in which the hard disk was used y is the serial number of the new device responsible for renaming 26936_02 269 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
211. d period of time calculated from the time he last used the function If the first user doesn t use the audio function for example the next user in line can use that function after the specified period of time If auser is using a function then the next user in line is notified accordingly The message is shown for approx 2 5 seconds PTZ and remote functions are at e PTZ functions present blocked Audio is at present blocked e Audio function Internal relays are at present e Internal relays a As of the device firmware V1 96 the Preemption option is available If the Preemption option is enabled the usual behaviour up to device firmware V1 94 is retained J Preemption e Amanual connection that is initiated from the receiver software attempts to obtain all rights PTZ relay and audio when the connection is established as long as the user has the necessary rights and depending on the existing connections of other users Inthe event of an alarm connection the associated rights PTZ relay and audio of a connection that exists in parallel are withdrawn in favour of this alarm connection If the Preemption option is disabled the procedure described above can be suspended Preemption 26936_02 211 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Software video signal This function is used to set the delay time after which the loss of a video loss detection signal due to covering or masking the camera is reported
212. d software once onto the mass storage and to load it into the working memory of a connected computer Use of the software within a network or any other multi station computer system is not authorized if this allows the software to be used at a number of computer workstations that exceeds the number for which the licence has been purchased A licence for the software product may not thereby be divided or simultaneously used at several computer workstations The customer must take measures in the form of access protection mechanisms to ensure that multiple use of the software does not exceed the number of purchased licences or that by multiple use of the software additional licences are purchased 1 5 Ifa customer changes the hardware at a workstation on which the licensed software product is being used then he must delete the software from the mass storage of the previously used hardware Simultaneous storage stocking or use of the software on more than one computer per workstation is prohibited Backup Copy 2 1 The customer is entitled to make one backup copy for each purchased licence of a full version of the software This backup copy must be marked accordingly Limitations 3 1 The customer is forbidden to decompile reverse engineer or disassemble the software or to manipulate the software in any other perceptible manner 3 2 The software product may be transferred to third parties when the customer passes the software on in its entirety to
213. dditional functions of your video system will also be deactivated while the HDD is inactive such as for example the set up of alarm and receiver connections Video systems without Video systems with no V out button on the front of the device V out button 26936_02 CamServer 2 and CamDisc HNVR 10 also do not have a control input of the same name on the back of the device Alternatively and depending on the device type you can switch a different potential free control input on the back of the device to ground using a button for at least 10 seconds e CamServer 2 serial number WDxxxxxx control input nc Pin 8 e CamDisc HNVR 10 serial number NVxxxxxx control input Aux in3 Pin 8 165 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Safe powering down of the recording system and safe removal of the HDD using Aux in2 If the procedure using V out described in the previous section see Safe powering down of the recording system and safe removal of the HDD using V out on page 165 cannot be used because the relevant control input and or the button for sequencer control is in use control input Aux in2 may altematively be used Note Although the software option Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched refers to Aux 2 the name of the control input on the back of the device is in fact Aux in2 If the system is programmed as follows the HDD is put into standby mode via Aux in2 HDD safe power down functions I
214. ded the minimum event size is maintained If the minimum event size is not reached your device automatically reduces the number of events and saves the corrected number of events after you click OK As of firmware version 1 76 the following HeiTel devices calculate in each case with a different minimum size per event e CamDisc HNVR series 3 MB e CamDisc SVRs series and CamServer 2MB e CamDisc SVR series and Cam4mobile series 1 MB To configure event recording it is imperative that you use CamControl LITE Version 3 83 or later The Possible number of events always supplies the maximum number of potential events Since the calculation is based on the current image size changes to the image size may in some cases be ignored Calculate your Desired number of events using the guide value Possible number of events such that from this default value you subtract a reserve of 20 to 30 percent depending on the expected image change Duration of These entry fields allow you to define the duration of pre alarm and prealarm alarm s postalarm sequences in seconds Pre alarm alarm interval s Specify how often you want an image to be recorded every x seconds separately for pre alarm and post alarm sequence The resulting recording Speed will be immediately displayed in frames per second fps 26936_02 183 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Number of images Average image size Allocated size for events
215. dem initialisation string Other data device is accepting the call e g fax Bad connection End of Step 1 analogue telephone network ISDN Network CamControl LITE Software Guide Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver Tone dialling is not Set the modem to pulse dialling see modem manual AT commands Correct the telephone number or the dial prefix to 1 or 2 e g ATDO Add the ATX3 command to the init string so your modem does not wait for a dialling tone Check the connection with a telephone Replace the connection cable Enter the correct modem init string in the receiver settings usually the factory setting Disconnect all other data devices from the line Reduce the port speed i e to 57600 from 115200 After you have excluded general sources of error see General Errors Faults on page 301 your PC is obviously able to communicate with the connected ISDN TA or ISDN card Check ISDN You should first test the ISDN connection when possible with the application software for the ISDN device or with a terminal program see Testing the Data Transmission Equipment on page 301 Error Fault at the Receiver PC No connection possible not even to demo transmitters error message No Dialtone or No Carrier depending on the type of TA used 26936_02 No ISDN MSN available Defective connection or connection cable ISDN light at TA is out or flashes No di
216. devices at the receiver end End of Step 3 ISDN network 9 5 3 Error at Transmitter Incoming Call Step 2 No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue ISDN TCP IP Analogue fison TCPIIP Please read the section for your application or for the type of data transmission you are using Analogue Operating an analogue dial modem at your PC page 307 ISDN ISDN card or external ISDN TA page 307 TCP IP Connection via local network cards page 307 26936_02 307 CamControl LITE Software Guide Analogue Telephone Networks HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver No connection Modem Bad connection synchronisation noises contact problems or followed by dropped line bad line No Carrier Incorrect modem configuration Defective modem cable Other device fax accepts the call Connect message Incorrect modem followed by Cancel configuration Defect at the modem cable or bad plug connections Incompatible modem No connection possible Port speed at the transmitter has incorrectly been set to 230400 baud End of Step 2 analogue telephone network ISDN Networks Check the telephone connection cable contacts and modem cable at the transmitter Switch off th
217. e connected inputs In such a way it is easy to localise activities to the relevant inputs see Camera control inputs on page 151 Activity messages from cameras in the multi image display In all multi image displays Quadscreen Ten Camera Group the video image from a camera for which the associated incoming camera message has been triggered is enclosed in a red frame In Mainscreen or Zoom mode the message is signalled as previously using a change in the font colour on the corresponding camera button In the Zoom window mode the signal is given analogous to the selected display type TEALTS BUILDING Xtralis Building Xtralis Parking Note No signalling is given if the corresponding camera is not switched on in the Quadscreen or Camera Group mode Acoustic message and automatic camera switching It is possible both to signal this change acoustically and to automatically switch to the relevant camera Configuration takes place in a transmitter specific R01 file see Extended software settings on page 266 26936_02 25 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Error relay Error relay Device armed SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer have an error relay that signals a notifiable operating mode CamControl LITE signals this status by means of a red error relay LED An operating fault e g no video signal or notification of a certain operating mod
218. e e g storage warning threshold reached may be involved Evaluating the transmitter logfile will provide more precise information on the actual cause see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 Alarm enable input The red LED display in front of the text Device armed indicates that the alarm enable input is switched to ground Relays Relay 1 The current VG and SVR devices CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile CamServer and some older HeiTel transmitters have two relays The buttons for controlling these relays are located underneath the camera buttons You can configure these two relays in line with your requirements in Recorder settings see Relays on page 192 Latch Momentary Closed while connected Closed on Error Closed while recording Closed while alarm Closed while alarm enabled Relay as latch or as an with automatic reset on connection being closed Relay as momentary with adjustable switching time Closed while connected Closed on error Closed while recording Closed while alarm Closed while alarm enabled Note If the relays have not be configured as momentaries or switches the corresponding buttons do not appear on the program interface Keeping program window on top You can configure CamControl LITE in such a way that the program window is always on top and cannot be covered by other programs Only windows with the same attribute are not covered The necessary entry can be configured in th
219. e 107 90 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Transmitter index x M Transmitter name Reference images Demo CamDise svr10 1 IP IP address Phone number dial prefix camdisc1 s r10 demo heitel com Prefix 1 CAPI Prefix 2 M Serial number cy5s00004 Username amp password Auto passwords Username gt m demo Add Modify OK Cancel Help Delete If you want to add a transmitter or a group of devices see Device grouping cascading on page 95 to the list select the Add button Modify If you want to change a transmitter entry select it in the transmitter list and then click Modify haa In both cases Add Modify the Transmitter data dialogue box opens and you can enter new or change existing transmitter data Transmitter name Give the transmitter a unique name maximum 30 characters Remember at this stage that the transmitter list is sorted alphabetically You may want to group individual transmitters used together for one object by their names It is not possible to use the same transmitter name several times IP address Phone Enter the complete telephone number or IP address of the new number dial prefix transmitter in this box Telephone number _ No letters or special characters should be entered in this box when a connection is established over a telephone line Only in exc
220. e CamTel INI configuration file Further information on changing this entry can be found in the relevant section see Program window SCREEN on page 258 Alternatively this option can be defined using Receiver options Extras see Extras on page 75 26 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 4 5 1 Changing screen view Heitel ALY I he 4 we xtralis er a E PRESET 1001 ae a Hang up Setup Site Archive Log file Audio tracks HTRALIS BUILDING Help Xtralis Building Xtralis Parking nis Close a lt F1 gt for help Online 2 62 KB 1 2 720 576 CamControl LITE allows you to choose between different viewing modes when accessing live images When you click oo a menu containing the different viewing modes opens pisensenssvenssnsuenssnassnensuansenssnssneansuansnassgsensansuassnesneenes Quadscreen i Ten Aes Fullscreen Mainscreen Zoom window Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 The software provides you with the following viewing modes Quadscreen This multi image viewing mode shows you four live images in the main panel at the same time By clicking the and buttons located underneath the images you can select different cameras for this viewing mode as necessary Ten This overview display shows live images from ten cameras at the same time This viewing mode is only available fo
221. e Guide 8 6 Program parameters SERVICE INF The file SERVICE INF located in the program directory allows you to make a variety of pre settings for the CamControl PLAYER as an integral part of CamControl LITE The following entries are possible in the SERVICE EXTRA and GPS sections SERVICE SERVICE This entry identifies the configuration section within the file Language setting LANGUAGE Selected language Example LANGUAGE GERMAN Write protection READONLY Open archives with or without write protection Examples READONLY 1 open with write protection READONLY 0 open without write protection Positioning and window size TOP y position of the top left corner of the program window on program start in pixels Example TOP 50 LEFT x position of the top left corner of the main panel on program start in pixels Example LEFT 50 WIDTH Width of the program window on program start in pixels Example WIDTH 1024 HEIGHT Height of the program window on program start in pixels Example HEIGHT 740 Password protecting the DELETE Delete CamControl PRO receiver archives No delete function receiver archives can be deleted if this entry is not present Examples DELETE YES Delete receiver archives DELETE TEST Delete only with password TEST Playback speed SPEED Set the playback speed 0 1 image sec 1 5 images sec 2 10 images sec 3 15 images sec 4 20 images sec 5 25 images sec 6 Max images sec Storag
222. e Logging of access to the card reader ina POS ATM IBIS data track e Synchronous recording of images as continuous or event recording e Control of the arming disarming of the video system via the card reader Configuration for the The following configuration is generally a requirement for this Soyal Card Reader e Baud rate 9600 e Mode 8 N 1 e Function Soyal Card Reader Note If the HeiTel video system is in this operating mode it can only be armed or disarmed via the card reader Arming disarming via a control contact or software is not possible when the Soyal Card Reader is in use 26936_02 199 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 16 Video out Your digital image broadcasting system has a video output only CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR and Cam4mobile but not CamDisc HNVR and CamServer via which you can output the connected cameras directly to a monitor and thus obtain an overview of the premises being monitored whilst on site Note Since CamDisc VG 2c CamDisc VG 2s Cam4mobile VG 2c CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR and CamServer CamServer VG devices do not have this universal video out these models do not have a Video out configuration menu x Video out Device User Date amp Time l Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Sequencer mode E Alarms IV Main entrance 2 s T Buildg left side 2 Site archive f Audio iV Driveway 2 J B
223. e data from picture If you are using a HeiTel POS ATM Adapter as the source for transaction data you can specify the type of data recording A distinction is made between POS and ATM data Depending on the data type the search options are different e POS data see Text amp price search POS data on page41 e ATM data see Text amp price search ATM data on page42 Using ATM search you can define the criteria you would like to use for the search Transaction number Account number Bank code number Amount and or General When checking the amount you can choose between the operators lt less than or equal to equal to or gt greater than or equal to You can link all the selected parameters for the ATM search in the transaction data either using the logical operators AND or OR by making the relevant selection from the Items combined by drop down list In addition to this combined search you can also search using individual criteria such as price Clicking the Export transaction data to file button saves all the transactions recorded for this camera track in a text file The data in text file are saved in an Excel compatible format so that they can be imported into a spreadsheet Note The Export transaction data to file option is available only for the Evaluation with optimal functionality or during an offline evaluation of the removable hard disk via the CamControl PLAYER Clicking the Print current
224. e desired transmitter entry also initiates dialling If you click the small button to right of the Dial button an additional menu with the ten last dialled transmitters opens Clicking one of these entries also starts dialling the transmitter in question reat M 1 Demo CamDisc svr10 1 IP Demo CamDisc svr10 2 IP PTZ Demo CamDisc svr4 3 IP Demo CamDisc svr4 4 IP i 3 4 5 Demo CamTel svr10 1 IP 6 Demo CamTel svr10 2 IP 7 8 9 1 Demo CamTel svr4 3 IP Demo CamTel svr4 4 IP Demo Kiel CamDisc svr IP PTZ 0 Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP Showing reference images If necessary you can enhance the view of the Transmitter index with an overview of reference images This makes it easier to find a specific transmitter when working with a large number of transmitter entries If you 26936_02 89 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis want to see the overview of reference images for the transmitter entries click the Show reference images button ai This overview will then be displayed on the right of the Transmitter index window until you click the button again The state of this button is saved when the Transmitter index is closed Transmitter index xj See 79 a0 M Transmitter list 27 6000 Reference images amp USB direct connection Demo CamDise svr10 1 IP FB Demo CamDisc svr10 1 ISDN FR Demo CamDise svr10 2 1P PTZ Demo CamDise svr10 2 ISDN PTZ 3B Demo CamDis
225. e directory for SAVEPICPATH Specification of a directory for the storage of individual images individual images Example SAVEPICPATH C PICTURES Showing event diagram EVENTSERIES Show the event tree 1 Event diagram is shown as soon as a camera track with event triggered recording is selected 0 Event diagram is not automatically shown when a camera track with event recording is selected 26936_02 267 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis EXTRA EXTRA This entry identifies an extra configuration section within the file Image display IMAGE _ Extended function for optimised display of PAL IMPROVEMENT and NTSC cameras Operating modes IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 0 default IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 1 variant 1 IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 2 variant 2 The two alternative methods require additional processor speed GPS GPS This entry indicates the configuration section for the GPS window Position of GPS window X position of the top left hand corner of the GPS window Y position of the top left hand comer of the GPS window Unit for the vehicle speed GPSSPEED Unit set for the display of speed in the GPS window possible units O kn 1 mph 2 km h Example GPSSPEED 0 unit kn GPS window active SHOWGPS Display of the GPS window Examples SHOWGPS 1 GPS window shown SHOWGPS 0 GPS window hidden Control elements for Google SHOWMAPCTRL Display of additional control elements in the Earth active GPS window Exa
226. e initialises the connected modem Transmitter data e Click Dial The Transmitter index now opens Click Add In the Transmitter data dialog box that now opens enter the name and the telephone number of a HeiTel compatible transmitter in the corresponding fields You can find a suitable transmitter in the demo transmitter list on the information CD for example Ensure that Prefix 1 is selected Now confirm your details with OK The Transmitter data dialogue box closes and you find yourself back in the Transmitter index Establishing a connection e The Transmitter index is still open The desired transmitter is highlighted in the transmitter list Now click Dial The software starts dialing and establishing a connection Online e Once a remote connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 4 1 3 Dial up connection with internal ISDN card or LAN CAPI quick start Connection e Install your internal ISDN card in your computer in line with the manufacturer s instructions and then install the drivers with CAPI support If using LAN CAPI install the driver for this type of CAPI support on your computer e Start CamControl LITE Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens Now in the Options list click Port A Deactivate the TCP IP option if necessary From the drop down list in the Modem group select Mode
227. e lowest edge of the image Whether alarms are triggered depends on the detection criteria settings in the Advanced Parameter Configuration see Advanced parameters on page 239 242 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide G al A Advanced Parameter Configuration arima Detection profiles Custom Profile details Type Visible gt Thermal 5 HUDS Value Name 0 3 Minimum height m 05 minimum time s 20 minimum distance m 1 i lt p In the configuration shown in the figure above the alarm is only issued if one or more persons remain at least 0 5 seconds inside at least one detection zone and move by least 2 0 metres E LA Intrusion configuration Geam Select camera Selected Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Dewarping Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Custom ec CONTI Drawing tools Q Q x B A Save settings New Area New Mask Clear all Calibration Cancel A maximum of 5 polygon areas can be drawn These areas can overlap Click on New Area To draw the detection ground zone click the left mouse button each time you want to make an angle Right click to complete the input If required a last line is added automatically to complete the polygon The enclosed area will be hatched with b
228. e modem and transmitter for a short time and then back on switch modem back on first Check the modem init string at the transmitter add SO 0 Reduce the port speed at the receiver modem Reset the transmitter to the factory settings then enter the special modem init string for the modem being used Disconnect other devices or use a modem switch Check the subscriber s line and modem cable Check the modem init string Reduce the port speed at the receiver modem Test another type of modem Reset the device to the factory settings Using the null modem connection set the port speed to 115200 baud Before installing the system inform yourself thoroughly regarding the ISDN connection e Which MSN has been assigned for the picture transmission system if applicable e Have all connected data devices been assigned an MSN If the transmitter is operated at a PABX system find out about any peculiarities involved in connecting data devices e Does the device demand the use of an MSN e Must the branch line be released for data communication e Does the system have any other peculiarities 308 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Using special commands many ISDN TA s provide you with the opportunity of obtaining exact information regarding aborted dial attempts see TA manual you should also evaluate this information when available Error Fault at the Possible Causes
229. e period for the delay for an alarm for disarming or arming is configured via a pull down menu Possible values are 10 s default setting 20s 30s 40s 50s 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 7 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 25 min and 30 min Disarming When the monitored area is entered Entry an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful disarming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered camera control input as the reason for the alarm Arming When the monitored area is exited Exit an alarm is deferred for the configured time period and is ignored in the case of successful arming Otherwise an alarm will sound with the triggered camera control input as the reason for the alarm Note that for multiple camera control inputs to monitor the armed disarmed area the configuration for the signal inputs in question must be configured appropriately 154 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Linked with Motion By activating the On option in the Linked with Motion column the camera control inputs are linked via a logical AND with the device internal motion detection for interior spaces see Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs on page 152 Only when the motion detection see Motion detection on page 155 has already been activated for the camera channel in question is it possible to activate this option I
230. eached If necessary delete the track Olt No disk space allocated for this recording mode ot this track or the camera is switched of Pause Within the Timer there is no period of recording defined Saving settings and saving or loading configuration profile You must confirm changes to the settings of your transmitter by clicking OK You can save your preferred settings permanently in the device by selecting Save as configuration profile see Configuration profile for video systems with removable hard drives on page 112 Select Load configuration profile to immediately load saved profile data during an active connection Click OK to apply the modified settings to your device Click Cancel to exit this dialogue box and return to the Recorder settings without applying any changed device settings Save Recorder Settings xi Do you really want to save the new settings I Save as configuration profile Cancel J Load configuration profile 26936_02 111 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Activating settings Note that some settings will only take effect after the current connection has been terminated or the next time a connection is established Configuration profile for video systems with removable hard drives A stored configuration profile for HeiTel video systems with removable hard drives such as CamDisc VGHNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile is of special
231. earch for internal HDD first defines the order for the boot mode The following options are possible e Option Search for internal HDD first activated The video system is using the internal hard drive for storing video images If the internal hard drive is not detected the video system will check the availability of an external hard drive to store images e Option Search for internal HDD first deactivated The video system is using the external hard drive for storing video images If the external hard drive is not detected the video system will check the availability of an internal hard drive to store images Note This option is disabled and greyed out in case the corresponding feature is not available 7 11 3 1 HDD safe power down functions For the device series CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs Cam4mobile CamServer and CamDisc HNVR the introduction of firmware 1 86 and the software CamControl LITE Version 3 87 provides functions for the safe powering down of HeiTel video systems and therefore also for the safe removal of HDDs especially of the SATA series Note The new HDD safe power down functions ensure that the integrity of data on HDDs is retained and that during removal any potential loss of data is prevented 164 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Minimum requirements e Device firmware 1 86 e CamControl LITE 3 87 CamControl LITE Software Guide Safe powering down of the recording system and safe removal of the HDD using V out
232. ecording e timer controlled recording All of the above items will be described in detail in the following sections 7 11 1 Video settings Open the Video settings tab from the menu under the Site archive node This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices You can configure the recording resolution and quality individually for each camera You can also specify whether you want to record in conditional refresh mode For CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 you can only program the Conditional refresh option see Conditional refresh on page 161 Note Archiving settings are made independently of transmission settings for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices see Live video settings on page 133 Recorder settings x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Device User Date amp Time Camera name Recording quality E Connections Camera settings 1 Camera 1 720 288 bd Camera groups Motion detection zones 2 Camera 2 720 288 v Privacy zones Baie 3 Camera 3 720 288 x E Site archive 4 Camera 4 720 288 F Passwords ei a S HDD POS ATM 5 Camer
233. ed the Setup button will not be available greyed out to the user in question during active connections If you have created users for your device at least one of them must have permission to change the setup so that someone can access the transmitter s settings Deleting a user Click Delete User to delete the user selected in the Registered users list from the User Management of your VG and SVR device 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 3 Internal device time Device Date and time HeiTel by Xtralis All current HeiTel devices are equipped with an internal clock This clock should be checked regularly and adjusted if necessary to ensure that images are saved with the correct time and date Recorder settings CamDisc 10 11 Device Date amp Time User Device NTP Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out EMA Extras Upload Download Firmware update IP Camera E H H OK Cancel Site archive state Help M Adjust Recorder Time Recorder Time 2010 07 05 10 26 54 Local PC Time 2010 07 05 10 26 48 Calculated Date and Time for the device 2010 07 05 10 26 48 Summer Time Settings JV Set automatically to Summer Time Europe Belorussia Moscow March October bed M T
234. ed the relay is switched to idle and released on activation This option can be used for operating modes Latch Momentary and Closed while connected Reset offline causes a relay operating as a Latch to revert to idle after the connection has terminated Note If the Reset offline option is enabled the relay in question possibly cannot be switched via applications that use the HeiTel Web API depending on API version such as CamControl MV CamControl Android CamControl Windows Phone CamControl iPad or CamControl iPhone This also applies to the function of the relay in the Web Server If the relay is to operate as a Momentary specify how long the relay is to be switched before it reverts to idle Note If you require more than two relays the optional R16 Adapter offers an 16 additional relays for your HeiTel device 193 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 14 PTZ control The devices have an internal PTZ control system for controlling an external device via CamControl LITE see PTZ control and remote adapter on page 53 The following requirements must be met e Your external device is supported You can find a constantly expanding list of supported devices on our website or in the product guide e Your external device is correctly connected to the transmitter unit For more information refer to your product guide This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG
235. ed as the sender Outgoing mail SMTP Sender address smtp heitel com info heitel com info heitel com smtp heitel2 de info heitel com In both the cases the sender results as info heitel com Add the associated password Optional message or link Text or link As an option you can add supplementary text or a hyperlink under Text or link This text is displayed in the text of the email alarm The length for this text field is limited to 64 characters Destination in case of Alarm Destination email Under Destination email address 1 or Destination email address 2 enter address 1 the email addresses of the recipients Destination email Note Only one email address is permitted for each destination email address 2 address Alarm image as For each destination address you also have the option to select whether attachment the respective alarm image is to be sent as an attachment with the email In general an attempt is made to send an alarm by email to the recipients who have been entered If sending of the email fails no further alarm message for the alarm concerned is sent by email Independently of the email alarm message alarm messages from the corresponding receivers are sent according to the settings made under Telephone number amp IP addresses see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 26936_02 135 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 4 7 1 Structure of the email alarm message For the email alar
236. ed camera 236 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Presets using IP cameras Recorder settings SF99U1U1 H e iTe l IP Camera DIGITALYIDEO Device SS Ce User Manufacturer Protocol IP address Date amp Time ah E Connection Configure Camera sett Hang up Camera gron Motion AXIS Type 1 Privacy zony ead Alarms ika Site archive hs Relays Password PTZ controll Serial chan Video out aes Number of Presets Video format Motion Server Port og file Extras 4 x PEG re El Upload D Firmware up IP Camera Configurate with Browser PIR ok Cancel f fdhaGSAclevwveqbaeqb Light on 098 Light Off 099 Wiper 081 Preset 4 L Generic GET command 2 fdhaGSAclevwveqbaeqb ex Preset commands of IP cameras can be configured via Recorder settings IP Camera Configure Number of Resets Normally the software will use preset 1 up to the chosen number max 16 If other presets are requested they can be configured via the r01 file that is created automatically in the subfolder RMCTRL using the device serial number as name If the lt SWNUM x gt entry ends with a number between sqaure brackets this number will be used as preset number This allows to reach special functions that often are accessible by higher preset numbers The preset number must consist of three number
237. ed while alarm Closed while recording Closed while connected or Closed on error was assigned to the relay Trigger event In the Trigger event column choose between On and Off standard setting If the On option is activated then event controlled recording of video images takes place according to the programming for the respective camera track in the Site Archive For CamTel SVR CamTel VG series devices this function is not available due to the absence of a hard drive 206 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis 7 18 Logfile CamControl LITE Software Guide Starting with CamControl LITE Software V4 12 the Logfile dialog box includes a menu for logfile functions ekordereinstellungen CamDisc YG Vor Ort Archiv Status Ix Logfile Logfile I Letzter Anrufer I nderung der Eing nge F Temperatur T Videosignalausfall I Logfile l schen Hilfe Digital image transmission systems equipped with hard disks log all important events in a transmitter logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 For CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices among others you can configure settings so that certain parameters are saved in this logfile All video systems of the VG Series have a battery buffered logfile which stores logged events independent of a hard disk or other storage medium Logfile Last caller Change of inputs Temperature 26936_02
238. ee Accessing the Site Archive on page 34 A message is displayed when your remove the hard disk drive from the device and access it locally on your PC Continuing recording If Overwrite protection is selected and a track is full recording will only continue when all the image data have been deleted You can do this with both the CamControl PLAYER and the CamControl LITE see HDD on page 162 Note If images have already been recorded on the track of your device and you want to select Overwrite protection retrospectively you should delete all recorded image data from the track Only then will total track capacity be utilised before Overwrite protection becomes active Monitoring recording time Report capacity for Select Report period less than if you want to ensure that your device can days provide saved video images for at least the specified period of time Define this period of time in the days box Once image data within the defined period of time starts being overwritten the Error relay is triggered and this event is recorded in the logfile of the image archive see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 Data protection Delete all pictures Select Delete all pictures older than if you want your device to older than days automatically delete all images older than the set number of days This allows you to set sensible recording time frames to comply with data privacy regulations or just t
239. eeeeceee 245 8 2 Program parameters CamTel INI 0 020022 e cece e cece cece eee cece eee ees 245 8 3 Saving window positions 002 22 e eee c eee ce cece ee eeeeeeeee 259 8 4 Changing the informational text FIRMA TXT 0 2222 e cece ee eee cece ee ee ee 261 8 5 Transmitter specific configuration files 00 0000 e eee e ee 261 8 6 Program parameters SERVICE INF cccccecceecececeecceeccceccetecees 267 8 7 Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series 2 2 2220 c cece cece e eee e cece cece ce cece cece eeeee 269 8 8 Configuring data transmission devices 0 000 e cece eee eeeeee 274 8 9 Installation of device drivers 2 0 2 eco cece cece cece aaa aoaaa La aoaaa naonna 277 8 10 Additional software GPS Data Viewer 0 0 2 2 22 eee cece cece eee ceeececeeees 292 8 11 Specification of the control inputs 0 22222 ccceeeeeeeeeee 295 9 Troubleshooting 0000000 0c e cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 9 1 Installation problems 22 222222 c cc ccc TeS Ee ES a EEUE SEAE 297 9 2 Operating CamControl LITE 2 0000 eee cece cece cece cece eceeeeees 297 9 3 Evaluating Contents of CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer 299 9 4 No null modem connection possible 0 02222 eee ecccee cece ee ceceeee 299 9 5 No remote transmission possible
240. eference to the command in the top list The value x range from1 to 99 specifies the position in this list CyPCMDx Command for bottom list box Double list box The double list box possible values for MODE 4 5 20 21 contains two independent drop down lists and is used on a camera specific basis The same variable names are used for the top list box as for the simple double indexed list box Additional variables are available for the bottom list box The value range for x is 1 to 99 CTx Text for top list box max 12 characters CMDx Command for top list box FCTx Text for bottom list box max 12 characters FCMDx Command for bottom list box 264 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Camera specific button panel Camera 1 You can use the camera specific button panel to control certain camera functions e g fixed positions and or to control the relays of the R16 adapter When a button is clicked it remains active for as long as the mouse button is pressed Different commands can be defined for pressing and releasing the button You can also specify how often you want the command to be repeated when the button is pressed in SWNUM Number of buttons range 1 to 16 SWNAMEx Button label max 20 characters SWCMDONx Command when the button is activated SWCMDOFFx Command when the button is deactivated SWT Repeat time for the command SWCMDONx Interval in 1 10 seco
241. eiTel by Xtralis Define the term of validity of user passwords All devices of the VGseries and also the CamTel SVR CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs CamServer Cam4mobile and CamDisc HNVR series user passwords with a limited term of validity can be defined minimum requirement Firmware 1 88 CamControl LITE 3 88 The validity of the user passwords is monitored by the device A relevant note is displayed once after every connection where applicable see Warning window on expiry of a password s term of validity on page 116 Password expires after x weeks With the Password expires after x weeks option you specify the term of validity for user passwords The term of validity can be between 1 and 52 weeks The standard setting is 12 weeks Warning x days in advance In addition you can define how many days in advance you wish to be informed of the expiry of the relevant password The prior warning can be between 0 and 14 days The standard setting is 3 days If this function is added to HeiTel video systems with existing users via a firmware update firmware 1 88 or later for the first time the users must be newly created or their password will have to be changed alternatively in order to save a valid reference date in the device Warning window on expiry of a password s term of validity CamDisc HN R 11 N 900444 x The user password of demo expires in 6 days Current password New password Confirm password The a
242. eiTel devices requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface Depending on the Windows operating system device series and CamControl LITE PRO software version the driver installation can be different Therefore please consider the driver installation instructions that are described in this document Configuration Start CamControl LITE Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens Now in the Options list click Extras Check in the USB section whether the option Transmitter index with USB node is activated or switch it where necessary to be active Then click on the OK button Standard settings for the USB direct connection The USB direct connection is made available upon activation at the top of the list in the transmitter index of the CamControl LITE PRO software The default data for this transmitter data is as follows and cannot be changed e Transmitter name USB direct connection e IP address and port 192 168 138 95 3000 This connection data cannot be changed If anon standard port number has been used in the transmitter e g 3001 an additional entry for USB connection will need to be added The IP address would be 192 168 138 95 3001 Please note the network settings of your device and consult the product guide if necessary Additional USB connection Only one HeiTel device can be connected to a receiver PC via a USB connection at any one time This is because the device IP address for the US
243. eiver PC Note Please note that a corresponding device driver must be installed for the USB interface concerned see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 on page 277 For the CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s devices please observe the conditions of use of the USB connection see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s on page 283 Note In order for a change in this parameter to take effect it is necessary after confirming the Receiver settings with OK it is necessary to shut down and restart your CamControl LITE software 76 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis 6 4 HTconnect The HTconnect menu allows you to change the following parameters which you were previously only able to set via the configuration file CamTel INI see Configuration file with modifiable keys on page 248 Receiver options On Options Cancel Help HT connect only TCP IP V On CamControl LITE Software Guide Port 2333 Activating the On option activates the HTconnect function see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 102 Port In addition you set the communications port for HTconnect through which the HeiTel devices communicate with the CamControl LITE software The standard value for
244. entering the Date and Time Alternatively you can select all IBIS data allocated to the relevant camera track by clicking Select all Using IBIS search you can define the criteria Wagon number Line Course Station you would like to use for the search For the selected search options you can also define text strings as filters You can link all the selected parameters for the IBIS data search using the logical operators AND or OR from the Items combined by dropdown list In addition to this combined search you can also search using individual criteria station only for example Now use the First receipt or Last receipt toolbar buttons to jump to the first or last IBIS data record that fulfils these search criteria Previous receipt or Next receipt shows the previous next data record that fulfils the search parameter Matches with the search criteria within the data record are marked in red by line If there are no more results that meet your criteria the following message appears Search text could not be found Click the Export transaction data to file button to save all of the IBIS data recorded for this camera track to a text file The data belonging to this text file is saved in an Excel compatible format to enable it to be imported into a spreadsheet Note The Export transaction data to file option is available only for the Evaluation with optimal functionality or during an offline evaluation of the removable hard disk via the Cam
245. entry will then be deleted from the holiday rule in question 120 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 4 Connections The Connections node contains the following configuration menus Network TCP IP Wireless WAN External Modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail and HTconnect Connections Network TCP IP Wireless WAN External Modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect ic Note Only make changes to the connection settings if you are absolutely certain that you fully understand their impact Incorrect settings may cause the transmitter to become inaccessible under certain circumstances 7 4 1 Network TCP IP Open the Network TCP IP tab from the menu under the Connections node Network TCP IP allows you to configure the internal network adapter You can integrate the digital image transmission system into your local network e g company intranet or a higher level network e g Internet using the adapter Please note the special features concerning the two network interfaces of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR see Special network configuration with CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR on page 125 Recorder settings gt x Network TCP IP Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai 4 Device User 100 MBit 00 30 26 16 cc 1 Date amp Ti
246. ents are shown in red color Events that are not supported by this PIR are shown greyed Any change will be displayed automatically When another entry will be selected in the PIR list the window will be actualized with its data eN x PIR state 1 PRO 18i General alarm Relay Packet errors PIR state 4 Alarm infrared SS J 0x00000000 Port 5555 0 0 0 0 0 Delete packet errors Camera Preset 1 0 Cover Vandalism Alarm rejection Heating system error Detector in startup phase Power failure Presence PIR lost PIR Details Using this control elements allows to configure the PIR in detail that is actually marked in the PIR list 1 PRO E 18WH IR867 Pe pan sc pe Off Off 4 Off Presence IV General Off 2 Off Off 4 off Camera Preset Ev 3 x jof C Double knock General lt gt Camera control input 0001 fad In this caption line the PIR number that represent the PIR address together with the PIR type and in brackets with its internal name are displayed 1 PRO E 18WH IR867 This option activates an alarm in case of tamper or hardware failures 26936_02 235 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This option activates an alarm when a PIR cannot be detected anymore V General This option activates the general Alarm of the PIR This alarm corresponds with the relays output of the PIR and will normally occur together wi
247. eptional cases may it be useful to include a modem or dialling control character such as a dialling pause in the telephone number IP address You must include the associated separators when entering an IP address e g 123 123 123 123 Port number You can also enter a port number at the end of the IP address e g 123 123 123 123 5000 CamControl LITE will then establish a connection using this IP address and the port number indicated This function together with a router that forwards external calls to the unit in question via assigned port numbers allows you dial into different transmitters at a single IP address 26936_02 91 92 Symbolic IP addresses Prefix 1 Prefix 2 Serial number Automatic passwords Username amp Password CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Symbolic IP addresses can also be entered in this box For the system to recognise the entry as a symbolic IP address the entry must start with three dots e g www yourdomain com This box can contain up to 59 characters The symbolic IP addresses can also be completed by adding a port number e g www yourdomain com 5000 Note The HeiTel transmitter itself does not support symbolic IP address names However a connection can be established to a symbolic address via a DNS domain name server Please contact your network administrator for assistance in setting up a symbolic address and for information on DNS service pro
248. er Cut transmitter CamDisc S YR10 1 IP Ctrl x LAN device autodetection Show transmitters with equal serial number If a transmitter i e a serial number appears more than once in the list of transmitters the Show transmitters with equal serial number option is added to the context menu that can be opened by right clicking within the list of transmitters In the Transmitters with equal serial number program window multiple entries are shown in groups Transmitter with equal serial number x Name Serial number CamDisc HNVR 10 1 IP NV900444 CamDisc HNVR 10 1 ISDN NV900444 CamDisc SVR10 1 IP Cv651028 CamDisc SVR10 1 ISDN Cv651028 If necessary please check these entries for a valid user name and a valid password Accidentally created multiple entries should also be deleted or corrected where necessary 26936_02 107 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 108 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and VG devices CamControl LITE is a tool that allows you to configure CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR simply and conveniently The type of transmitter device you have switched on is detected automatically and simple dialogue boxes help you configure the specific features of each device All settings are stored in the transmitter and can be recovered in the event of power fai
249. er Select export time window If you already set export marks while accessing the archive see Setting export marks for the image sequence on page 69 this range is applied in the Export to file dialogue box 5 Select the cameras to be included in the export if necessary The camera is preselected when exporting from camera tracks When exporting more than one camera track an additional progress window opens 68 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide igxi 23 10 2007 14 23 43 Camera 2 Area succestully exported i 29 10 2007 14 21 53 Camera 2 Exporting pictures 29 10 2007 14 22 48 Camera 1 Area succesfully exported 29 10 2007 14 21 53 Camera 1 Exporting pictures 6 Start the export by clicking Start export Select all The entire range of the recording is selected if you select Select all Setting export marks for the image sequence The export range can be set in the File Save sequence dialogue box or directly while viewing the recording Setting export marks allows you to precisely specify the range of the sequence to be exported Export marks are set as follows 1 Position the slider at the desired starting image for the sequence export and then click Set start mark The starting image is marked with a turquoise frame Position the slider at the desired end image for the sequence export and then click Set end mark The end picture of the export sequence is marked with a blue frame
250. er changing the IP port your CamDisc VG HNVR CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc HNVR CamServer or CamDisc SVR device will restart The following table lists all POS ATM Adapters currently connected to your recorder with the following data e Name amp Version Device name version status and serial number are displayed e IP address The IP address is displayed This IP address including the port address is programmed on the POS ATM Adapter as Source POS Adapter e Type The adapter type is currently distinguished between POS and ATM The following number in brackets provides details on whether it is a POS ATM Adapter with one channel 1 or with four channels 4 7 11 7 Audio recording Open the Audio tab from the menu under the Site Archive node This menu item is only available for Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices Since the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series is equipped as standard with an integrated audio function audio recording is possible with these devices If you have installed an Audio Card then you can save voice quality audio data on the hard drive of your CamDisc SVR device in addition to image data Your device needs at least firmware version 1 34 or 1 40 for audio recording Duplex audio live audio transmission and audio recording is possible with the use of firmware V1 92 or higher and CamControl LITE V3 92 or higher 26936_02 173 CamControl LITE S
251. er device to be used to record analogue camera signals A maximum of two of these extension cards per CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR can be used If aCamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR is used without HYBRID Card 4 all of the settings options relating to the use of analogue cameras will be missing Starting transmitter configuration Heilel DIGITALVIDEO Hang up View Setup Site Archive Log file First establish a connection to your transmitter Then click paun 26936 _02 109 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis If the Setup button is deactivated Sails after you establish a connection to the transmitter there are two possible reasons 1 You are not the first user connected to the transmitter at this time At least one other user authorised to change transmitter setup has logged onto the transmitter before you 2 You are not authorised to change transmitter setup Transmitter access protection User Management allows you to protect the transmitter from unauthorised access see User on page 115 For users without permission to modify setup the Setup button remains deactivated and no modifications can be made Automatic logon to transmitter Transmitter specific User Management is not the same as User Management in Receiver options see User on page 74 Users with identities in both management systems do not have to log on with user name and password when dialling into a transmitter Log
252. er operation on page 178 full event recording including pre alarm images will be started by triggering the relevant input contact Application example for a contact controlled switching Scenario Input circuits Timer operation In this example recording is to switch from continuous to event recording at the push of a button and an event for Camera track 1 triggered at the same time Activation with Normally opened Circuit Device contacts i Control in1 o AL The potential free input circuit enables the status input for camera 1 Control in1 to be switched to earth when the momentary switch is closed switch to event recording for the relevant camera track The input is now closed An event is triggered if in the dialogue Recorder settings Site Archive Video 1 in Event recording 1 you set the option Trigger via contact on Normally opened After the event has been processed recording reverts to continuous recording Since ongoing continuous recording for the recording of an event has been interrupted with alarm image and post alarm images no pre alarm images are recorded These images are available as part of long term recording CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer devices are equipped with a timer that can be adjusted for each camera individually In this operating mode images are only recorded at preset times No images will be recorded outside of the
253. erface on the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG or CamServer can be used for other purposes Set values for IBIS recording The Set values for IBIS recording button is used to set the following parameters for the initial POS ATM IBIS Track size Line length Delete track data track All other POS ATM IBIS data tracks are set to 0 Confirming with OK causes existing POS ATM IBIS data to be overwritten 170 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Note To record IBIS data only the first POS ATM IBIS data track can currently be used If you reduce the track size of this data track you can assign free percentage values to additional tracks proportionately and use these where necessary to record POS data The following IBIS data is recognised and can also be evaluated Date Time Wagon number Line Course and Station The IBIS data is accessed in the same way as POS data see Accessing IBIS data on page 43 The Set values for IBIS recording button may be disabled greyed out Set values for BIS recording To record IBIS data select IBIS in Serial channel Function If necessary follow the information positioned to the right of the button and change the programming for the Serial channel see Serial channel on page 196 Setting parameters for SOYAL The Set values for SOYAL recording button is used to set the following parameters for the initial POS ATM IBIS data track Track size Line
254. ermany As of May 2011 Provider Username Password am C C C Switzerland As of May 2011 isscom oen famo surse en oam orange enh oam United Kingdom As of June 2011 Provider Username Password am me fo foem 26936_02 127 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis T Mobile wap general t mobile uk 7 4 3 External modem Open the External modem dialogue box from the menu under the Connections node The External modem tab allows you to configure an externally connected modem or an external ISDN TA terminal adapter If the HeiTel ISDN card is built into your device configure this internal ISDN TA in the Internal ISDN TA tab see Internal ISDN TA Modem on page 129 If you want to operate your transmitter with an external modem ISDN TA you may also program your device using a terminal program and then save the settings in the modem permanently Then all you have to do is set the Baud rate of your transmitter to the correct value Please refer also to the appropriate sections in the modem or ISDN TA manual x Recorder settings z Network TCP IP Extemal modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_4 gt Device User Date amp Time El Connections Network TCP IP Baud rate 115200 z External Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers 138400 n Live video settings 57600 E Mail I Tone dial keam Number of ri
255. ers The advanced parameters should only be modified in case the standard settings are not sufficient e g rejection of true alarms or acceptance of false alarms Ensure that a change in advanced parameters does not affect the foreseen detection objectives e g the intruder could be crawling on the ground could be a group of persons In case of false alarms determine which parameter filters them out mostly e g the duration is particularly short or the alarm object is huge The advanced parameters are related to the dimensions speed time and distance Other characteristics could still influence the number of false alarms e g distinguishing cars moving slowly from large group of persons is not possible To generate an alarm an object must satisfy all the criteria specified in the advanced parameters AND cross a detection zone Click the Config button Two profiles are displayed in the dialogue window Default and Custom You can only change the Custom profile Select the respective entry to change the corresponding values 26936_02 239 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis A Advanced Parameter Configuration S Detection profiles Default Profile details Type Visible Thermal 5 UDS Value Name 0 7 Minimum height m minimum time s 20 minimum distance m a Aa gt high 2m low 1m SSeS tem Description o Minimum height Setting the
256. erver 80 Yes POS ATM IBIS Adapter 5000 Yes HTconnect 3333 No Alarm panel 6666 Yes Overview with notification of possible conflicts In the event of possible conflicts with regard to duplicated use of port addresses these are displayed in red in the overview xi Function Port In use Network TCP IP 3000 Yes Web Server 80 Yes POS ATM IBIS Adapter 6666 Yes HTconnect 3333 No Alarm panel 6666 Yes 8 2 Program parameters CamTel INI Settings for your CamControl LITE software are specified and saved in the CamTel INI configuration file You can and may change certain settings to customise the software in line with your needs Note Do not make any configuration changes unless you are certain of the effect they will have on the software 26936 _02 245 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 1 Structure The structure of the configuration file is described briefly below The file is broken down into sections for clarity The actual settings are saved in keys in each section Exactly one value is assigned to each key The setting is defined by the value Example PORTA Section MAXONLINETIME 1 key value EXTRA Section REFIMAGEWIDTH 1 key value REFIMAGEHEIGHT 1 key value 8 2 2 How to modify the configuration file You will find the configuration file in the program directory C CAMCONTROL_LITE default installation location or YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_PROGRAM_NAME You can m
257. es per minute for the resting connection Intended use The use of the TCP IP leased line is suitable for transmitters with DSL UMTS connections with dynamic IP addresses thereby eliminating the need for DynDNS entry Dynamic Domain Name System entry with the corresponding providers and for devices within company provider networks where the firewall restrictively prevents incoming calls Requirements e One of the above mentioned devices with firmware 1 52 or newer e CamControl LITE software 3 72 or newer e The possibility for a direct connection to the receiver PC via TCP IP using a fixed IP address ora symbolic name where dynamic IP addresses are assigned Note The relevant information can be obtained from your internet provider or from the responsible system administrator 6 9 6 1 Setting up HTconnect The set up for HTconnect is carried out in three steps e Activate the receiver software function using an entry in the corresponding configuration file CamTel INI or via the configuration menu Receiver options HTconnect see Step 1 on page 102 e Preparing the transmitter prior to installation in the building see Step 2 on page 103 e Installing the transmitter in the list of transmitters in the receiver software see Step 3 on page 104 Step 1 To activate HTconnect on the receiver PC Note Alternatively HTconnect can be activated including port number allocation using the receiver software CamContro
258. essing the program again will start the deinstallation process 8 9 2 2 Driver installation in Windows Vista Open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions 8 9 2 3 Driver Installation in Windows 7 For the video systems CamDisc HNVR 10 CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamServer 1 CamServer 2 and CamServer 2c no valid Windows 7 driver is available Open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE software Run the file pl2502win732bit exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions 8 9 3 Installing the USB driver for the VG series The USB direct connection requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 12 MBit s The USB direct connection rate with a CamDisc VG HNVR offers a maximum nominal transfer rate of 480 MBit s This function can be used with the following devices of VG series with firmware version 4 02 or higher e CamDisc VG HNVR serial number VNxxxxx e CamDisc VG 2s CamDisc VG 4s and CamDisc VG 10s serial number STXxxxxx SFxxxxxx und SXXXXXXxX e CamDisc VG 4 and CamDisc VG 10 serial number VFxxxxxx und VXxxxxxx e CamServer VG 2c 4c and CamDisc VG 2c 4c serial number CCxxxxxx und DCxxxxxx e CamTel
259. etting Reducing IPCAMSIZE from 5 to lower values reduces the need for RAM and reduces the load on the processor imposed by the CamControl LITE software Images from IP cameras that exceed the defined maximum size are displayed as plain white images in the Live view These images are available in the Receiver archive see Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 Optimised image display of PAL and NTSC cameras Optimised display of IMAGE_IMPROVEMENT 0 optimised image display of PAL and PAL and NTSC NTSC cameras cameras A Range O default setting 1 variant 1 2 variant 2 The two alternative methods also require processing capacity from the receiver system Variant 1 requires less processing capacity and subjectively gives the better result Dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras Dynamic PTZ control DYNAMICPTZSPEED 1 Dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras for IP cameras Range 0 Dynamic PTZ control disabled 1 Dynamic PTZ control enabled default setting 20 40 60 80 v Default In general dynamic PTZ control for IP cameras permits dynamic control of the pan tilt speed depending on the cursor position of the corresponding control symbols Zoom speed can be modified if required via a pop up menu which can be invoked for PTZ IP cameras through a right click on the control symbol Z or Z IP camera behavior during dynamic PTZ control depends both on the features of the camera as well as on the l
260. evel of implementation of the driver for HeiTel video systems 254 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 8 2 4 5 Transmitter logfile CBLOG Saving the transmitter ENABLED 1 Save the transmitter logfile logfile e Range 0 off default 1 on e Activating this function saves CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer logfiles in the directory C CAMCONTROL LITE CBLOG or YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_ PROGRAM_NAME CBLOG The individual files are saved under the following name Serial_number LOG e g CV542016 LOG The extended logfiles of the CamServer 2c and VG device series see Extended evaluation dialogue for battery buffered logfile on page 46 are also stored in the CBLOG sub directory of the software To distinguish between these files the following file naming methodology is used serialnumber TXT e g VX229002 TXT This file contains the transmitter logfile of the digital transmission system in a structured format It can be further processed or printed out As every entry is structured in the same way you can edit this logfile ina text editor or a spreadsheet program or similar application The individual fields of an entry date time event are separated by spaces Each entry concludes with lt CRLF gt CR go to beginning of line hex OXOD LF line break hex OXOA 26936_02 255 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 4 6 View during active connection ONLINESCR Speci
261. even in the event of a reset to factory values 124 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 4 1 1 Special network configuration with CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR In comparison with HeiTel devices of the SVR VG series a special feature of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR model is that it has two network interfaces In addition to the well known 10 100 MBit s interface called Ethernet on the back of the device this device also has a 1 GBit s 10 100 1000 MBit s interface labelled IP Camera Whilst the Ethernet interface is primarily intended to connect to the evaluation network the IP Camera interface is primarily designed to connect to the network of the IP cameras These specifications are only a suggestion The network interfaces may also be used in a different constellation Standard IP addresses In the standard delivery version or following a device reset the following of the CamDisc HNVR IP addresses are assigned to the two network interfaces e Ethernet 10 100 MBit s 192 168 31 95 e IP Camera 10 100 1000 MBit s 192 168 32 95 An adapted Network TCP IP dialogue box takes into account the two network interfaces of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Network TCP IP Extemal modem Intemal ISON TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_ gt 700 MBit 00 03 1403 1dcf 1 GBit 00 30 26 d9 00 bc T Obtain an IP address automaticaly DHCP IP address n92 16
262. ext gt Step 4 Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for RANDIS Ethermet Gadget 3 If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do C Click Next to continue cmos In this dialogue screen select the options Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in the search Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM JV Include this location in the search CA kd Browse Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware cmos Open another Windows dialogue box with Browse 280 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Step 5 From the Browse for Folder box select the subdirectory Drivers which is located in the installation directory of your CamControl LITE software Browse For Folder Select the folder that contains drivers for your hardware Desktop E Q My Documents H My Computer S S Hitachi 320GB C
263. f the modem s dial tone recognition frequently ATX3 Alternatively you can insert a pause after the outside line number s e g We wait for dial tone ISDN network operation e Itis generally recommended entering the MSN for trouble free operation e The ISDN terminal adapter must be configured for X 75 protocol Note Many of the above settings are factory defaults and can be activated with AT amp F If you are still experiencing problems consult your modem manual Below you will find some examples for correct initialisation of selected modems and ISDN TAs The configuration of the MSN is italicised in the initialisation commands for the ISDN terminal adapters However the MSN does not have to be entered in every case Sample initialisations Analogue modem AT command initialisation prefix CREATIX V 90 AT amp FX3E1V1S0 0 26936_02 83 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis GSM adapter Due to discontinuations or major technical changes affecting GSM data services by the relevant network operators the current documentation no longer contains any sample AT commands for initialising GSM adapters ISDN terminal adapter Model JAT command initialisation prefix Stollmann E1V1B10S0 0 2123456 TA PPX PP2 PPP 3COM U S Robotics ISDN Sportster ZyXel Omni net plus ATE1V1B00S0 08 amp Z1 1234568 amp Z0 123456 ZyXel Omni net ZI Z in incoming MSN LCD M ZO Z out outgoing MSN ZyXel Omni net D
264. f the transmitter This area contains no entry and is displayed in grey only when making a new entry Once the first connection has been established successfully the device serial number is obtained and displayed Where new transmitters are entered via Device detection in local area network see Device detection in local area network on page 99 then serial numbers are similarly available When using HTconnect see HTconnect TCP IP leased line on page 102 you have the option to manually enter or correct serial numbers This option was retained for upwards compatibility with pre SVR models If your transmitter is password protected you can enter the passwords for the transmitter in question in the Auto password 1 and Auto password 2 boxes in order to automate password entry when establishing a connection You can save the respective login data in the Username and Password fields These are used for a tour or for manual entry of a VG SVR or CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile series transmitter and for CamServer devices 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide If you want to delete a transmitter from the transmitter list then click Delete in the Transmitter index dialogue box Transmitters that are no longer listed in the transmitter list cannot be included in tours see Delete on page 86 For deleting groups of devices please note the information on device grouping see Device grouping cascading
265. f this is not done the option On remains inactive and is greyed out Linked with Motion So that a connection can be established to your receiver if the camera control inputs change status you must save the telephone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 7 10 5 Motion detection Open the Motion detection tab from the menu under the Alarm node The devices are equipped with one integrated software motion detector per camera input The sensitivity of this detector can be set to three levels You can define detection zones in the relevant camera image in the Motion detection zones tab see Motion detection zones on page 142 If amotion detector is active the associated video image or the defined detection zones are checked for movement every 300 ms This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Note Ensure that the scene used for motion detection is adequately lit under all operating conditions this is an essential requirement Ensure that no image noise shadows or similar have a negative influence on the motion detection function Recorder settings Ee Alarm inputs Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera postion authentication Device 2 oe Camera name Monan ote saabe Sensivit Date amp Time
266. firmware is version 1 58 or higher e CamDisc SVR 4 and CamDisc SVR 10 device serial no CQxXxxxxx and CVxxxxxx e CamTel SVR 4 and CamTel SVR 10 devices serial no TQxxxxxx and TVxxxxxx e Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 devices serial no MQxxxxxx and MVxxxxxx To use a USB direct connection with your CamControl LITE or CamControl PRO software it will be necessary to have particular drivers installed The drivers which are part of the scope of delivery are found in the subdirectory Drivers in your CamControl LITE PRO software After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 9 7 MBit s Driver installation in Windows 8 and 8 1 The USB driver is essentially installed in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 in the same way as the installation described in the chapter relating to VG series page 284 Driver installation in Windows 7 The USB driver is essentially installed in Windows 7 in the same way as the installation described below for Windows XP Driver installation in Windows Vista Install the USB driver in Windows Vista in the same way as you would in Windows XP following the steps described below Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions A reconnection of the USB cable
267. following situations with regard to contact status State Input is closed i e switched to ground Opening Edge State change Input has been opened A change from Closed to Open has occurred State The input is open unswitched Closing Edge State change Input has been closed A change from Open to Closed has occurred Configuring continuous recording Continuous recording Video images can be recorded without connecting a latch momentary without external motion detector or similar device to one of the image recording inputs If switching the control input is unswitched i e open and if this contact status has been configured as Recording mode Trigger Permanent this corresponds to easy mode continuous recording see Easy mode on page 185 Operating modes of the image recording inputs Ott M The recording behaviour of the different input states can be defined using the drop down list Closed Opening Edge Open Closing Edge 26936_02 187 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Permanent Permanent i Motion gt Motion Motion The device ignores the state or state change of the image recording input This camera does not record any images If you set all switch states Closed Open Opening Edge Closing Edge to Off image recording is completely deactivated for the camera in question Permanent and On Permanent means the device detects the state
268. forwards 64 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Last most recent picture You can select the playback speed for the archive with this drop down list You can choose between 1 fps frame per second 5 fps 10 fps 15 fps 20 fps 25 fps maximum possible number of images per second Max fps and Realtime If you select Max fps the playback speed depends on the performance of the accessing PC This button starts the time based search within the selected PC receiver archive In the Date time search dialogue box that opens you can set these two parameters After you click Search the closest image in the PC receiver archive is shown x Date 06 09 2005 ba Time 12 55 48 i Cancel Camera If you want to restrict the image search within the archive to a particular selective camera then you can select a camera or the transmitter archive in single image search image viewing mode from the drop down list with the camera symbol or by right clicking the fullscreen image The image search is restricted accordingly If you select Transmitter archive the search is restricted to images from the Site archive or the Pre alarm A search restriction will continue to apply to all subsequent image searches until you either remove it or select another call All cameras X Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Transmitter archive The
269. ft and bottom right indicate the start and end times of the recording period You can select an image within this view using the slider The control elements listed above are also available see Transmitter archive controls on page 36 38 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Accessing event recordings The current event in event recordings is identified by this symbol 16 26 05 J N Pd 16 26 29 You can select an event in an event controlled recording by its date and trigger type I S M In the slider the pre alarm images are shown in green the alarm image in red and the post alarm images in yellow Once you have selected an event the software shows the image that triggered the alarm with a red frame If you play back the entire alarm sequence using the control elements see Transmitter archive controls on page 36 the pre alarm images are framed in green and the post alarm images are framed in yellow Time nodes Calendar node Branches into the underlying time levels year month day Hour node Branches to the events Event types Accessing POS data Another node in the tree structure of the event list indicates the availability of transaction data Click the button in front of the transaction data node to open a dialogue box in which you can access these data Every camera track with transaction data has its own node and therefore its own access dialogue box Control Eleme
270. fying the initial MODE Q Initial view VIG CAMO 1 Camera for normal zoom viewing mode CAM1 2 Camera for live image 1 for quadscreen viewing mode CAM2 3 Camera for live image 2 for quadscreen viewing mode CAM3 4 Camera for live image 3 for quadscreen viewing mode CAM4 5 Camera for live image 4 for quadscreen viewing mode e Range for the initial view when establishing a connection View Normal viewing mode default N Zoom viewing mode Quadscreen viewing mode screen viewing mode You can also specify a different initial view for image transmission for example Quadscreen Ten or Zoom viewing mode This setting applies to all transmitters Once the connection is established the receiver software switches to the configured viewing mode automatically This applies in the same way to outgoing and incoming calls and alarms Notes e This setting has no effect on tours and the automatic processing of alarms e If you select Ten screen viewing mode as the initial view this viewing mode will only be used for transmitters with ten camera inputs The connection will be opened in Quadscreen viewing mode for transmitters with fewer camera inputs The entry CAMO specifies which camera should be activated by default in Normal and Zoom viewing mode e The entries CAM1 to CAM4 specify the order in which cameras should be activated in Quadscreen viewing mode Note The alarm camera may be activated as usual in Normal and Zoom viewing mode Th
271. g any changed settings to the device OK Cancel Site archive state Help Online help Help opens the online help where necessary as a PDF document in Adobe Acrobat Reader Site archive state The Site archive state button is only available for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices and for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG 2c VideoGateways The Site archive state dialogue box tells you the recording processes continuous or event recording used by each camera track and when This dialogue box also lets you know which tracks are completely full and which tracks have reached their storage warning threshold If at least one of these criteria applies then this status window is displayed when you open the Recorder settings 5 te archive state xi Continuous recording Event recording Track 1 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Typ on Track 2 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Typ oi Track 3 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Mon Tue Wed Thu Fii Track 4 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Tyr on Track 5 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Typ on Track 6 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Typ on Track 7 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Ty ow Track 8 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Tys ot Track 9 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Tys on Track 10 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Type 1 Typ on I Track is completely full If you want again to record pictures you have to delete the relevant track _ Warming teshold has been r
272. g live images This mode does not record images while you are accessing the image archive Triplex Select Triplex Live image transmission and recording and archive evaluation if you want images to continue being recorded while you are connected to the device and are accessing live or archive images Unlike Duplex this operating mode not only allows live images to be accessed and recorded at the same it also allows you to access the image archive during image recording Recording is however limited to tracks whose archives are not currently being accessed Note The Mode applies to all camera tracks on the hard disk drive Please note that image recording and transmission are considerably slower when Duplex or Triplex is activated Track division You can define the memory capacity of each track individually Adjust the size using the relevant slider If a track is set to 0 no images at all will be recorded on this track 26936_02 175 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Note All images stored in the device will be deleted if you change the track division because the image archive will be re initiated Images on tracks that have not been changed will be deleted as well If the total size of all tracks is under or over 100 an error message will be displayed Invalid values 110 exceeds 100 As long as maximum capacity has been exceeded you will not be able to close dialogue box by clicking OK You must confi
273. g section Variable definition Section for global control elements GRELAY Section for global control elements Variable definition for global control elements Section for global CIO Adapter control elements ClIO_GRELAY Section for CIO global control elements Adapters Definition of variables for global control elements Comments Comments on individual entries are separated by a semi colon REM remark is also permitted at the beginning of lines that are solely comment lines Note We recommend adding comments to the entries in R01 files for the sake of clarity General variables The MODE variable is used to assign dialogue boxes within a section Camera specific sections only CAMx MODE 1 Remote camera control MODE 2 Single double list box indexed MODE 3 Single double list box indexed and camera remote control MODE 4 Double list box MODE 5 Double list box and camera control MODE 16 Button panel MODE 17 Button panel and camera remote control MODE 18 Button panel and simple double list box indexed MODE 19 Button panel simple double list box indexed and remote camera control MODE 20 Button panel and double list box MODE 21 Button panel camera control and double list box Global section only GRELAY MODE 1 Global control elements with list box active MODE 2 Global control elements with list box inactive 26936_02 263 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by
274. g statuses e g the complete utilisation of the hard drive with active overwrite protection are recorded in this file You will find an overview of the logfile entries in a separate section of this guide see Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series on page 269 Error relay CamDisc SVR transmitters report critical operating statuses via the integrated error relay CamControl LITE signals this status by means of a red error relay LED See Error relay on page 26 In this case be sure to check the transmitter logfile in order make certain that the transmitter is operational Logfile Transmitter logfile CamDisc s r10 1 i 08 2005 15 04 58 Login demo NET 0 R 44 C 08 2005 15 05 09 Caller 0 062 21 4 006 002 08 2005 15 05 09 Logout demo 0 CMD 08 2005 15 14 03 Login demo NET 0 R 43 C 08 2005 15 16 15 Caller 0 213 221 112 082 29 08 2005 15 16 15 Logout demo 0 CMD 30 08 2005 00 13 02 Login failed gt unknown user lt NET 0 R 30 08 2005 00 13 02 Caller 0 212 159 119 110 30 08 2005 00 13 02 Logout gt unknown user lt 0 USR 30 08 2005 00 15 35 Login demo NET 0 R 44 C 30 08 2005 00 16 11 Caller 0 212 159 119 110 To open the logfile of the active CamDisc SVR transmitter click oe The logfile starts transmitting and can take some time depending on the size of the file and the connection All the entries with date time and a brief desc
275. ges in the overview modes Quadscreen Groups and Ten are transmitted and saved with low live image quality by default in SVR and VG devices You can adjust the quality of live images for individual cameras and the overview modes under Recorder settings Live video settings Live transmission quality see Live video settings on page 133 FIFO storage method The CamControl LITE saves the received video images one after each other in the receiver archive When the maximum size of the receiver archive is reached the oldest images and calls are gradually overwritten The FIFO method of storage ensures that you always have up to date data without you having to intervene and delete out of date data The archive can reach up to 2 GB in size or store up 1400 individual calls with the corresponding hard drive capacity The maximum archive size of 2 GB is valid only for FAT formatted hard drive partitions On NTFS formatted hard drive partitions the archive size is limited to a maximum of 512 GB Image manipulation Only with great effort can the digital image data be modified and returned to the archive files For this reason it can be assumed that the archive only contains image data received from a transmitter You can also verify the authenticity of individual saved images however 5 1 1 Accessing receiver archive You can access the archive at any time if there is no active connection to a transmitter To do this click Permi in the central co
276. gher the transmission quality the greater the amount of data to be transmitted per image and the lower the refresh rate 133 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Conditional refresh Select On if you want the live images to be transmitted in conditional mode refresh mode Conditional refresh mode only requires the differences between successive images to display the full image In many cases only parts of ascene changes Certain areas of the image such as a background wall do not change at all or only very little e g due to changes in lighting This reduces the size of the image considerably which in turn may increase transmission speed by up to twice as much in some cases IP cameras When transferring images from IP cameras the following conditions apply e CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Images are transferred depending on the programming for the conditional refresh Image size and format depend on the IP camera e CamTel SVR CamDisc SVR CamDisc SVRs CamServer Cam4mobile CamTel VG CamDisc VG CamServer VG Cam4mobile VG e Images are transferred from analogue cameras depending on the programming for the conditional refresh mode e Regardless of the parameters set for the conditional refresh mode images from IP cameras are always transferred as full screen images Image size and format depend on the IP camera 7 4 7 E Mail Access the E Mail tab through the selection menu under the Connections
277. gital Video GmbH info heitel com Hamburger Chaussee 339 345 www heitel com 24113 Kiel Germany lt F1 gt for help 4 1 Quick Start Getting started Once you have installed CamControl LITE it s easy to make the settings necessary to establish a data connection to your transmitter and start receiving live images In addition to an operational image transmission system such as CamDisc SVR or CamTel SVR you also need a fully installed version of CamControl LITE and an appropriate communication device Basic configuration varies slightly for the different connection types null modem modem external ISDN TA internal ISDN card network card or USB direct connection Continue reading from the section that refers to your method of establishing a connection to the transmitter 4 1 1 Null modem connection transmitter with external V 24 interface quick start Connection e Using the special HeiTel null modem cable connect your digital image transmission system to an available COM port on your PC and switch on your transmitter Configuration e Start CamControl LITE Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens In the Options list click one of the connection channels Port A Deactivate the TCP IP option if necessary From the drop down list in the Modem group select Mode Normal From the Port drop down list select the COM port to which you connected the transmitter From the Baud drop down list select the same
278. gs 9 4 No null modem connection possible You can only establish a connection between the transmitter and receiver systems using the original null modem cable recognisable by the orange red sticker on the cable Commercially available null modem cables can not be used The pin assignment for the null modem cable is specified in the manual of the appropriate transmitter Receiver settings Port A Deactivate CAPI TCP IP and set Mode to normal Select the correct COM port under Port Check the null modem cable The transmitter list must not appear when the Dial button is pressed when the null modem cable is connected unless CAPI or TCP IP is activated Test the COM port with another device and program e g mouse or modem and Hyper Terminal 9 4 1 Troubleshooting for Direct Connections Error Fault at Receiver Possible Causes at PC Remedy PC Receiver The transmitter list The null modem appears after the Dial cable has not yet button is pressed been recognised by the program Incorrect receiver modem settings Incorrect or defective null modem cable Incorrect or defective COM port 26936_02 299 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at Receiver Possible Causes at PC Remedy PC Receiver The Connection Status 1 Incorrect baud rate Receiver settings Port A Set dialogue box appears but 2 Incorrect or defective Mode to normal setup is not loaded null
279. gure capacity to 100 or below If overall track capacity is under 100 it will not be corrected and your settings will be applied directly To avoid misconfiguration ensure a total track size of exactly 100 Click Default to reset track sizes to the factory settings Number of tracks cameras Default value 7 11 9 Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in Open the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab from the menu under the Site Archive node These menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series devices You can configure each of the two four or ten camera tracks individually regarding both event and continuous recording Settings include e Definition of partition sizes for event and continuous recording depending on total track size e Combined continuous and event recording see Combined continuous and event recording on page 177 e Specifying timer operation see Timer operation on page 178 for event and continuous recording e Saving preview images for optimised site archive access e Overwrite protection for stored images e Reporting underflow e Deleting any images older than a definable date xi Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Device User Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms E Site archive Video settings Passwords
280. h each other via the HTconnect source and target port using the UDP network protocol User Datagram Protocol These ports can be configured if necessary If you change the value for the entry HTCONNECTTARGETPORT in the CamTel INI the same port number must be used for the CONNECTCMDPORT parameter in the configuration file HTCONNECT INI of the HTconnect Server The HTCONNECT INI file may have to be created manually with the following entries e CONFIG e CONNECTCMDPORT 4445 Image Viewer configuration The position and size of the Image Viewer is specified in a separate INI file see Window position Image Viewer VIEW 10 INI on page 259 Activate Image Viewer FIMAGEMODE 1 Image Viewer activated e Range of values 0 Off Image Viewer deactivated 1 On Image Viewer activated standard e Inthe basic configuration Image Viewer is activated To deactivate a corresponding entry in CamTel INI may need to be added Image Viewer number FIMAGES 3 number of preview images for the sequence OU preview Rages Range of values 3 to 15 In the event of changes to the presets a corresponding entry in CamTel INI may need to be added In the event of changes compared to the preset if necessary a corresponding entry in CamTel INI is to be supplemented Online motion detection Online motion detection is only provided for live images from analogue cameras If a motion is detected for a camera the CamControl LITE soft
281. h systems are illustrated on both sides via this network interface In addition the availability of the systems is continuously checked by both sides Recorder settings x 4 Connections HH Alarms Site archive Video out Device z User Date amp Time Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Relays PTZ control Serial channel Message to be sent Message to be receivec Extras Upload Download wi OK Cancel Site archive state Help Alarm panel Messages to be sent Messages to be received Alarm panel not connected I Enabled Pot fes 2 IT Synchronise device time with alarm panel This dialogue box shows whether or not a connection to an alarm panel exists A distinction is made between the following messages e Alarm panel not connected There is no connection to an alarm panel e Connected to alarm panel 192 168 31 208 A connection exists to the alarm panel with the specified IP address here 192 168 31 208 Note 202 The specified IP address of the alarm panel was selected as an example If alarm panel functionality is enabled you can define a port number for communication with your alarm panel Note Example When setting the parameters for the alarm panel you may need to enter the port address corresponding to the HeiTel device both for the local and the target port HeiTel device Alarm panel IP port for a
282. hannek TAn Fe toi tig II a ads sae tele e Pathe ite i ten IS ee 85 6 87 VOUS manea facecgacelenn eet ai aus toad 2 aeuen tassios e a a abasic dead 86 6 9 Configuring the transmitter index 22 2 e cee e cece cece eeeeeeeeees 88 7 Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and VG devices 0 000 e cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 109 7 1 DOVICE yi 226 SARE et bk aed fy fecha se tt hat SALI ae BA LS ie 114 Tzr MISC Leet a ARs tf cA Cease eRe es RES AC TA nels tll Ses LMM ae 115 7 3 Dateandtime 00 0 0 00 l lel ccc ccc cece cece cece ceeececeeeceeeeececeeees 118 EA ACONMECTIONS c4cou ie to a Oita Ne da dats nny Malan a ne ee det lee stat tt 121 Los Camera settihgs Mass eon sensed aeaa dnnl ddd hh 2a cos ie nse lie eek SEE 138 TG Camera Groups 602 ence vole cei a naea ea thadeuadss seca ueebauewueses 139 Ph AMOUOM x ceic hee SA AT des aceasta baa nd a teeth E tte dunce Dae a asco 140 7 8 Motion detection Zones _ 2 2 2 2 2 ccc cece ccc ccc e cece ccc ccceeeeeceeeeeeees 142 FQ Privacy Zones eoon en dss tsi ci tccasethaneotdide ce a a a aa a dadesebatades 143 TAO AlS 25053 cot ete ed hae he so De Bika sie De cle STS te te ch a 145 7 11 Site archive only CamDisc VGHNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG and CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and GaMServel eset eit hoe ess GE AROSE TS SSE OES ae oa 159 7 12 AUdIO 22 2 e cece cece cece cece cce eee ce
283. has been supplied needs to be installed see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc SVR 4 CamDisc SVR 10 CamTel SVR 4 CamTel SVR 10 Cam4mobile 4 and Cam4mobile 10 on page 277 Requirements CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s CamDisc SVR 10s CamDisc HNVR e In order to be able to operate a HeiTel transmitter only CamDisc SVR 4s and 10s CamDisc HNVR CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 produced from 2009 onwards using a USB link you need aPC witha USB connection and the driver which has been supplied needs to be installed see Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s on page 283 Requirements VG devices A requirement for USB operation with HeiTel Videogateways CamDisc SVR 4s and 10s serial no WS206xxx WV206xxx and higher CamDisc HNVR serial no NV206xxx and higher and CamServer 2c serial no WC211xxx and higher and CamServer 2 serial no WD206xxx and higher is a PC with a USB port and correctly installed USB driver see Installing the USB driver for the VG series on page 284 Configuration e Start CamControl LITE Click Setup The Receiver options dialogue box opens Now in the Options list click Extras Check in the USB section whether the option Transmitter index with USB node is activated or switch it where necessary to be active Then click on the OK button Connect e Click on the Connect button The Transmitter index opens In t
284. he device in the login order indicated in field w O one 1 two etc Depending on connection mode and configuration the following additional information can be displayed Field v connection established by Field v connection established by e IM internal remote data transmission adapter e g ISDN card EM external remote data transmission adapter e g MODEM NW Network NM Null modem UB USB UN Unknown Field y Reason for connection e R Receiver dialup e A Alarm call triggered by device e S Service call triggered by device every 24 hours Field z indicates the temperature measured in the device optional information see Optional column D amp T Login u v w y z D amp T Logout w y Z 272 The user indicated in field w terminated the connection to device in the login order indicated in field y O one 1 two etc Field z indicates the cause of termination e CMD Termination by receiver software command standard DCD Modem ISDN TA or TCP IP alarm adapter Data Carrier Detection was deactivated standard TI Timeout No data transmitted or capable of being transmitted 60 seconds error e ADC AlarmDisConnect caused by an alarm optional feature to be set in device configuration 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide D amp T Login failed u The user indicated in field u tried to establish no no v w y a
285. he settings for each camera track individually provided a partition for continuous recording has been created for the track in question see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 Recording is only possible if times for continuous recording have been defined in the timer for the track in question see Timer operation on page 178 Choose between two setting options e Easy mode for very fast and simple configuration see Easy mode on page 185 e Enhanced configuration methods for configuring continuous recording depending on the state of the control input see Advanced configuration on page 186 Either of these configuration modes can be selected individually for each camera track 7 11 11 1 Easy mode Select Use easy mode to configure in easy mode The Easy mode recording process corresponds to the mode Contact status Open Permanent in the Advanced configuration see Continuous recording without external switching on page 187 The option Record only when device armed stops the continuous recording when the device is not armed This feature increase the overall recording time and or protect the privacy 26936_02 185 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Recorder tings omic NVR ena E Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Camera settings a Camera groups Motion Privacy zones IV Use easy mode Alarms B Site archive Video settings Passwords Record i
286. he time period for Automatic timeout for the Web disconnect after from the drop down list The options range in different Server increments from Off to 24 h The default setting is 30 min If the Web Server is not active then you cannot configure a timeout Deactivating the Web API option prevents access to the device internal web interface This goes beyond the functional scope of the Web Server The Web API describes a programming interface Application Programming Interface and is an extension of the device internal web interface for httpbased integration in third party applications Note Ensure that you enable the Web API if you want to access the relevant transmitter using the HeiTel software CamControl Android CamControl iPhone and or CamControl MV LAN auto detection The activation of the function LAN auto detection support is a support requirement for the transmitter to be found during the Device detection in local area network see Device detection in local area network on page 99 Configuring the image transmitter To configure a digital transmission system for the first time establish a connection to your device via null modem or TCP IP factory setting of the HeiTel devices 192 168 31 95 Make the relevant settings for the network connection in this dialogue box Select the maximum transmission speed These values will be permanently stored in the settings The IP address and subnet mask you enter will be retained
287. he top position on the Transmitter list you will find USB direct connection Select this and then click on the Select button The software starts to establish a connection Online e Once the connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception Note Like the null modem connection connecting via USB serves primarily to put the device into operation or to modify the parameters In addition the USB direct connection can also be used to export image archives directly on the device 14 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 4 2 Starting the program Once you have successfully installed CamControl LITE on your PC you can start the program either by clicking the program icon on the desktop or by selecting Start Programs CamControl LITE CamControl LITE or by selecting the path you chose during installation Start Programs Your_name CamControl LITE 4 2 1 Logging on and off User logon User identification User name demo Password Cancel Help If you configured one or more users in User Management see User on page 74 then the User identification dialogue box opens on program start You are requested to enter a user name and password Pay attention to spelling because user name is case sensitive If after clicking OK one of the entries is incorrect a warning signal is emitted and
288. hicle bus Wagon number line course and station are also recorded see IBIS function with Cam4mobile on page 198 GPS GPS data received is stored with the recorded images and transferred if there is a live link to CamControl software see GPS function for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG on page 198 Soyal Card Reader The Soyal Card Reader function allows access to the card reader by the video system to be logged image recordings continuous or event recording to be controlled and the video system to be armed disarmed see Soyal Card Reader in conjunction with a HeiTel video system on page 199 Note Once you confirm the new settings in the Function menu with OK you must terminate the connection to your device in order from them to take effect 197 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis POS function for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer With CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer devices you can use the serial channel as well as an input for transaction data in POS mode see POS ATM IBIS on page 168 POS recording Recording protocols CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer protocols devices use the HYDRA protocol from AVE ora simple serial line protocol with lt CR gt carriage return as the end of line identifier to record POS data The HYDRA protocol operates on a POS camera selective basis Only camera 1 is used for the line protocol CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer selects the p
289. ices In this tab you can specify e the operating mode of your device during live transmission and access e the size of your two four or ten hard disk tracks Recorder settings x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Site archive Video settings Passwords HOD Mode Duplex Live image transmission and Recording or Archive evaluation z gi Track division Track V1 In Track V2In Track 3 In Track V4 In Track 5 In 0 A B Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recordin E Video 2 in ee OK Cancel E POS ATM ae Audio 34 21 GB Track V6 In T 34 21 GB 34 21 GB Track V7 In T 34 21 GB 34 21 GB Track V8 In 1 34 21 GB T 34 21 GB Track V9 In TE 34 21 GB 34 21 GB Track V10 In 1 34 21 GB Site archive state Help Default Operating mode Simplex Select Simplex Live image transmission or recording or archive evaluation if the device is currently only ever going to be carrying out one of these three functions Duplex Simplex Live image transmission or Recording or Archive evaluation Select Duplex Live image transmission and recording or archive evaluation if you want images to continue being recorded while you are connected to the device and are accessin
290. ick on the Record button to start recording 2 Complete the recording by clicking on the Record button again 3 Use the controls to find a suitable image A Refer to the illustrations further above 4 Click on Set image A and then on Height A 26936_02 241 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 5 Drag the reference line to the size of the person in the image or to the size of the reference object respectively 6 Use the controls to find a suitable image B 7 Click on Set image B and then on Height B 8 Drag the reference line to the size of the person or reference object in the image To apply the calibration to the camera click on Accept The dialogue window is closed 7 27 3 Mask zones Mask zones are used to ensure privacy in potentially sensible areas of the video image or to avoid false alarms due to irrelevant parts of the image e g flashing light on screen display of time trees cars etc LA Intrusion configuration be Select camera Selected Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Dewarping Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Custom Config wins y Drawing tools a Q v 4 a Ite New Area New Mask Clear all Calibration La Y Mask areas define the regions that will not be processed by the analytics module A maximu
291. ideo system that is being used Depending on the device used 2 4 or 10 camera inputs can be configured Trigger level Inthe Trigger level column select between the options Normally opened and Normally closed default setting a change in this condition may trigger an alarm 26936_02 _ Normally opened x 153 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis In the Mode column you select between the following options e Off default setting In this configuration a signal input never activates an alarm e Alarm In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm when the video system is armed This function corresponds to the option Connect which was used up to and including CamControl LITE software V3 83 For video systems with device firmware 1 77 or older only the options Off and Alarm are available To use the extended alarm functions which are explained in the following text device firmware V 1 78 or newer is mandatory e Fire Panic Continuously armed In this configuration a signal input always activates an alarm regardless of whether the video system is armed Entry Exit Arm delay The video system is armed or disarmed within the monitored area In this configuration a signal input activates an alarm after a configurable time delay For every camera channel only one time period can be configured which applies to both Entry and Exit for the monitored object e Theconfigurable tim
292. igure the relevant video systems Note Use of a software version older than CamControl LITE V4 01 may result in the faulty configuration of video systems with firmware V1 96 or later In case of VG VideoGateways a CamControl LITE version V4 12 or higher is needed 7 7 41 Motion settings As of the device firmware V1 96 the video systems have an enhanced video motion detection function As part of this firmware change the underlying Motion settings have been grouped together in the dialogue window of this name 140 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide xi Mation settings Motion detection zones Device User Sensivity History Brightness compensation Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings 1 High zl Ott z oss Blockingtine Camera groups E Motion j 2 High zl Off E Joss Blockinatime Privacy zones E Alarms 3 Hih zi r E O foss E Bocknatime E Site archive T k _ Audio Relays 4 Middle z O z C Joss Blockingtime PTZ control Serial channel Video out 5 High 7 mi z C foss gje E Alarm panel i Extras mm gt Pay Upload Download Boy ish ot r foss Blocking time IP Camera 7 Hih z for E C foss E Blockinatime OK 8 High zl Off z C foss Z Blocking tine Cancel g High z for Cl foss E Blockinatime Site archive state rt as E eee j 10 High gt of C 05s Z Blockingti
293. im arises Protective Rights 7 1 All rights to the software delivered remain with the licensor unless they have been expressly granted to the customer Place of Jurisdiction Final Regulations 8 1 8 2 8 3 The location of the licensor is the exclusive place of jurisdiction for all possible complaints of the licensor as well as for all possible complaints of a customer against the licensor If individual regulations within this contract are ineffective this does not result in the rest of the contract being ineffective The parties agree to replace the ineffective agreement with a legally valid regulation that comes as close as possible to the intended and economic reason of the ineffective regulation The same also applies when gaps in the contract requiring to be filled arise in the execution of the contract No oral agreements exist in addition to this contract Changes and additions to this contract must be made in writing 26936_02 315 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 316 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 11 Addendum For late breaking information that could not be included in the manual at the time of printing refer to the HeiTel Internet pages www heitel com under Service Downloads There you may download the complete CamControl LITE Software History http www heitel com upload downloads en 01 demosoftware 01 camcontrol li
294. ime Zone GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Extra holidays Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 2 3 4 Add as type 1 gt 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Add as type 2 gt 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Toggle Type Delete Entry Setting the recorder time Recorder time This field contains the current time of the digital transmission system Local PC time This field contains the current time of the receiver PC Calculated Date and Time for the device This field displays the calculated result for the date and time of the image transmission system taking into account the selected time zone and automatically adjusted summer winter time as the case may be Set recorder to PC time Note with it Summer time settings If you want to set the internal clock of your digital image transmission system select Set recorder to PC time Once you exit setup by clicking OK and the settings are transferred to the device the device time will be synchronised with the receiver PC time taking the selected time zones into consideration Ensure that the time on the receiver PC time is correct if you are synchronising your transmitter Select Set automatically to summer time if you want the internal clock to be adjusted to the selected summer time automatically You can select the location of the transmitter from the drop down list Note If time synchronization can take pla
295. in Drivers subdirectory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Note the order of the connection setup It is recommended turning off the device and disconnecting the USB cable Turn the unit back on After successful device startup about 2 minutes plug in the USB cable first to the USB jack on the HeiTel device printer interface Then connect the other end to the USB port of your PC and follow the installation instructions If necessary a new manual driver installation is needed If necessary use another USB port of your computer Note that a new USB driver installation may be required In some cases it is recommended rebooting the PC During the restart make sure that the USB cable is not plugged in Only after a complete restart the USB cable should be reconnected again If you are still experiencing problems with the USB connection is recommended using the network interface default IP address 192 168 31 95 to establish a connection to the device Consult also the CamControl LITE PRO manual to get more information 26936_02 291 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 10 Additional software GPS Data Viewer 8 10 1 Installation of the GPS Data Viewer If with the installed CamControl LITE software you want to use the additional control elements from the GPS window see Extended GPS Live window on page 30 please install the GPS Data Viewer During the installation you can choose whether to use Google Earth or Open
296. ined interval Note Even if Video signal lost detection is not selected the integrated error relay is triggered if a signal is lost see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 Clear Logfile Click on Clear logfile to clear the transmitter logfile right away in the middle of an active connection and create Logfile cleared as the first entry 7 19 Extras The Extras tab provides you with options for monitoring and performing advanced settings on your HeiTel devices Note Not all options are applicable to CamTel SVR CamTel VG devices The configuration options related to hard disks in particular do not refer to CamTel SVR CamTel VG series transmitters Digital image transmission systems equipped with hard disks log all important events in a transmitter logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 Under logfile you can specify that certain parameters be saved in this file for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices The Service area allows you to monitor the performance of your device Under Extra you can deactivate the hard disk of your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile or CamServer and initiate hang up and redial in the event of an alarm You can also release PTZ audio and relay functions for the devices and you can specify a delay time to detect whether the video signal has been lost 208 26936_02 HeiTel by
297. ing back image sequences from the CamDisc SVR archive these images will only be saved in the receiver archive if you did not select the Preview option Furthermore the Archive active option must be selected in Receiver options Archive options see PC Archive on page 78 If images are being saved this is indicated by the word Recording in red Transmitter archive controls Archive access is controlled with the buttons at the top of the Transmitter archive dialogue box o Show previous day eo Show next day First oldest image of the event or continuous recording One image back eo Stop play Stop eo One image forward a Last most recent image Save image This function saves the current images with a checksum in JPEG format The checksum allows you to check using the image authenticity check of the CamControl PLAYER or the software integrated into CamControl LITE for accessing the PC archive whether an image has been manipulated The image file is saved by default in the SNAPSHOT sub directory of the CamControl LITE program directory The image name contains the name of the transmitter the serial number the camera name and number and the time and date For example CamDisc SVR 10 1 CV500006 2_camera 2 29 08 0509 15 47 01 JPG Print picture This function allows you to print the current image to your computer s default printer with the following information Software name and version number Transmitter n
298. ing this tab The settings are used solely to configure the internal ISDN module or the internal PSTN module Configure connections made through an external modem or external ISDN TA on the External modem tab see External modem on page 128 Note The ISDN Card or PSTN Card in conjunction with the SVR or HNVR generation of devices provides the added security of redundant image transmission as you can choose between two independent methods of transmission via ISDN line or analogue line and UMTS 3G network for example 26936_02 129 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 130 Recorder settings Device User Date amp Time Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones E Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Cancel Site archive state Help x Network TCPAP Extemal modem Internal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_4 gt Version 1 005 MSN 1234567 Reset Adapter every 1h bal Reset Adapter Every The version number provides information on the version status of the ISDN Card or PSTN Card Note If no ISDN Card or PSTN Card is installed instead of displaying the version number you will receive the following notification No internal ISDN TA or Modem installed Enter your MSN Mu
299. is Hang up Setup Site Archive Log file Audio tracks CEP eee fe Tee fee Toggle to speaking S fdhaGSAclevwvegb eqb Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Quadscreen Site Archive Setup Log file Relay Relay 2 Audio tracks Alarm sound Alarm sound Help will arrive soon Help will arrive soon Leave building Hang up Original Leave building Notes Up to 16 audio tracks are possible The audio tracks must be stored in the subdirectory AudioTracks that is generated automatically during the installation of CC LITE In case CC LITE is used as CC Client within EMS v 1 70 or higher Audiotracks are provided via EMS DB and stored on the Server PC not in the sub directory AudioTracks The configuration must be done using the data management module Audio tracks can be selected in the normal view lt main screen gt via a button located on the left panel or in lt Zoom window gt mode via the popup menu Audio button or menu are blocked during playback on site Audio button or menu are blocked in case of a lack of user rights This function need firmware releases VG 4 18 or higher other 2 30 or higher Supported are only wav files with PCM 8 kHz sampling rate 16 bit 1 channel up to 10MB file size Configuration file CamTel ini 50 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide All keys to configure HTconnect have been transferred from
300. is e Checking please wait 0x02 The NTP server is being checked This process may last for symbolic names in particular with unsuitable NTP servers approx 40 to 60 seconds The message is displayed in blue e The NTP server is OK 0x01 If the NTP server was assessed positively during the check this message is displayed in green e The NTP server is not applicable 0x00 If the NTP server was assessed negatively during the check this message is displayed in red e Under certain circumstances the NTP server did not provide a sufficient reply The server may be assessed as suitable after a further check e Check for the server addresses set as a symbolic name whether at least one DNS server and the gateway in the network settings see Network TCP IP on page 121 were set correctly NTP time servers can be available in a local network or via the internet third party services When using an NTP Time Server on the internet a pool of these servers should always be accessed As part of the NTP Pool Project see http www pool ntp org you can find a relevant list of these servers Examples e 0 de pool ntp org e 1 de pool ntp org e 2 de pool ntp org Germany e 3 de pool ntp org Germany e 0 uk pool ntp org UK e 3 ie pool ntp org Ireland e 0 us pool ntp org USA Germany Germany ama aN Global parameters The following parameters are configured globally for the Date amp Time menu Time
301. is therefore always armed In this state the Arm Disarm input can be used as an additional signal input This option corresponds to the former function Enabled alarm enable input Note The options Triggered manually or by software and Triggered by input cannot be activated simultaneously If you select Connect a receiver is dialled whenever the state at the Arm Disarm input changes from armed to disarmed This depends on whether Normally opened or Normally closed is selected Select Normally opened from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to be armed when the Arm Disarm input is closed Select Normally closed from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to be armed when the Arm Disarm input is open If configured accordingly a status change at the Alarm input designation on the video system Al in can cause your transmitter to establish a connection to a receiver PC or a control station As a rule image transmission starts with the image that triggered the alarm Then camera 1 will be switched on Normally opened a Normally closed A 26936 _02 Select Connect to enable the alarm function Select Normally opened or Normally closed to specify which input state will trigger the alarm a Normally opened X Normally opened Select Normally opened from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver when the Alarm input is closed Select Normally closed from
302. is is not possible for Quadscreen and Ten screen viewing mode 256 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Image size at 128 x 80 SMRESOLUTION 50 Image size in normal view for 128 x 80 Range 5 100 When working with a live image resolution of 128 x 80 pixels or lowest quality in normal view you can specify the picture size as a percentage of the image size in normal view Image quality tenand DEQUMODE 1 image quality in ten and quadscreen viewing mode quadscreen viewing mode Changing the quality for the overview modes also changes the picture size in Normal and Zoom viewing modes If you select a higher quality the picture size in Normal and Zoom viewing modes increases e Three picture quality levels are available for the overview modes ten and quadscreen viewing modes 8 2 4 7 Time synchronisation TIMESYNC Time synchronisation MODE 1 Time synchronisation operating mode for current devices e Range 0 off default 1 on e If you activate time synchronisation the clock in the image device is synchronised with the system clock of the receiver PC every time a connection is established This means that the image archive clock is set to the same time as the PC clock automatically after the pictures are loaded Note 26936_02 This function can result in the wrong time in local digital image transmission systems if they are accessed from a different time zone a
303. is not armed on or alarm contacts are not set to Connect Enter the dial prefix 1 as ATD Assign an MSN to the transmitter Check the entered telephone number is a number required for the outside line Make sure that the alarm detector contact is not continually connected SVRdevices e Arm Your device if necessary Set the alarm detector contact to Connect Test your alarm detector the camera button in CamControl LITE is highlighted in red when a camera alarm detector input has been triggered 311 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 9 6 Analytics Detection Problems and False Alarms Many issues can be avoided by choosing a careful setup both during the camera installation and during IntrusionTrace commissioning For example acommon mistake in setting up a camera that is going to be used with video analytics is a poorly chosen field of view The following table shows some common sources of problems and the respective remedy Intruder is not detected Calibration as well as the setup of the detection area and mask areas are essential regarding reliable detection Refer to Analytics IntrusionTrace Configuration on page 239 Recurring false alarms due to Small animals Snow and rain or headlights of cars sweeping across the scene Movements on adjacent roadway Moving foliage and shadows Spiders webs and insects Adjacent Movement Increase minimum height e g 0
304. is only an example Authentication may be necessary depending on the model and configuration of your IP camera For more information on authentication methods please refer to the camera documentation An example of a common procedure is the Basic Authentication Scheme in accordance with RFC 2617 HTTP Authentication see http tools ietf org html ric2617 section 2 Example of a generic GET command GET cgi bin encoder USER demo amp PWD demo amp SNAPSHOT HTTP 1 1 r nHost 192 168 31 74 r nKeep Alive 300 r nConnection keep alive r n r n Note To create a Generic GET command you will normally require the SDK Software Development Kit or API Application Programming Interface documentation for the IP camera Without support from HeiTel the user will not normally be able to use this function Integration via the ONVIF protocol Starting with firmware version 2 12 HeiTel video systems support the ONVIF protocol Problem free integration of IP cameras that support the ONVIF standard is not guaranteed Advance testing is strongly recommended Instant integration is based on ONVIF Standard 1 02 Due to the fact that the ONVIF standard is being constantly enhanced the backward compatibility of future versions cannot be guaranteed Furthermore there are differences in the video formats supported and their resolutions The resolutions and the performance of the relevant video formats JPEG MJPEG and H 264 may therefore differ
305. ished installing GPS Data Viewer on your computer Click Finish to exit Setup 8 10 1 1 Additional information regarding Google Earth If you chose Google Earth as the map representation during the installation procedure described above it is mandatory that you install the Google Earth application on your CamControl LITE PC Note The licence terms and conditions of use for Google Earth Please consult the relevant software documentation 26936 _02 293 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Possible display problems The Google Earth application accesses data on the Internet and hence requires an Internet connection If display problems occur check the internet connection and the availability of the Google Earth servers 8 10 1 2 Additional information regarding OpenStreetMap If you chose OpenStreetMap as the map representation during the installation procedure the display will take place in a separate program window with the label GPS Data Viewer which can be closed if necessary together with the CamControl LITE software Note The licence terms and conditions of use for OpenStreetMap Please consult the relevant software documentation Possible display problems The OpenStreetMap application accesses data on the Internet and hence requires an Internet connection If display problems occur check the internet connection and the availability of the following servers e www openstreetmap org e www openlayers
306. it exe Driver file for Windows 7 282 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Starting from firmware 2 04 or higher and CamControl PRO LITE software v 4 07 the driver VideoGatewayPL2502 inf for Windows XP 32 64 Bit Windows Vista 32 64 Bit Windows 7 32 64 Bit and Windows 8 only 32 Bit was added The USB direct connection can be used with the following devices that comply with the following serial numbers e CamDisc HNVR 10 device serial number NV206xxx or higher e CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s device serial number WS206xxx and WV206xxx or higher e CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 device serial number WC211xxx and WD206xxx or higher Driver installation in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 The USB driver for SVR s devices is essentially installed in Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 in the same way as the installation described in chapter of VG series page 284 Driver installation in Windows 7 The USB driver for SVR s devices is essentially installed in Windows 7 in the same way as the installation described in chapter of VG series page 284 Driver installation in Windows Vista Depended from firmware and software version you are requested to install an USB driver after having plugged inthe USB cable Follow the instructions in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 279 Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directo
307. it facilitates more effective data transmission to the receiver PC at narrow bandwidths Note Images are formed gradually in conditional refresh mode Under certain conditions this could result in black blocks appearing in the image These blocks are successively completed as the image continues to be expanded 4 6 1 Accessing the Site Archive The devices in the CamDisc SVR series have a removable hard disk for multi track recording The images for the individual camera tracks are saved as continuous recordings and or event recordings in the Transmitter archive Transaction data can also be recorded If the receiver software is connected to the CamDisc SVR CamDisc HNVR CamServer or Cam4mobile via a TCP IP connection clicking the Satter button opens a pop up menu in which you can select between Evaluation with optimal functionality and Evaluation with optimal speed Evaluation with optimal Functionality Evaluation with optimal speed Note Using Recorder settings User you can define the authorisations for the different evaluation formats given to each respective user see User on page 74 The selection referred to above is only displayed where there is an authorisation for both types of evaluation 4 6 1 1 Evaluation with optimal functionality This extended access to the archive provides all CamControl PLAYER functions You can access the archive over a TCP IP connection using virtually all functions that are available when loc
308. ith up to 100 transmitters in this way Receiver options 7 Options Cancel Help Tour Time i E 55 MM MT vw M Th MF M Sa VS Building x Parking site bd Delete lt Add Time limit of connection 10 min Camera 1 2 Camera 2 4 Camera 3 2 Camera 4 0 Camera5 10 Camera 6 0 Camera 0 Camera 8 0 Camera 9 0 Camera 10 0 Configuring tours oor 7 M On Select On to activate the tour selected in the drop down list 001 to 100 Starttime Enter the start time for the tour in these two boxes hour minute 86 M T W Th F Sa S Select the days on which you want the tour to be carried out The drop down list above the lt Add button contains all the transmitters currently in the Transmitter index If you want to include a transmitter in this tour then select the transmitter in question in the list and then click lt Add Note Only transmitters that are in the transmitter index can be included in a tour Transmitters that have been removed from the transmitter index or that have been renamed can no longer be dialed during future tours If a transmitter is deleted from the transmitter index even though it is still supposed to be ina tour the failed attempt to access these transmitter data will be noted in the event list with the entry Data not available Transmitter name see Event list on page 20 The drop down list above the Delete button contains transmitters t
309. ity of the products for your purpose You acknowledge that you have not relied on any oral or written information representation or advice given by or on behalf of Xtralis or its representatives Total Liability To the fullest extent permitted by law that any limitation or exclusion cannot apply the total liability of Xtralis in relation to the products is limited to i in the case of services the cost of having the services supplied again or ii in the case of goods the lowest cost of replacing the goods acquiring equivalent goods or having the goods repaired Indemnification You agree to fully indemnify and hold Xtralis harmless for any claim cost demand or damage including legal costs on a full indemnity basis incurred or which may be incurred arising from your use of the products Miscellaneous If any provision outlined above is found to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of law such invalidity or unenforceability will not affect the remainder which will continue in full force and effect All rights not expressly granted are reserved 26936_02 i CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Document Conventions The following typographic conventions are used in this document Italics Used to denote references to other parts of this document or other documents Used for the result of an action The following icons are used in this document Caution This icon is used to indicate that there is a danger
310. ivation contact must be programmed to Normally closed so that the HDD is set to standby mode before the device is switched off The standby mode for the HDD is activated by switching off the vehicle ignition taking into account the programmed delay before switching off Write logfile entry Before the HDD is put into standby mode the device writes the logfile entry HDD deactivated including date and time 26936_02 167 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis HDD safe power down The HDD is put into standby mode and does not record any more data The video system signals this state by means of the flashing yellow video signal LEDs depending on the device type V1 V4 V10 The device remains in this mode for as long as it remains activated via the switched off vehicle ignition e If activation is interrupted by switching on the vehicle ignition the HDD is reactivated and recording is restarted in accordance with the device programming Independently of this the HDD remains in standby mode for at least 10 seconds Automatic switch off The Cam4mobile device is switched off once the device internal delay to of the video system switch off has expired Note When the HDD is in standby mode neither video data nor audio data where applicable is recorded Nor are any logfile entries written Additional functions of your video system will also be deactivated while the HDD is inactive such as for example the set up of alarm and rece
311. iver connections Safe powering down of the CamServer 2c or safe removal of the storage medium In the CamServer 2c device series serial number WCxxxxxx a change to the existing device configuration for the HDD standby functions may be ignored and reset In this device series the main power switch operates as a standby switch i e e When the device is powered off any pending write processes on the storage medium are first completed e These processes are indicated by the flashing of the yellow video LEDs e After the write operations are completed the video system is switched off and all front LEDs go out Storage media can be removed or replaced in this state 7 11 4 POS ATMI IBIS POS ATM IBIS Keywords Adapter Open the POS ATM IBIS tab from the selection menu under the Site archive node The POS ATM IBIS node contains the two supplementary configuration dialogues Keywords see Keywords on page 172 and Adapter see Adapter on page 172 Note The inclusion of POS ATM IBIS data in the camera image using the POS ATM Adapter can only take place with analogue image sources The POS ATM IBIS dialogue window serves to specify the track settings for transaction data 168 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide x POS ATM IBIS Keywords Adapter Device i User I s z Date amp Time Recording Type Track si
312. ivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions A reconnection of the USB cable might be necessary after having run the driver installation manually Driver installation in Windows XP The USB driver for VG devices is essentially installed in Windows XP in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 279 8 9 3 1 Troubleshooting It may happen that no USB connection can be established This can have several causes Therefore check your CamControl LITE PRO software and firmware version to ensure that your device meets the requirements of the USB connection Due to the fact that there is a network adapter installed in the USB connection it happens that your PC has problems to initialize a network adapter properly In these cases it is recommended checking the Device Manager to see if the RNDIS Ethernet Gadget or Ethernet USB RNDIS device is installed correctly If your device can be found under Other devices a new driver installation should be done Follow the instructions depending on your operating system which is described in this document and update the driver by manual allocation of the USB driver in Drivers subdirectory of CamControl LITE PRO or by the included drivers of your operating system If necessary run the installation of the USB driver manually again The drivers can be found
313. ke to select a different folder click Browse Browse Atleast 1 1 MB of free disk space is required lt Back Cancel 4 Select the display mode for the GPS Data Viewer e Google Earth e Open Street Map 292 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide sox Select Additional Tasks N Which additional tasks should be performed Q Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing GPS Data Viewer then click Next Select the mode Goose sags You must install Google Earth for this mode you will find it at i ihttp earth google comintl en i C Open Street Map Coa 5 Before beginning installation of the files you will be shown a summary of the previously selected options Select Install to start the copy process 1G Setup GPS Data Yiewer 10l x Ready to Install N Setup is now ready to begin installing GPS Data Viewer on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location CACCLITE Additional tasks Select the mode Google Earth You must install Google Earth for this mode you will find it at http earth google con 6 This dialogue box will inform you when the copy process ends End the installation by selecting Finish 8 Setup GPS Data Viewer E Completing the GPS Data Viewer Setup Wizard Setup has fin
314. l LITE see HTconnect on page 77 Then continue as for the section HTconnect Server see HTconnect Server on page 103 e Close down the receiver software e Open the configuration file CamTel INI for the receiver software CamControl LITE e Locate the section EXTRA in the configuration file e Add the following entries in the section EXTRA see HTconnect configuration on page 251 or make the corresponding changes HTCONNECTSVR 1 1 ON 0 OFF Default HTCONNECTSVRPORT 3333 Default 3333 e Save the changed configuration file e Start up your receiver software 102 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide HTconnect Server M Status Active connections 0 Total connections 0 Port 3333 e Check whether the HTconnect Server program is displayed in the taskbar e Open the HTconnect Server status window by double clicking on the program symbol e The top part displays program messages e The bottom part gives details in the status section about active connections the total number of connections and the connection port Where applicable it is followed by a list of the transmitters connected showing the serial number and IP address along with the date and time that the connection was established Step 2 The following steps are to be carried out prior to installation in the building e Start your receiver software and establish a connection to the corresponding transmitter using the
315. l by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 62 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 5 Offline Access In addition to providing you with online access to live images the site archive for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and all HeiTel VG VideoGateways see Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer on page 34 and pre alarm images for CamTel SVR and CamtTel VG see Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG on page 51 CamControl LITE also allow you to access the receiver archive offline If configured accordingly CamControl LITE saves all received video images in the PC Archive You can make this setting under Receiver options PC Archive options see PC Archive on page 78 There are extensive search functions available for accessing the receiver archive offline You can also export image sequences and print out or save individual images Alternatively you can use the CamControl PLAYER for offline access 5 1 Receiver archive PC archive Notes on the receiver archive e Video images are only saved when the receiver archive is activated e The PC system time is used as the time basis for the saved images Image quality and resolution in the receiver archive All video images are saved in the quality and resolution with which they were received In Fullscreen or Zoom viewing modes this corresponds to the slider setting underneath the video image The video ima
316. larm call triggered by camera control input Online Alarm alarm panel camera Alarm call triggered by alarm panel via name VdS 2465 protocol Online Alarm camera name Alarm call triggered by control input on triggered control input the Cl Adapter or CIO Adapter Online Motion camera name Alarm call os by motion internal motion sensor Online Alarm Reboot Alarm call triggered by a device restart Online Video loss camera name Alarm call triggered by the loss of video signal Online Camera pos Alarm call triggered by camera position authentication camera name authentication Online Alarm enable input Status change of the alarm enable input Online Callback Callback by transmitter Online HDD Error Alarm call triggered by hard disk error of the image storage device online sabotage triggered control Alarm call triggered by sabotage of a sha control input connection type BS8418 Alarm call triggered by sabotage of a camera control input connection type BS8418 online sabotage camera name Alarm call triggered by sabotage of a triggered control input camera control input connection type BS8418 on a CIO interface e Size of the last picture received in kilobytes e Percentage indication of the progress of current image transmission e Number of users currently dialed in only for HeiTel VG device series and for CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile CamServer CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR e Camera number image format image qualit
317. larm panel Local IP port Target IP port 6666 6666 6666 Port 65535 cannot be used for alarm panel addressing Entering this value disables alarm panel functionality For an overview of the IP ports used by CamControl LITE press the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on page 245 fae a 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Synchronise device When the Synchronise device time with alarm panel option is enabled the time with alarm panel device time is synchronised with the time transferred from the alarm panel When this option is enabled the device requests the time for synchronisation from the alarm panel at 6 hour intervals Note If time synchronisation can take place via alarm panel or IBIS the internal automatic summer winter time changeover is not carried out see Summer time settings on page 118 7 17 1 Messages to be sent Via Messages to be sent your HeiTel device communicates with an alarm system to which your HeiTel device sends messages Individual alarms are selected from a list of possible events that were communicated via the VdS 2465 protocol You can define a maximum of 40 messages to be sent Recorder settings xj EMA Messages to be sent Messages to be received Device User Date amp Time i Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms amp Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial
318. le and transmitter Use the correct telephone number Assign an MSN and enter this inthe system Assign MSNs to all other data devices or disconnect these to test the SO bus Check the modem init string 309 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Error message Terminal server is not Test network access using TCP IP CamControl LITE 10060 connected to the network Telnet or at MSDOS prompt using the command ping lt TCP IP address Transmitter gt Establish the connection End of Step 2 TCP IP 9 5 4 Error at Transmitter Outgoing Call Step 4 This chapter contains help and instructions in case your transmitter can not call your receiver You should first have checked that your transmitter can be called by the receiver and that your receiver can be called by another transmitter No Remote Transmission possible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue Telephone Networks Please first check your analogue modem at the receiver by calling the receiver with a mobile telephone or a normal telephone Some of the following errors faults can be excluded by making this check Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Call is accepted by 1 Transmitteris set to At the tran
319. ltiple Subscriber Number in the MSN box This is a telephone number without prefix used to dial into the transmitter If this box is blank the MSN in the internal ISDN TA module will be deleted The associated AT and dial commands will be assigned automatically so that no further ISDN TA initialisation is required When using the PSTN Card no entry is provided in this field This drop down list menu allows you to specify how often you want to reset the internal ISDN adapter Certain installations may require the ISDN TA to be reset at periodic intervals in order to ensure the availability of the device Please note that this interval is reset after each connection and that the adapter cannot be reset during active connections 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 4 5 Phone and IP numbers One of the most important features of HeiTel image transmission systems is their ability to automatically establish successively connections to one or more receivers in the event of an alarm In the Phone amp IP numbers tab under the Connections node enter the relevant telephone numbers and IP addresses and specify dial up behaviour x Network TCP IP Extemal modem Intemal ISDN TA Modem Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mai_4 Device User Date amp Time B Connections Network TCP IP External Modem Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect
320. lue lines thus creating a blue zone You can easily change the form of the polygon by clicking one of the line end points angles and drag it to a new position You can also add a line by deleting one of the lines and automatically start drawing from the last line end point To delete a detection zone select it and click the Clear selected button Clear all will delete all mask and detection zones defined for the camera Note The detection zone relates to the ground zones not the image zones If e g a person steps into the detection zone it will be sufficient that the feet are in the detection zone to trigger an alarm Hence do not extend the polygon beyond the ground surface you wish to monitor 26936 _02 243 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Area direction For example movement on an adjacent road may result in false alarms In such cases use a directional area directed perpendicular to the roadway Click on the detection area to select it Then click on Unidirectional and drag the arrow to the desired motion direction which shall result in alarms The arrow s position on the area does not have an effect on the function f LA Intrusion configuration oj Select camera Selected Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 4 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Default Config Area direction No direction Bidirectional
321. lure Notes CamDisc SVR and CamTel SVR transmitters are each available with four or ten camera inputs e CamDisc SVR devices unlike CamTel SVR transmitters have a hard disk for local image archiving Once a connection has been established toa CamDisc SVR you can access the image archive on the local hard disk by clicking Site Archive in the central control panel provided you have the relevant user permissions see User on page 115 The Site Archive menu item see Site archive only CamDisc VGHNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG and CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer on page 159 in the Recorder Settings drop down menu allows you to modify the archive settings of the CamDisc SVR device e Please note that this menu item is not available for CamTel SVR devices which have pre alarm storage instead see Pre alarm CamTel VG and CamTel SVR only on page 148 In terms of configuration the Cam4mobile devices behave like the CamDisc SVR models in that they also have a removable hard drive The CamServer 2 devices have a permanently installed hard drive for local image archiving and are only available with two camera inputs The CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices differ greatly from the previous devices in the SVR series e Inthe basic system these devices are designed for image recording by an IP camera on up to ten camera tracks e Theuse of an optional HYBRID Card 4 allows four camera tracks p
322. m i e when the alarm input or one of the camera control inputs has been triggered You may choose if the alarm enable input of the device will be completed by one of the following options e Triggered manually or by software e Triggered by input Triggered manually or If the option Triggered manually or by software is activated the LED by software display for CamControl LITE is replaced by a button that has the function of a push button D Error relay If this function is activated then the arming disarming of the device is completed exclusively manually via the button of the CamControl software or software controlled as for example during the Event Management System of HeiTel 146 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Triggered by input Normally opened _ Normally closed A Alarm input CamControl LITE Software Guide If you want to use the Arm Disarm input function activate the Triggered by input option In the event of an alarm only a connection to the receiver is made if the transmitter is also armed Specify whether Arm Disarm input is activated when opened or closed i e switched to ground by selecting Normally opened or Normally closed Normally opened X s Normally opened If you deactivate the options Triggered by input and Triggered manually or by software the status of the Arm Disarm input is ignored and your device reports every alarm regardless of the status of this input It
323. m message the email function automatically generates a subject line which is structured as follows Send email in case of alarm Subject Transmitter name or Serial number reason for alarm Camera name if present Date and Time Example of a possible subject line CamDisc VG 10 1 control input 01 Camera 1 2007 06 08 11 18 42 Body of email The body of the email is prepared in fuller detail and contains where necessary the optional supplementary text or link and or the alarm image Alarm message location transmitter location http 192 168 31 170 Unit CamDisc VG 10 1 CV547015 Reason control input 01 Camera 1 Date 2007 06 08 11 18 42 All messages within the body of the email that have been generated automatically by the email function contain text information only in English Alarm image The file name for the alarm image always consists of the date and time without separator and has the file extension jpg for the image format JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group File name of the alarm image referred to in the sample alarm message 20070608111842 4pg Send email in case of picture warning threshold reached Subject Transmitter name or Serial number reason for alarm Camera Camera name if present Date and Time Example of a possible subject line CamDisc VG 10 1 warning threshold continuous recording reached camera 01 Camera 1 2008 12 02 15 24 01 Body of email The body of the email is
324. m of 5 polygon areas can be drawn These areas can overlap Note The mask will hide image zones not ground zones It should not cover the upper part of the intruders body anywhere inside the detection zone Click on the New Mask button To draw a mask area click the left mouse button each time you want to make an angle Right click to complete the input If required a last line is added automatically to complete the polygon You can easily change the form of the polygon by clicking one of the line end points angles or on a handle of a line and dragging it to a new position You can also add a line by deleting one of the lines and automatically start drawing from the last line end point To delete a mask zone select it and click the Clear selected button Clear all will delete all mask and detection zones defined for the camera 7 27 4 Detection zones Detection zones define the regions on the ground where objects are detected as valid i e where intruders shall trigger an alarm The detection area is like a carpet spanning the area where intruders entering that area are to be detected Since only the bottoms of the targets i e feet of persons are tracked the detection area does not need to extend up the sides of buildings or fences but only the ground surface The lowest edge of the detection zone should cover the lowest part of the intruder If the detection zone includes the front part of the scene the detection zone should also cover th
325. mage every 0 4 seconds HDD t POS ATM IBIS Frames per second 2 50 Audio Track settings Average image size 4 46 kB PF Manual input Video 1 in A Estimated recording period 1 week s 4 day s 9 minute s Video 4 in E Video 5 in Video 6 in Video 7 in Video 8 in Video 9 in Video 10 in z OK Cancel Site archive state Help Record image every This field defines the recording interval seconds Specify how often every x seconds you want an image to be recorded Images per second The value in this field indicates the recording speed resulting from your interval setting Average image size The average image size is the basis for calculating the estimated recording interval Please ensure that the average image size in each case is an instant average of recent live images if need be only the average of the conditional refresh images is displayed Under certain circumstances higher space requirements per image must be assumed necessitated by significant image changes If the option Manual Input is enabled you can set the expected image size in the range of 2 to 300 KB using the toggle switch The estimated recording interval changes depending on the image size assumed Estimated recording Possible recording time is calculated automatically from your settings for period recording interval track size and track partition size for continuous recording see Track settings on page 175 a
326. me Sensitivity The video motion detection works with three different levels of sensitivity Low Middle and High Extended video motion detection The History and Brightness compensation functions are mutually exclusive and cannot be enabled at the same time History The History function eliminates short term changes in the image You can select a number of images Off 1 image to 4 images in which changes must be detected successively at intervals of 40 ms in order for the video motion detection to be triggered Brightness compensation The Brightness compensation function eliminates global changes in the image Global changes are changes that occur in more than about 40 percent of the selected image areas compare Motion detection zones These global changes may occur due to major changes in light conditions such as the movement of cast shadows or light reflected or diffused off large surfaces For the Brightness compensation a Blocking time must also be set 0 5 s to 5 0 s at 0 5 s intervals This Blocking time defines the time interval from the suppression of a global change until a true alarm can next be detected 26936_02 141 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Note High values for the Blocking time may reduce the rate of false alarms that are triggered by camera switching changes in light cast shadows or similar However true alarms will not be detected during the Blocking ti
327. me 7 8 Motion detection zones The digital image transmission systems have one integrated motion detector per camera input The integrated motion detection is not designed for outdoor recordings and should therefore be reserved for indoor cameras The Motion detection zones tab allows you to limit motion detection to certain areas of the video image When defining motion detection zones you can limit the detection area to specific areas of the overall image If on the other hand you want to monitor the entire image for movements then deselect Enabled for the camera in question This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Changes to settings in this window affect the following alarm scenarios e Alarm Motion alarm active e CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile CamServer Motion triggered event e CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile CamServer Continuous recording in the event of motion Recorder settings x Motion settings Motion detection zones Device User n Camera name Enabled Detection zones Date amp Time E Connections Camera settings 1 Camera 1 M Adjust zones Camera groups E Motion r Rea Motion settings 2 Camera 2 eee Motion detection zones Privacy zones 3 Camera 3 E Adus zont E Alarms Site archive Audio 4 Camera 4 Vv Adjust zones Relays i PTZ cont
328. me E Connections J Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP Enteral Modem IP address 132 fies far fio Internal ISDN TA Mode Phone amp IP numbers Subnet Mask fess fas fess fo Live video settings E Mail Gateway 192 168 31 1 HT connect Camera settings Camera groups Port 3000 Motion detection zones 2 a Privacy zones r E Alarms ot j a DNS Server 1 DO e e B Rel Bio ciel DNS Server 2 1 2 oK 4 tain DNS server address automatically ne Maxi t at Maximum transmission speed gt 400 KB s 3 13 MBit s Haemus 9 MBit s IV Web Server Automatic disconnect after 10 min he Port 80 a IV Web API JV LAN auto detection support Information field with details of the maximum transmission speed of the network interface and the MAC address 26936_02 121 CamControl LITE Software Guide 122 Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP IP address Subnet mask HeiTel by Xtralis With the function Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP the transmitter receives the option of obtaining an IP address dynamically from a DHCP server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Within the network where the configured transmitter is used the respective service must be available By activating this function the settings for IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway are deactivated and displayed in grey To have changes of this option become effective you must confirm twice by
329. me Parking area PTZ ipg Files of type JPEG file jpg Bitmap file bmp z __Cancel_ Note You should always use images that are located on a local hard drive if possible as loading images over a network can sometimes impair image transmission significantly 26936_02 93 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Modify Clicking Open opens the Edit image name dialogue box Image name Parking area PTZ Camera is Se SB Bw ww Bo Ow ww cmn This dialogue box also opens when you select an existing reference image in the Transmitter data dialogue box and click Modify You can change the name of the image the file name is suggested automatically and assign it to one of the cameras from 1 to 10 If you select none for the camera this image is not displayed as a camera hint during an active connection It will only be shown as an object reference image for the transmitter in the transmitter list If you wish to remove a reference image from the list in the Transmitter data dialogue box select the desired image and click Delete The image will then be removed from the image list and will no longer be available as a camera hint during an active connection Showing camera hints Buildg left side S a UESN Eror relay Device armed gt i A lt F1 gt for help During an active connection you can have reference images that have been assigned to individual cameras
330. mera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Quadscreen Ten Group 1 Site Archive Setup Relay 1 Relay 2 CIO Adapter Relays Presets Original Hang up If appropriate for video systems with an installed Audio Card the context menu for the Zoom window contains the Toggle to speaking S or Toggle to listening L options for switching to the speaking S and listening L audio functions If a CIO Adapter is connected to the video system you can also toggle the eight CIO Adapter Relays using the context menu 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide The Presets are also offered as an additional option if necessary The suboptions within this menu reflect the button panel of an R01 file stored for the transmitter and camera see List box and button panel for PTZ control on page 57 Camera groups For the SVR devices CamDisc HNVR and Cam4mobile you can define up to five camera groups each with between a minimum of two anda maximum of nine cameras for transmitters with ten camera control inputs For transmitters with four camera control inputs you can define up to two groups that group two or three cameras for one view Camera groups are defined in Recorder settings see Camera groups on page 139 Left mouse button You can also change the viewing mode by clicking one of the image windows This allows you to toggle
331. might be necessary after having run the driver installation manually Driver installation in Windows XP Please install the USB driver as follows Step 1 Before you connect one of the appropriate HeiTel devices with a USB interface of your receiver PC please install CamControl LITE PRO software version 3 74 or higher Step 2 Switch on your HeiTel device and connect the USB cable to the corresponding USB socket on the front of the device Next connect the other end of the USB cable with a corresponding socket on your receiver PC only after you have switched the PC on As soon as your device is ready the hardware assistant automatically displays a welcome dialogue 26936_02 279 CamControl LITE Software Guide Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device Click Next to continue lt Back Cancel Select the option No not this time and confirm the selection with Next gt Step 3 HeiTel by Xtralis In the following dialogue screen select the option Install from a list or specific location Advanced Confirm your selection with N
332. mmand 1 ATEQV18D28C1S0 0 41FC 2 2 ws Initialisation command 2 Cancel Reset Adapter every 30 min v 7 With recording pause Site archive state Sanae e Internal GPS Help MTU 1500 MRU 1500 m PIN The PIN Personal Identification Number is required depending on the programming of the SIM Subscriber Identity Module card This setting depends on the provider maximum 38 characters This setting depends on the provider maximum 38 characters APN The APN Access Point Name access data should normally be in the following order 1 IP lt PROVIDER APN gt Example data for German providers e Vodafone 1 IP web vodafone de e T Mobile 1 1P internet t d1 de or 1 IP internet t mobile e E Plus 1 IP internet eplus de e 02 1 IP surfo2 Dial in number The standard dial in number for Internet connections via 3G UMTS or GPRS is 99 Depending on the mobile telephone provider it may be necessary to enter 99 1 or 99 1 as dial in number Note The parameters listed here will often need to be configured with different data depending on the provider For example in the case of access data User name and Password there are providers by which these entries can remain empty whereas others require a definite or indefinite entry Always contact your mobile phone provider with regard to current access data 126 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Initialisation command 1 The
333. motion detection Motion Motion Motion Motion The integrated software motion detector can be set to three levels of sensitivity Select Motion for maximum sensitivity and Motion for minimum sensitivity The image is then checked for movement every 300 ms An event is triggered when the device detects motion in the video image or in the defined motion zones Select Off from the drop down list to switch off the motion detector for triggering Note You can limit motion detection by defining detection zones see Motion detection zones on page 142 This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Trigger via serial command If Trigger via serial command is active select On an event is triggered by a serial command from an external device sent via the serial interface of the transmitter Off deactivates event triggering via the serial channel The functions in this menu appear in grey because the function is activated or deactivated across the board for all cameras with the serial channel setting see Serial channel on page 196 Every event is associated with a subsequent and variable alarm duration during which a defined number of images are recorded If Retrigger at is not selected a new alarm event occurring at the same camera input during an existing alarm would not be considered To prevent this select the option and enter a
334. mples SHOWMAPCTRL 1 control elements shown SHOWMAPCTRL 0 control elements hidden 268 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 8 7 Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series CamDisc SVR as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile or CamServer logs the most important device states and events in a logfile with a capacity of up to 1 000 entries The oldest entries are automatically overwritten on a FIFO first in first out basis The file is stored on the removable hard disk It can by displayed by CamControl LITE software during an active connection or by CamControl PLAYER software in offline mode Certain logfile entries are system entries and beyond the control of the user Other messages are optional and must be specified in the device settings of CamControl LITE under Recorder settings Extras These messages are identified with Yes in the Optional column of the following table Critical messages are indirectly connected to the error relay and identified with Yes in the Error relay column Logfile entries The logfile entry column contains the messages in plain text and depending on the message additional information identified by square brackets in the table The additional date and time information applies to all entries Each logfile entry therefore starts with D amp T Letters e g x have been used for all other pieces of additional information and are explaine
335. n dialling this group for the first time this list of cameras is still incomplete First only the camera names of the dialled transmitters here Demo Kiel CamDisc SVR IP PTZ are displayed In order to dial another transmitter of this group please double click on the respective transmitter name here Demo Kiel CamTel SVR IP After a successful change the list is supplemented by the camera name of the transmitter To have a complete camera list after creating a new group all subordinated transmitters should initially be dialled once Note A complete camera list is also necessary for the smooth function of the grouping in the event of an alarm see Important information about the camera window on page 98 View modes of the camera list Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP Dome Camera Kiel Static Camera Kiel The title page of the window will always inform you of the name of the currently dialled transmitter A colour change between light grey and dark grey within the camera list will group the cameras by transmitters in the respective order In the alphabetical list of cameras the names are listed in light grey throughout A change between the two view modes is achieved by way of a left click in the camera list 26936 _02 97 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Camera change via camera list Demo Kiel CamDisc syr IP PTZ i Static Camera Kiel Test pattern Within the camera list you will switch to the respective c
336. n page 173 Since the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series is equipped as standard with an integrated audio function these devices offer you the following functions e Connect the required peripheral devices microphone loudspeaker correctly to your unit Refer to the product guide for more information e All required peripheral devices must be installed correctly on the receiver side as well Suitable microphone s loudspeakers sound card compatible with Soundblaster xi Audio Device User Date amp Time T Connections Audio 3 02 Camera settings Camera groups IV Listening Motion detection zones C Microphone Privacy zones Alarms Line E Site archive IV Speaking Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out Extras Upload Download Firmware update OK Cancel Site archive state Help Audio Card with Speex Codec Audio V3 xx or Audio V4 xx The current Audio Card uses a Speex Codec You can identify the model from the version number Audio V3 xx CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices also use a Speex Codec for the integrated audio function The version number Audio V4 xx is displayed Listening Select this option if you want to listen in on the monitored object from your receiver PC e Select the input according to the connected signal source on the HeiTel transmitter choosing between the options Microphone and Line e Ensure that your signal source has been connec
337. n page 209 is handled first Alarm call in case of defective hard disk Hard Disk of Recorder defective Do not report again Report again N If this option is selected the telephone number or IP address saved in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 is dialled if there are problems with the hard disk The receiver must confirm the message after a connection has been established If appropriate action has already been taken to check your CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer on site or you do not want to receive any further hard disk malfunction messages for another reason click Do not report again The error message will only appear again after you switch the device off and on again If you cannot take appropriate action to check your device on site right now or if you want to deal with the message at a later point in time click Report again The message will be displayed again after 6 minutes or your device will be dialled again if the connection has been closed in the meantime The call is saved in the event list See Event list on page 20 26936_02 209 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Routine call every 24 hours Extra Use without hard disk drive Hang up and redial on alarm 210 If this option is selected the telephone number or IP address saved under Phone amp IP numbers
338. nd This command is used for R16 adapter relays configured as momentaries Variables for global control elements Global control elements Light on Regardless of the camera selected these relevant control elements are shown to the right of the relay buttons of devices Up to 99 different functions can be controlled with the global control elements You can make the relevant entries for the list box and then have their corresponding commands activated deactivated with the button While the previous control elements are used on a camera specific basis the following variables apply to the section GRELAY NUMBER Number of entries in the list box range 1 to 99 RTx List text button label maximum 12 characters CMDONx Command sent when button is activated CMDOFFx Command sent when button is deactivated 26936_02 265 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Variables to rename the relay of the CIO Adapter Global relay control of CIO Adapters Irrespective of the camera selected the relay buttons of the CIO adapter are displayed as global control elements to the right of the device relay button see Variables for global control elements on page 265 Transmitter specific renaming of relays Relays of the CIO adapter can be renamed by entering a new description While other control elements are used on a camera specific basis the following variables are applicable only to the section CIO_GRELAY
339. nd see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 Note The calculated value is an estimate Actual recording time may deviate from this value 7 11 11 2 Advanced configuration Deselect Use easy mode to configure continuous recording in enhanced mode 186 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Recorder settings z x Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Use easy mode W E Alarms B Site archive Video settings Contact status Closed Opening Edge Open Closing Edge on Rec method trigger Off X fort x Permanent x Off z H POS ATM Recording intervall s 1 0 2 1 Audio od Track settings Number of images 1 10 1 10 E Video 1 in Event recording 1 Record Don t record Cancel Site archive state Help Note If the Event recording always enabled function is used see Combined continuous and event recording on page 177 the extended configuration of the continuous recording can only be set toa limited degree A control input is assigned to each connected camera i e each video input This control input controls image recording in detail It can assume two states and can therefore report two changes This results in the
340. nd CamDisc SVR 10s on page 283 Please note the requirements for the use of USB connections with VideoGateways see Installing the USB driver for the VG series on page 284 The transmitter data USB direct connection cannot be edited as regards its name and IP address including port If you wish to set a USB connection to a transmitter which is not to be addressed via the standard port 3000 for IP connections to HeiTel video systems supplement the transmitter index by an additional entry see Adding changing or deleting transmitter entries on page 90 The IP address for the USB connection via port 3011 to the transmitter for instance is 192 168 138 95 3011 You can adjust the IP port according to your transmitter s requirements Device grouping E gly Demonstration Kiel IP FH Demo Kiel CamDise svr IP PTZ O Demo Kiel CamTel svr IP By grouping the devices or cascading you receive the option of combining several HeiTel devices into one group within the list of transmitters see Device grouping cascading on page 95 This grouping is meaningful for example if several devices are used for video monitoring of an object and these present to the user practically one functional unit 6 9 1 Dialling into a transmitter Select the transmitter you want to connect to from the transmitter list in the Transmitter index dialogue box yf Clicking Dial y initiates a call to the selected transmitter Double clicking th
341. nd the correct time zone has not been set see Date and time on page 118 If time synchronisation is activated and the time zone is not configured correctly the archive may contain conflicting date and time information when it is accessed by multiple PCs in different time zones 207 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 4 8 Program window SCREEN Window always on top ALWAYSONTOP 1 Program window always on top e Range 0 off default 1 on e You can configure the receiver software so that the program window is always on top and cannot be covered by other programs Only windows with the same attribute are not covered e g button panels for the Remote Adapter Window size WIDTH 800 Specify the size of the program window e Range Window size resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels 1280 1024 x 768 pixels 1024 800 x 600 pixels 800 640 x 480 pixels je40 e The size of the receiver software program window is automatically set to the maximum size allowed by the screen resolution of the PC during installation You can specify a different window size at any time e If program window size is defined solely by the width values listed in the table the program window is displayed in 4 3 format Window position XPOS 0 Horizontal positioning of the program window YPOS 0 Vertical positioning of the program window e XPOS This entry lets you define a horizontal displacement of the application e YPOS
342. nder Recorder settings Extras Extra see Extra on page 210 that a open connection dialled by a receiver be automatically disconnected in the event of an alarm and a renewed alarm call made To do this select Hang up and redial on alarm If you do not want this automatic disconnection to take place for special receiver PCs e g PCs in a security centre you can deactivate automatic disconnection specifically for these computers using this key Note The AUTODISCONNECT key only takes effect when it is actually possible to automatically disconnect and place a new alarm call Callback connections hard disk errors 24h routine calls and alarm calls are not disconnected This function is never executed for null modem connections and therefore has no effect on this type of connection 250 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Configuration reference images Size and display during REFIMAGEWIDTH 200 Initial reference image width of reference images REFIMAGEHEIGHT 180 Initial reference image height REFIMAGETIME 4 Reference image display time e Values Key Default value Unit e Specifying a value of 1 for initial width and height means that a reference image will be displayed with a minimum output width of 149 pixels and a height scaled in line with the original image During an active connection you can have reference images which have been assigned to individual cameras shown as camera hints
343. nel see List box and button panel for PTZ control on page 57 16 presets Up to 16 presets are supported in total if the joystick used also provides this number of different buttons 4 8 1 3 Classic PTZ control The classic PTZ control is activated by right clicking once in the full format Mainscreen or Zoom display This option is recommended particularly for low bandwidth connections Due to the transmission of the live images in low resolution this allows for a higher refresh rate The lower latency interval between the control action and the transmission of the live image as response means that reproduction of the PTZ control is facilitated even at low bandwidth fluid 26936_02 55 CamControl LITE Software Guide Tour 7 Dome Menu Site Archive mp Log file Camera 2 Preset 1 Preset 3 Colour Mono Light Camera 2 HeiTel by Xtralis Camera 4 ee e a e ad ae lt Fi gt forhelp PTZ control If the active transmitter has a PTZ camera select the camera in question by clicking the relevant Camera button Right click the video image in mainscreen or fullscreen viewing mode to open a dialogue box to control the camera s PTZ functions The changes are shown in the preview screen of this window Click the arrow buttons to control the panning and tilting functions The Z and Z buttons allow you to control the zoom function while the
344. ng data using selected examples 8 8 1 Analogue dial up modem Creatix V 90 The Creatix V 90 modem is an external adapter for analogue dial up It can be used on the side of both the receiver PC and the digital image transmission system It is connected via the serial interface in both cases Receiver side configuration Initialisation for transmitter AT amp FE0X3S0 0 Init strings Initialisation for transmitters in private AT amp FXSEOX3S0 0 branch exchanges Baud rate 115200 baud Dialling string ATD Receiver side configuration Init strings Initialisation for receiver PC AT amp FE1V1S0 0 274 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Initialisation for receiver PC in private AT amp FE1V1X3S0 0 branch exchanges Baud rate 115200 baud Dialling string ATD Special settings Pulse dial The modem can be preset to the European setting CTR21 Pulse dialling is not possible with this setting If the exchange does not accept tone dialling in rare cases e g old telecom systems switch to pulse dialling In this case the German setting DEU 49 is necessary Tone dialling is still supported e Switch to DEU 49 AT NC3 amp F amp WEWE1 e Switch to CTR21 AT NC9 amp F amp WEWE1 e Query current setting ATI6 e Tone or pulse dialling dial string ATDT or ATDP 8 8 2 ISDN TA Stollmann TA PPX The ISDN TA PPX successor of TA PP2 TA PPP is a reasonably priced external ISD
345. ngs ATdan 1 x Camera settings I Pulse dial Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones Alarms Initialisation prefix fatewiso0 ss lt SS E Site archive Audio Dial prefix ar D Relays PTZ control Last caller Cancel Site archive state Help Baud rate Select a suitable transmission speed for the transmitter s serial interface from the Baud rate drop down list You can select 115200 Baud in most cases You may have to select a different rate for some analogue modems for example If you are using channel bundling with ISDN operation you should set 230400 Baud as the interface speed Select this option for tone dialling Pulse dial Select this option for pulse dialling Number of rings Number of rings allows you to determine the number of rings before the transmitter replies and initiates a connection Initialisation You can enter an AT command for initialising your modem ISDN TA in the Initialisation prefix box Dial prefix Enter the dial command in the Dial prefix box ATD is sufficient in most cases In rare instances more advanced modem ISDN TA control may be required Last caller If your modem ISDN TA supports storing recent callers you may enter the appropriate AT command in this box 128 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide General information on modem configuration e The modem ISDN TA must be set to RTS CTS flow control hardware handshake e
346. nly on page 221 and the eight relays see ClO Adapter relays as global switching elements on page 59 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs 26936_02 In addition to giving an alarm for external camera control inputs or motion detection under the specified conditions a combination of camera alarm inputs or inputs to the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter and to the internal motion detection can result For more information on this topic please refer to the section Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs on page 152 Recorder settings Cl Adapter ee Device User Date amp Time if Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones Privacy zones cE Alarms i Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Video out cel EMA Extras Upload Download Firmware update CI Adapter IP Camera OK Cancel Site archive state Help Camera Preset Enty timefLink ofr ort ot Dt Dtf ot otf ot orf ofr ott ot Ott ot ot o ot ot Ot otf ot 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 otf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OFF Normally opene Zl ot Ott Dtf Of otf OFF 10s 10s 10s 10s 10s 10s 10s 10s ot oft ofr oft OFF ofr OFF off off ott oft ott off ofr or
347. nt picture or click the Print picture toolbar button to print the current image to the preset printer In addition to the image every printout contains other useful information such as program name program version transmitter name name and path of the archive file printing date camera number camera name as well as the time and date of image recording x Options JV Add user information max 5 lines Information Entrance area September 4th 2005 06 17 55 Security firm disarms alarm system Configure Add on screen information Print Cancel CamControl LITE allows you to add more information in the Print options dialogue box that subsequently opens Add on screen information includes camera name number and transmitter name serial number on the image to be printed You can also include up five lines of additional text on the image printout by selecting Add user information in the Printer options dialogue box Clipboard Select Picture Copy to clipboard or click the Copy picture to clipboard toolbar button if you want to copy and paste the current individual image into another program If you want to check the authenticity of the image later the archive image must be saved as an image file with the archive access software Checking individual images for authenticity Authenticity check for individual images When you save individual images with CamControl LITE CamControl PRO or CamControl PLAYER a checksum is included
348. ntered is transferred to the Web browser as shown in the following examples e http 192 168 31 223 e http ipcam01 your_domain com Note An IP camera can only be configured via the Web browser if it can be reached directly from the receiver PC If only the HeiTel device can be reached directly and if the IP camera is located in a local network that this device can reach access from the receiver PC via a Web browser is not possible If the receiver PC is also located in this local network access to the IP camera is also generally possible via the Web browser Click OK to save the User name and Password in the HeiTel device If you have additionally selected a Number of Presets for an IP camera a transmitter specific R01 file is written or added to in the RMCTRL directory of your CamControl LITE software It is possible to rename the button panel command buttons by modifying the corresponding R01 file see Function and structure of R01 files on page 262 The dialogue box is then closed In certain circumstances it is necessary to disconnect and reconnect to the HeiTel video system in order for the camera specific button panel for controlling the presets to be displayed for you Limited image size As of software version 3 82 and device firmware 1 74 camera resolutions of up to 2560 x 1600 Pixel i e 4 megapixel are supported Depending on the type of device the image transferred by the IP camera in each case must not exceed
349. nterface is not available is being used by another application or does not support the specified Baud rate a corresponding error message will be displayed after you close the Receiver options dialogue box by clicking OK see Dial up connection with modem or external ISDN TA quick start on page 12 Since special serial data transmission equipment is shown on COM ports higher than COM9 COM interfaces from COM1 to COM99 can be selected in the drop down menu Port Baud Baud 115200 From the Baud drop down list select an appropriate transmission speed for the connection between the PC and the modem ISDN TA or between the PC and the transmitter connected directly via null modem cable In general you can select 115 200 Baud for all connections Some exceptions may require a different selection e Adirectly connected transmitter uses a different transmission speed e ISDN operation with channel bundling should take place at 230 400 Baud if your PC has a serial interface that supports this Baud rate Use a suitable ISDN TA if necessary 82 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Init prefix Modem ISDN TA initialisation In the Init prefix box you can enter an AT command to initialise your modem ISDN TA The modem ISDN TA is reset and initialised with this command on program start after the receiver settings have been changed and every time after an active connection has been established receiver call
350. ntrol LITE CamTel INI C CamControl LITE TELEDATA DAT or C CamControl LITE TELEFON INI C CamControl LITE FIRMA TXT C CamControl LITEXROUNDS32 RDS C CamControl LITE SERVICE INF C CamControl LITE ONSCREENINFO CFG masking position and font type of camera and transmitter name while printing or saving picture C CamControl LITE CTPOSWIN INI C CamControl LITE FAVOURITES INF C CamControl LITEXCOMPRESSOR CFG C CamControl LITE RMCTRL Y Zxxxxxx R01 various files for controlling P T heads PTZ systems relay modules or similar C CamControl LITE TRINFOS YZxxxxxxx INF C CamControl LITE DEVICEUPDATES BIN C CamControl LITE HELPFILES contains software guides where applicable and the file HLPINDEX INI C CamControl LITE Drivers contains device drivers where applicable 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Receiver archive C CamControl LITE CAMARC CTW different file name with CTW ending also possible The program path C CamControl LITE is the default setting You can change it as you wish during software installation so it could be different for your application Transfer of the transmitter list TELEFON INI The additional storage of Username and Password as part of the transmitter data see Username amp Password on page 92 requires a different saving of these data If these data were formerly saved in TELEFON INI they are saved now in TELEDATA DAT Note The TELEDATA
351. ntrol panel The last call recorded is automatically loaded and the oldest image of this call is displayed Alternatively you can access the archive by double clicking an entry in the event list see Event list on page 20 26936_02 63 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 5 1 2 Image search controls File Picture Selection Call View Tools Info AE 3 B B o gt e a aA DB Ba Oe gt Ey feiatcemees 5 7 09 2005 09 48 14 1 Status bar The status bar contains the following information from left to right e The number of the current call and the number of all the connections saved in the archive e The reason for connection in the case of alarm calls alarm and tours tour e The camera number and camera name e The current image number and the total number of images saved in this call e Date e Time Images from the transmitter archive Pic 11251 22548 Video images that come from the Site archive or a transmitter s pre alarm are identified with the word Archive and the image number assigned in the transmitter archive both of which appear in yellow on a black background in the time and date fields Search controls You can control archive access with the buttons located above the status bar You also have the functions in the Picture menu eo First oldest picture of the call e Play backwards Next picture Play
352. nts he transaction data dialogue box has the following control elements First oldest sales receipt Next receipt Last most recent receipt CamControl LITE provides you with two ways of accessing recorded transaction data The Transaction data of camera X dialogue box where X stands for the camera track in question and varies between 1 and 2 1 and 4 or 1 and 10 depending on the video system being used has two search modes Date amp time search and the Text amp price search 26936_02 39 CamControl LITE Software Guide 40 Simple Date amp time search Transaction data of camera 1 x Transaction data Date amp time GE 22 12 05 16 51 Order 0080 22 12 2005 1 Operator 02 2241242005 1 Cake 1 79 2241242005 1 Mars 0 99 22 12 2005 1 Coffee 3 49 22 12 2005 11 Candles 3 99 2241242005 1 Water 11 59 22 12 2005 1 Candles 3 99 2241242005 1 Chief armchair 5000 00 22 12 2005 1 Chief armchair 5000 00 22 12 2005 1 Cucumbers 0 79 22 12 2005 1 Screws 14 95 el Ho 0080o Text amp price search Date amp time search Date 22 12 2005 z Time 16 50 50 Syncronizatiorr Update picture from receipt C Update receipt from picture Enter the Date of the search start or select it using the calendar function You can enter the Time of the search start in hours minutes and seconds using the buttons next to the time input box or using the keyboard Click Search to start the search The first sales receipt
353. nts for the various remote options depending on the model you have see PTZ control and remote adapter on page 53 These camera specific control elements include A camera control system Single or double list boxes indexed A double list box A button panel Combinations of these options You can also define global control elements R01 file sections Camera specific and global control elements are assigned within the relevant R01 file in sections These are identified with square brackets Sections with camera specific definitions CAM1 Camera 1 section iz Variable definition if camera 1 is active CAM2 Camera 2 section on Variable definition if camera 2 is active CAM3 Camera 3 section fs Variable definition if camera 3 is active CAM4 Camera 4 section sat Variable definition if camera 4 is active CAM5 Camera 5 section ee Variable definition if camera 5 is active CAM6 Camera 6 section oe Variable definition if camera 6 is active CAM7 Camera 7 section T Variable definition if camera 7 is active CAM8 Camera 8 section ahs Variable definition if camera 8 is active CAM9 Camera 9 section ty Variable definition if camera 9 is active CAM10 Camera 10 section Variable definition if camera 10 is active 262 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Auto signalling camera switching section CAMINPUTS Automatic signalling camera switchin
354. o avoid managing irrelevant image data 7 11 10 Event recording 1 2 4 10 Open the Event recording 1 2 4 10 tab from the menu under the Site Archive node or from the Video 1 2 4 10 in tab These menu items are only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer series devices You can modify the settings for each camera track individually provided a partition for this recording mode has been created for the track in question see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 Recording is only possible if times for event recording have been defined in the timer for the track in question see Timer operation on page 178 Event trigger and Event size can be modified 180 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Recorder settings CamServer 2 Relay evel Video 1 in Event recording 1 Continuous recording 1 Device a User Event trigger Date amp Time E Connections X A r 9 7 viv Camera settings Trigger via contact Trigger via motion detection Trigger via serial command E Motion Normally closed Off X Off Privacy zones E Alarms i Ets E Site archive a Retrigger at is a Video settings Passwords HDD Event size POS ATM IBIS Audio posred number of Prosla Alam Track settings ENERE Video 1 in 5000 Duration s 5 15 ideo 2i J a m Possible number Interval s 1 0 a i 2 of events eiays Speed fps 1
355. o be called during the currently selected tour If you don t want a transmitter to be in the tour anymore then select it in this list and then click Delete 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Transmitter specific tours The following fields are configured separately for each transmitter in a tour In such a way you can receive a different number of live images from different cameras from various transmitters Time limit of Inthe Time limit of connection box enter the maximum duration of the connection connection 0 999 minutes for the selected transmitter list above the Delete button When this period of time has passed the connection is closed immediately Maximum The maximum connection duration that you specify for the corresponding connection duration connection channel also applies to tours and automatically processed alarms see Maximum connection duration on page 83 Alternatively this setting can be defined using the configuration file CamTel INI see Maximum connection duration on page 249 Camera 1 10 In these boxes you can specify the number of video images that you want to receive from each camera In such a way you can weight the cameras differently Example in the In the configuration illustrated the Building transmitter is one of the dialogue box transmitters in Tour 001 Tour 001 is carried out on Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday and Friday starting at 11 55 When
356. o decoder has been checked at start no y error up This message indicates a faulty video decoder at video input x Connection messages D amp T Alarmcall failed Alarm connection to receiver with telephone no x AR y number IP address indicated in filed x could not be established Field y indicates the alarm reason AR Possible values for y General nonspecific alarm Control input camera 1 10 Sabotage alarm general alarm input Sabotage alarm enable disable status input Sabotage alarm sabotage status input General alarm 17 Panic alarm Tamper 24 Device reboot Power on 25 Motion alarm camera 1 10 31 40 Video loss camera 1 10 41 50 Alarm released by serial 51 60 command camera 1 10 Fault interruption in dedicated 62 line HTconnect Camera position authentication 71 80 camera 1 10 Alarm panel triggered alarm 81 90 camera 1 10 Tamper alarm camera 1 10 111 120 D amp T Caller x y Caller indicates the login order of the last login yes n O one 1 two etc Field x and field y indicates telephone number IP address This entry is not generated for null modem connections 26936_02 271 es no oO CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis D amp T Service Call x The device triggered a service call to the no no telephone number IP Address in field x The user indicated in field u established a temperature no connection to t
357. o recording You can choose from the following types of recording Record all time In this mode audio data are recorded permanently Recording only while In this mode audio data are only recorded when images are also being image recording saved for the selected camera This ensures that in the case of event or timer controlled image recordings for example only the relevant audio data can be saved In such a way recording capacity is optimised Storage procedure Audio data are saved on a FIFO basis first in first out in both operating modes Once the maximum storage capacity has been reached the oldest recordings are replaced by the newest The Recording duration and Audio recording areas are disabled for devices without an Audio Card so the corresponding configuration options are not available Audio recording commands Delete audio track Similarly to the commands for deleting individual camera tracks see Delete track 1 2 4 10 on page 163 you can also delete audio track data Confirm the changes made to the audio recording parameters by clicking OK Then click OK again to send them to your device 174 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 11 8 Track settings Open the Track settings tab from the menu under the Site archive tab This menu item is only available for CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer series dev
358. o settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Camera settings a Camera groups HDD E Motion Privacy zones Type WDC WD1601ABYS 01C040 E Alarms Total Size 153 39 GB E Site archive Video settings E Passwords HDD Delete Track 1 Delete Track amp E POS ATMABIS j T Delete Track 2 Delte Track 7 RUO Tm Delete Track 3 7 Delete Track 8 Track settings Video 1 in J Delete Track 4 Delete Track 9 E Video 2 in 7 Delete Track 5 T Delete Track 10 E Video 3 in E Video 4 in 7 Delete all images and passwords Video 5 in EF Video 6 in Format HDD H Video 7 in E Video 8 in E Video 9 in E Video 10 in X Boot mode Vv OK HDD safe power down functions Cancel Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched Seade ciate immediately vj EA Normally opened EA Help JT Stop writing to HDD when V out was switched for 10 s restart after 3 minutes or power off General information This field displays the name of your hard disk Total Size This field displays the size of your hard disk drive in GB Please note that this value is calculated using the binary system 1 KB 1024 Byte 1 MB 1024 1024 Byte 1 GB 1024 1024 1024 Byte Hard disk manufacturers often specify size using the decimal system conversion factor of 1000 instead of 1024 so in some cases the displayed storage capacity may be lower than specified by the manufacturer Hard disk configuration commands Save Recorder Settings x
359. odem Status Initialise modem If you are using modems or ISDN TAs to transmit images these are initialised one after the other on program start The AT command entered in the Init prefix field in the Receiver options Port A is used see Port A on page 80 This procedure is shown in the corresponding dialogue box If errors occur the dialogue box remains visible for an extended period of time and displays the error message of the terminal device 4 3 The Program Interface Heile Hang up F View Setup Site Archive Log file Audio tracks Main Entrance __swecnirance AXIS 35 96 Test 1 AXIS 35 97 Testt 2 AXIS 35 98 Test 3 AXIS 35 99 Test 4 Ero eo E A A lt Fi gt for help 625Ke Gay i 17720576 4 3 1 Overview of basic functions Window title bar The window title bar contains the program name CamControl LITE and the version number The name of the transmitter currently connected and displayed is indicated in square brackets If the transmitter has not been given a name its serial number appears here see Device on page 114 Status bar The status bar provides some information on current image transmission The fields have the following meanings from left to right e F1 help e Reason for connection 16 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Online Alarm Alarm call triggered by the alarm input Online Alarm camera name A
360. odify the file with a text editor Double click the file in the folder window or in Windows Explorer to open it with the editor that is associated with INI files in your Windows system e Close the receiver software if open e Open the CamTel INI file e Find the section containing the key you wish to change If the section is not present you must create it Note All keys must be in the section to which they are assigned If a key is not in the correct section it will not be recognised by the software and the setting will not take effect Find the key you wish to change If the key is not present you must create it Enter the desired value Repeat the steps indicated above for all other keys that you wish to change Once you have made all of the necessary changes save the file Close the text editor e Restart the receiver software Note Once you have saved the configuration file CamTel INI you must restart the receiver software for the changes to take effect 8 2 3 Overview of modifiable keys TCP IP Specify port number for TCP IP Deactivate operating mode FASTMODE Specify TCP IP port for Online PLAYER PORTA MAXONLINETIME Specify maximum connection duration NONULLMO Deactivate automatic null modem detection in Normal operating mode ARCHIV SNAPSHOTPATH Specify the directory path for saving pictures from the transmitter archive 246 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide e Description A lt
361. oftware you want to use the additional control elements from the GPS window please install the GPS Data Viewer see Installation of the GPS Data Viewer on page 292 During the installation you can choose whether to use Google Earth or OpenStreetMap to represent the position data on the map If necessary prior to usage install the following Google Earth controls GPS Live 2009 03 17 12 37 32 54 16 0586 N 010 04 3263 E amp 0 0 mph Auto 4 s Clear Show Position I Track Close Map 26936 _02 31 CamControl LITE Software Guide 32 Click Show Position to open Google Earth or OpenStreetMap and display the current position of the video system You may need to press this button twice A yellow arrow indicates the current location of the sender according to the GPS data transferred The serial number of the video system is displayed prefixed with the device name if necessary Cam4mobile MQ912091 fMoltsee ir For OpenStreetMap a green arrow indicates the current location of the sender according to the GPS data transferred In addition the serial number of the video system can be displayed prefixed with the device name if necessary including date and time by clicking with the mouse on the position indicator Cam4mobile MQ912091 GPS Live 2011 11 02 10 06 40 Map by OpenStreetMap If you enable the Auto option every new position is automatically displayed in Google E
362. oftware Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This tab provides you with general information regarding audio recording and allows you to configure several parameters Recorder settings a a x Video settings Passwords HDD Track settings Audio Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Motion detection zones F Recording duration E Total period of audio recording approximately 108 days Privacy zones Audio recording E Alarms E Site archive M On Video settings Record all time Passwords gt a a HDD Recording only while image recording E POS ATM OK Audio P Camera 1 I Camera 2 Track settings Mice I Camera 4 E Video 1 in E Video 2 in I Camera 5 I Camera 6 E Video 3 in E Video 4 in I Camera 7 J Camera 8 Ervina zi T Camera 9 I Camera 10 M Command 7 Delete audio track Cancel Site archive state Help Recording duration CamDisc SVR CamDisc VG as well as CamDisc VG HNVR Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile or CamServer reserves five per cent of hard drive capacity for storing audio data Your device shows you the maximum recording duration in days calculated based on the size of the hard drive A hard drive with a storage capacity of 4TB hard drives gt 2TB only VG series produces a maximum recording period of approximately 1060 days continuous audio recording Audio recording Click On to activate audi
363. on either position a reference object near to and far from the camera or ask a person to assist with the calibration and to move from image position A to B during calibration Calibration can be carried out using the live video or a recording 7 27 2 1 Calibration using live video To calibrate using the live video and a person proceed as follows Click the Live video button to display the live video When the person is clearly visible at the close position click on Set image A and then on Height A Drag the reference line to the size of the person in the image see figure above After the person has moved to the position far from the camera click on Set image B and then on Height B Now drag the reference line to the size of the person in the image see the below figure a Unit of measure Metres X Hest ebet 19 Live video Calibration Height A ma meen Cancel To apply the calibration to the camera click on Accept The dialogue window is closed 7 27 2 2 Calibration using video recording In the Recording panel of the dialogue window the following controls are available for recording and playing back video sequences Playback Stop playback p 00 25 01 07 Position display with slider Using the mouse the slider can be dragged to the desired position Proceed as follows when calibrating using a video recording 1 Cl
364. on is automatic Selection The Recorder settings dialogue box provides you with a menu overview of all available settings on the left hand side of the window Please note that when you open a node more configuration levels will be shown e Device Firmware version serial number MAC address and device number page 114 e User Transmitter user management page 115 e Date amp Time Synchronisation of recorder time winter summer time time zone configuration and adding holidays page 118 e Connections Configuration of connections via various communications paths including HTconnect and settings for live image quality and email messaging page 121 e Camera settings Camera name and configuration page 138 e Camera groups Definition of camera groups page 139 e Motion Configuration of the motion settings and motion detection zones page 142 e Privacy zones Definition of privacy zones page 143 e Alarms Configuration of responses to alarm inputs camera signals motion detection video loss and camera position authentication page 145 e Site Archive CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer only Configuration of storage options e g recording quality and storage capacity per camera track archive password and settings for saving transaction data for POS ATM IBIS Point of Sale Automatic Teller Machine Integrated on Board Information System applications page 159 e Audio Talk and or listen page 190 e Relays
365. ontrol LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 21 Firmware update The Firmware update tab gives you the option to update the device firmware If the menu item Firmware update is not available in the selection list this may be due to one of the following causes e CamControl LITE is not at version 3 64 or later e Thereis no DEVICEUPDATES subdirectory e No corresponding firmware for the selected device type is available in the DEVICEUPDATES directory Before carrying out a firmware update you must disconnect the existing connection to the device so that any configurations previously set up and already sent to your HeiTel video system are permanently saved Current firmware The current firmware at the time of creating your CamControl LITE software is integrated into the Setup file Information about the current firmware status and links to download firmware files are available on our website at http www heitel com en service upgrades firmware After downloading save the firmware in the DEVICEUPDATES subdirectory of your CamControl LITE software This ensures that the corresponding file is available for a firmware update Fimware update Device Firmware update ser Date amp Time Connections Update file Camera settings update_156_fimware_svr bin FIRMWARE 01 56 Camera groups update_all_sv1_156 bin ALL 01 56 update_all_svr_158 bin ALL 01 58 Serial channel Extras Upload Download Firrnw ada
366. ordance with the product guide is strongly recommended Only use of the timer specific to Cam4mobile in connection with the device parameterisation described below can ensure that the HDD is put into standby mode prior to the timer controlled shutdown of the device For the internal switch off delay timer to be activated Main must be connected to the vehicle contact unswitched supply and Timer to the vehicle contact switched plus or ignition plus With this wiring see above Cam4mobile will delay switching off the device for a certain period after the vehicle ignition has been switched off The standard setting for DIP switches is a 10 minute delay before switching off If the system is programmed as follows the HDD is put into standby mode via the internal connection of Timer and Aux in2 HDD safe power down functions JV Stop writing to HDD when Aux 2 was switched Timeout 10 min x F Normally closed x J Stop writing to HDD when V out was switched for 10s restart after 3 minutes or power off To use the internal connection of Timer and Aux in2 additional parameter settings are required e Timeout Ensure that you set this value to the same value set to delay the switching off of your Cam4mobile device The standard setting for DIP switches is a 10 minute delay before switching off Therefore the timeout should also be defined as 10 minutes Contacts Due to the internal switching of Timer and Aux in2 the act
367. ording Closed while alarm Closed while alarm enabled Momentary A relay configured as a momentary changes its current state when clicked for the period specified under Closed s e g for electromagnetic door openers Closed while If you select this option the relay is switched for the duration of the connected connection It reverts to idle when the connection terminates Closed on error If you select this option the relay signals a device malfunction or failed attempt to establish a connection in the event of alarm see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 As the relay is active in idle state power failures can also be signalled 192 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Closed while recording Closed while alarm Closed while alarm enabled Relay options Closed while idle Reset offline Closed s 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide If you select this option the relay is switched for the duration of an active recording Once all active recordings have ended it reverts to idle If you select this option the relay is switched for the duration of the connection Once all active alarms have ended it reverts to idle The relay follows the alarm LED of the HeiTel video system If you select this mode of operation the relay is switched for the duration of the arming Once the device has been disarmed it reverts to idle The relay follows the armed LED of the HeiTel video system If this option is select
368. oss Camera position authentication New reference image Applicable Triggered Connect 1 Configure Yes No F On 2 Configure Yes No F On 3l Configure Yes No F On Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss 4 Configure Yes No F On Camera position authent Ee E Site archive Audio 5 L Cotowe Yes No F On Relays T gt Sz gt a PTZ control 6 Configure Yes No F On Serial channel Video out xl ul ies of 7 Configure Yes No F On 8 Configure Yes No F On Ok Ra z Cancel 3 Taime No No ron Site archive state Configure No No fall Help New reference image Camera 1 x IV Examine current image LH og Reference image 1 e g by day Reference image 2 e g by night Applicable Yes Applicable No Store Store Close Click the button Configure in the column New reference image to open a camera specific configuration dialogue for the camera position authentication If you activate the option Examine current image the live image of the selected camera is examinded every two seconds for camera position authentication applicability The applicability is shown as a percentage The indicated percentage is only an evaluation of the current scene at a given point in time The 4x2 matrix symbolises the eight detection areas of the video image According to the current analysis the individual fields of the matrix are marked in different colors in certain circumstan
369. ou do not configure a period of time for either event or continuous recording in timer mode but allocate space to these recording modes using the slider a corresponding warning will appear Within the Timer there is no period of continuous recording defined Within the Timer there is no period of event recording defined Note If a camera track is dedicated to only one recording mode then the special settings of the other recording mode cannot be changed or will be of no consequence for current operation see Event recording 1 2 4 10 on page 180 and see Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 on page 185 7 11 9 1 Combined continuous and event recording Unlike the familiar timer controlled switching between continuous and event recording as of firmware version V1 76 see Timer operation on page 178 the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices offer contact controlled switching Starting with firmware V4 02 CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG devices also have this contact controlled switch Event recording If you enable the Event recording always enabled option you turn on this always enabled function for the selected camera track After the adjusted recorder settings have been transmitted with OK this switching takes place ona contact controlled basis via a control input on the device Note The Event recording always enabled function requires you to program at least a part of the
370. ou export an image sequence as an AVI clip you can play it back with standard media players e g Windows Media Player on various hardware platforms with different operating systems Media players usually only allow you to play a file back in one direction at a limited number of playback speeds and without individual image switching The time it takes to export the image sequence depends on the selected encoder and the corresponding settings as well as on the configuration and equipment of the accessing PC 26936_02 67 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis HeiTel export archives If you use the HeiTel export archive you still have all the advantages of archive access using the CamControl PLAYER The data from the selected sequence are written to a new archive file the data are not converted and the archive information is retained This means that exporting does not take long Export archives also have considerably less storage requirements on data carriers compared with a comparable AVI clip Using the HeiTel specific archive format however means that you and third parties must use the CamControl PLAYER Recorded GPS data is also retained when stored in HeiTel export archives and can be used in the event of access using the CamControl PLAYER File export To export image sequences select File Save sequence or click the Save sequence toolbar button This opens the Export to file dialogue window nn xl gt Target
371. own list in the Modem group select Mode Off Select the TCP IP option Then click OK Enter telephone number e Click Dial The Transmitter index opens Click Add The Transmitter data dialogue box now opens Give your transmitter a name in the Transmitter name field In the IP address Telephone number dial prefix field enter the IP address of a HeiTel compatible transmitter e g IP address 62 214 6 11 or symbolic IP address camdisc1 svr10 demo heitel com Make sure to separate the individual fields of the IP address with dots If you are using a symbolic IP address there must be three dots before the address Now confirm your details with OK The Transmitter data dialogue box closes and you find yourself back in the Transmitter index Connection e The Transmitter index is still open The desired transmitter is highlighted in the Transmitter list Now click Dial The software starts to establish a connection Online e Once a remote connection has been established and the transmitter settings have been loaded image transmission starts The status bar contains information on current data reception 26936_02 13 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 1 5 Connecting via the USB connection quick start Requirements e In order to be able to operate a HeiTel transmitter only CamDisc VG 4 and 10 CamTel VG 4 and 10 or Cam4mobile VG 4 and 10 using a USB link you need a PC with a USB connection and the driver which
372. pending on the IP camera used programming of the User name and Password may be obligatory for transmitting images to the HeiTel video system In some circumstances this also applies for PTZ control of IP cameras Note Please refer to the documentation for the IP camera concerned in each case Camera 6 Preset 1 Preset 2 Preset 3 Preset 4 For certain camera models the Number of Presets function is activated Using a drop down menu you can select the number of the command buttons for a camera specific button panel between 1 and 16 and Off if necessary e Illustrative button panel for selecting any one of 4 presets for Camera 6 e Only presets 1 to 16 on the IP camera can be selected 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Video format Video format JPEG For certain camera models the Video format function is activated If necessary you can choose between the formats JPEG and MJPEG via a drop down list e JPEG The video format JPEG complies with the standard image requirements by HeiTel video systems This video format is generally used when the drop down list is deactivated and displayed in grey The IP camera Samsung SNB 5000 which can only use the MJPEG image format as standard is currently an exception MJPEG With the video format MJPEG you select the manufacturerspecific MJPEG streaming mode Please observe the documents accompanying your IP camera if necessary Note If
373. percentage value This specifies if and when a subsequent event within the alarm duration will be detected The percentage value refers to the defined alarm duration With an alarm duration of ten seconds and a percentage value of 50 an event occurring five seconds after the initial alarm would be detected Note There are no pre alarm pictures for events occurring within the alarm duration of a previous event and detected by re triggering 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Event size Desired number of events Possible number of events Use this field to define the number of events to be recorded by the assigned camera The Possible number of events field specifies the maximum number of events as a guideline This value depends on the following factors Set track size see Track settings on page 175 Recording quality see Video settings on page 160 Preview images option see Recording Video 1 2 4 10 in on page 176 Conditional refresh option see Video settings on page 160 Duration of pre alarm and post alarm Number of pre alarm and post alarm images Notes e Changing the number of events deletes all the images saved on this camera track If the desired number of events exceeds the possible number of events event size is adjusted to accommodate the desired number of events Event size is therefore adjusted so that the desired number of events is archived provi
374. pment Note To ensure proper functioning of the overall system the intrusion detection must be tested Only tests can ensure that intruders are reliably detected and that excessive false alarms are prevented Refer to Configuring SVR devices as well as CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer and VG devices on page 109 and the IntrusionTrace Design Guide document no 21814 If not done select the Analytics node in the tree structure on the left Click Open configuration tool to open the Intrusion configuration dialogue window a LA Intrusion configuration oh a Select camera Selected AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Demo Vedeo 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden Ea AXIS 35 99 Garden EW Advanced parameters profile Profile Default a Drawing tools a 2 a Con New Area New Mask ar Calibration To select the desired camera to be configured double click on an entry in the camera list The live video is displayed Button Description S O To set up advanced parameters see Advanced parameters on page 239 Calibration To set specific reference dimensions for the camera This must be done before setting up the detection zone See Calibration on page 240 To set up mask zones which are excluded from detection see Mask zones on page 242 To set up the detection zones see Detection zones on page 242 7 27 1 Advanced paramet
375. purchase containing the date of purchase and the location of the purchase must be enclosed with the software If the product deviates considerably from its description the licensor is obliged to either improve or to replace the product the choice of which remains his If replacement deliveries and or improvements are unsuccessful then the customer can either demand a partial refund or the cancellation of the contract All warranty claims are non applicable if the software product has not been used in accordance to the regulations of this contract or to the instructions provided by the licensor or to the operating manual or when the software has been modified without the written permission of the licensor unless such non compliance to the regulations or change in the product was not responsible for the fault In case of an unfounded complaint the licensor reserves the right to demand that the customer reimburse him for any costs arising thereof The licensor does not guarantee that the product does not infringe on any commercially protected rights of third parties unless such infringement is culpable The licensor excludes himself from any costs arising from the legal protection of commercially protected rights and claims for damages from third parties 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Liability 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 The licensor does not accept liability for claims arising from the usabili
376. quickly and easily between Fullscreen Zoom window and Mainscreen viewing mode Left click in one of the images of the Quadscreen Camera groups or Ten screen displays to switch back to Mainscreen viewing mode and switch to the selected camera Note Please note that the images are always saved in the receiver archive in the configured quality and size Image quality in Quadscreen Camera groups and Ten screen viewing mode is less compared to the other viewing modes in order to facilitate a quick overview of the connected cameras You can adjust the live image quality for SVR devices in Recorder settings see Live video settings on page 133 Transparent data The CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR Cam4mobile and transmission CamServer models also have a serial interface that you can use to transparently transfer data between the transmitter and the receiver PC During image transmission you can transparently transfer any data between a device connected to the external serial interface of the transmitter see Serial channel on page 196 e g a P T head anda device connected to the receiver PC see Serial Channel on page 85 e g operating panel for the P T head To synchronise the date and time you can configure Cam4mobile so that it is possible to receive IBIS data via this interface see IBIS function with Cam4mobile on page 198 4 5 2 Displaying GPS data If once a connection has been established a Hei
377. r CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR devices without HYBRID Card 4 all messages listed above can be programmed Specific messages such as Motion and Camera position authentication may not be performed because the device does not have the relevant functions Camera In the Camera column the relevant camera must always be specified for all camera specific events such as Motion Video loss or Camera input 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis 7 17 2 Messages to be received CamControl LITE Software Guide Your alarm system communicates with the HeiTel device via Messages to be received Individual alarms are selected from a list of possible events that were communicated via the VdS 2465 protocol You can define a maximum of 40 messages to be received x EMA Messages tobe sent Messages to be received Device Events to be received from GMZ User Date amp Time desea Address i1 o 00 Camera settings ria dens Enabled Preset Ale Fel Ti t fa Motion detection zones ete ed i ei Meee 4 Privacy zones on Off Of Ott eel Alarms i Site archive of On ot On Buco Off On Off On Relays PTZ control or art of of Serial channel on at ot ott Video out EMA or at of ot ofr ot of of Extras of at Off of Upload Download a a ai ai rT on o of of on at of of ok on of of Ot Cancel Off Of Off Off att art of of Site archive state on at of of AES on at ott ot Here you specify the
378. r detects a status change Opening Edge or Closing Edge or if the activated motion detector Motion Motion Motion detects motion For continuous recording with closed input Closed Permanent or open input Open Permanent no entry in this field is required as recording continues until the input state changes again Information on image recording The combination of various options allows for almost any recording situation You should however keep some important points in mind 188 Consider carefully what you actually want to record and also what you actually want to evaluate later Check camera field of view and image quality Internal software motion detectors require considerable CPU power If multiple camera recording is to be controlled by motion detectors and recording time is slowed down considerably as a result consider replacing some of the internal motion detectors with external ones The device handles image recording triggered by changes in input states i e Opening Edge or Closing Edge with active recording on a priority basis If the device detects a status change at a recording 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide input it will always interrupt recording triggered by a different status a status change or the integrated motion detector e Sothat the device positively detects control input states and status changes switching time must be at least 0 5s e f the E
379. r devices a Ethernet USR RAINS BB Processors Update Driver Software amp Sound videos Disable pM System device Universal Seria Uninstall Scan for hardware changes Properties Step 4 A new dialogue appears Select Browse my computer for driver software 288 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide How do you want to search for driver software gt Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings gt Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually fa Step 5 Select Browse and select the subdirectory Drivers which is located in the installation directory of your CamControl LITE software Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location CAUsers Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device Select the fokier that contains drivers for your hardware 44 CCUTE J AudioTracks J CasCam J CBLoG Bb de J DeviceUpdates Ld Drivers d HELPFILES d Install_GPSDataViewer gt P RM The previously selected subdirectory is now
380. r s specifications for the external device you want to connect 196 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Function 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide You can choose from a variety of transmission data formats Mode Transmission data format 8 N 1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 8 N 2 8 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 8 E 1 8 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 8 O 1 8 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit TIN 1 7 data bits no parity 1 stop bit TIN 2 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7 E M1 7 data bits even parity 1 stop bit 7 O 1 7 data bits odd parity 1 stop bit On the CamTel SVR you can use the serial interface as a transparent interface or for serial control On devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer series the POS function is also available while the IBIS function and the GPS function have been designed for Cam4mobile devices Transparent ti ansparent _ Soyal Card Reader Transparent Transparent data transmission from the receiver PC to the serial output of the transmitter is possible POS Point of Sale The interface is used as an input for serial transaction data see POS function for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and CamServer on page 198 Serial control It is possible to control certain device functions by means of serial commands via the interface IBIS The date and clock time on Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG devices are synchronised via the IBIS ve
381. r to a symbolic name Hence you can address several cameras behind a router or you can make use of the abilities of an IP camera which can provide different image sections under different ports If no port is stated a connection to the camera via port 80 is assumed In general depending on the video format selected a port other than the standard port 80 may also be used For example many manufacturers use port 8008 for video format MJPEG while port 554 is generally used for H 264 only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR Port specification is essential in these cases For PTZIP cameras one port must additionally be specified for PTZ functionality after specifying the port for the video format minimum requirement device firmware 1 94 Examples e 192 168 31 100 The IP camera is located in the standard IP address group of the HeiTel video systems and is activated via port 80 62 214 6 17 81 The IP camera is located in an external network and is activated via port 81 ipcam015 meinedomain com 93 The IP camera is located in an external network and is activated via a symbolic name ora symbolic IP address at port 93 Note Symbolic addresses can only be processed directly if at least one valid DNS server and the gateway to the network settings were set see Network TCP IP on page 121 e 62 214 6 18 8008 In some circumstances it may be necessary to select an image port other than port 80 possibly for the Video format MJPEG 62
382. r transmitters with more than four camera control inputs Fullscreen The live image from the camera in the Mainscreen viewing mode is enlarged in the main panel The control panel to the left of the full image the LEDs and the Relay buttons are all hidden The Camera buttons and the image quality slider are still available A button to switch to Mainscreen viewing mode is also available This is the default viewing mode of CamControl LITE 26936_02 27 CamControl LITE Software Guide 28 Zoom window HeiTel by Xtralis The Zoom window offers a further display format for the CamControl LITE software It switches to a window that can be freely scaled and positioned Here depending on the display selected the images are shown in the Quadscreen format see example or as Ten or Mainscreen The title line then shows either the serial number of the transmitter or the device name where applicable This entry is followed by the camera name On multi image displays in each case the display indicates the name of the camera whose image has just been transmitted 10 1 Building front By right clicking on the Zoom window you open a context menu from which you can select between the individual cameras and camera groups and the displays Quadscreen Ten and Site Archive Additionally you can call up the recorder settings switch the internal device relays or terminate the connection by clicking Hang up Toggle to speaking 5 Ca
383. r with a first generation Audio V2 x Audio Card please install a TrueSpeech Audio Codec on your receiver PC This makes it possible for Windows Vista to decode and reproduce the audio data 26936_02 191 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 13 Relays The current HeiTel devices are usually equipped with two relay outputs that can be used for a variety of applications e Asalatch e As a momentary with adjustable switching time e For signalling active connections e For signalling error states e For signalling a recording e For signalling arming e For signalling alarms xl Relay Device User Date amp Time Connections Camera settings Camera groups Relay 1 Name Door opener Motion detection zones Momenta z T Closed while idie Privacy zones Alarms VV Reset offlini 1 Site archive N 10 Audio Closed s Pelsu ielays PTZ control Serial channel y Relay 2 Video out EMA Name Lighting Extras Upload Download Firmware update Latch X IT Closed while idle IP Camera IV Reset offline Closed 25 H OK Cancel Site archive state Help Relay names You can give the relays aname which is then used to label the buttons Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay functions A relay configured as a latch changes its state every time the button is clicked e g lighting on off Latch z Monetary Closed while connected Closed on Error Closed while rec
384. ransmitters opens Clicking one of these entries also starts dialling the transmitter in question see Dialling into a transmitter on page 89 Direct connection If your transmitter is connected directly to the receiver PC by means of the special null modem cable or a dedicated line the Transmitter index does not appear Once you click the Dial button the process of establishing a connection starts immediately Dedicated line If the transmitter is connected via a dedicated line and the receiver software is correspondingly configured an attempt is made to establish a connection every 20 seconds even if the Dial button has not been clicked see Port A on page 80 18 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 4 4 2 Automatic tours CamControl LITE allows you to access certain transmitters automatically at preset times and to receive a configurable number of video images from selected cameras You also have the option of receiving acoustic and visual notification when a tour is carried out Tours are controlled automatically The Manual button gives you back full control of the procedure Note Once you switch to manual operation you have to carry out all aspects of operation including establishing a connection You cannot switch back to automatic operation Tours are described in more detail in the chapter on Receiver options see Tours on page 86 4 4 3 Accepting calls processing alarms
385. ration alarm verification and configuration program for all HeiTel devices 3 1 Hardware and Software Requirements In order to be able to install and operate the CamControl LITE software the receiver PC must fulfill the following minimum requirements Minimum requirements e Intel Pentium processor 1 GHz or comparable AMD processor 256 MB memory Operating system Microsoft Windows 8 7 Vista XP 54 MB free hard disk space Graphics card with 32768 or 65536 colours and a resolution of 1024x768 pixels small fonts for optimal image display If only 256 colours are used images will be displayed in grey scale e COM port with UART 16550 or a multiple interface card e External ISDN terminal adapter TA and or internal ISDN card and or modem and or network card e Sound card Soundblaster compatible for audio transmission with the Audio Card and speakers if acoustic signals are desired e CD ROM drive Recommended hardware e Intel Pentium Processor from 1 7 GHz e 512MBRAM Note When using the Windows Vista operating system please note that if you are using a first generation Audio V2 x Audio Card ina SVR device a TrueSpeech Audio Codec must be installed Recommended software e Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat to display the online help in PDF format see PDF manuals for online help on page 8 3 2 Licensing regulations The purchase of one CamControl LITE entitles installation and operation on one PC workstation
386. re Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure GET cam_5 ipg HTTP1 1 r n r n Generic GET command 2 Help GET cam_3ipg HTTPT Tinin On the IP Camera dialogue box you assign a network camera to a video channel and where necessary to the relevant recording track 2 4 or 10 channels will be available depending on the device used In the example a device with 10 channels has been chosen 1 10 223 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 224 Manufacturer Protocol You select the Manufacturer of your IP camera see Supported IP cameras from a pull down menu The standard value for all video channels is Off Unbekannt After selecting the manufacturer select the Protocol for your camera type via a pull down menu The types listed stand for different video protocols from the respective manufacturer A tabular type allocation of compatible camera models can be obtained from the IP camera list which you can access via the Button Additional information on this topic can be found in the section Help button for retrieving the IP camera list see page 225 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis IP address Help button for retrieving the IP camera list 26936_02 CamControl LITE Software Guide Enter the IP address or the symbolic name in the IP address column From device firmware V1 92 you can add a port if necessary in addition to the IP address o
387. receiver archive permanently you can do so in three ways e Copy the archive file to another directory or drive See Updating the Software on page 8 e Rename the archive file in Windows Explorer e Give the archive a different name under Receiver options PC Archive see Receiver archive PC archive on page 63 Exiting the archive Click the Close button in the toolbar or select Close from the File menu to exit the receiver archive The receiver software is opened automatically after the access software is closed Note While you are accessing the archive no incoming calls are processed or reported and no tours are carried out Use CamControl PRO if you need these functions while accessing the archive 70 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 6 Receiver Software Settings You can configure CamControl LITE to suit your application in the receiver side settings You can specify the response to incoming alarms configure the receiver archive add users and much more When image transmission is not running offline click Setup lto open Receiver options Dial PC Archive Setup Event list page 88 CamControl LITE Receiver options q Options Extras HT connect PC Archive Serial channel nee Cancel wen lt F1 gt forhelp Network V TCPAP Port 3000 m CAPI 20 T CAPI 20 MSN Modem Name Mode
388. rect status If the green LED L1 flashes for an extended period of time the connection to the SO bus is not ok Solution e The Western plug is probably not connected or there is no SO bus available at the connected jack e Determine what protocol is available at the ISDN connection Euro ISDN DSS1 is the standard protocol for the ISDN TA It is also possible that the ISDN connection is not a basic connection and is configured for telephone systems direct inward dialling with two or three numbers In this case the ISDN TA can only be operated via the telephone system Checking transmitters with ISDN TA PPX PP2 PPP or integrated Incorrect MSN Incorrect initialisation Once you are using a TA PPX TA PP2 or TA PPP on the receiver PC side you can remotely configure all of the terminal adapters listed above in use on the transmitter side This also includes all HeiTel devices with internal ISDN card For example you assign MSNs and configure the protocol to X 75 in this way Proceed as follows e Connect the ISDN TA to the PC and establish a connection using a terminal program e g the terminal software located on the installation CD e Dial into the transmitter with the command ATDnnnnnnE n call number e Once successfully connected confirm the password prompt with Enter The version number of the adapter is then automatically displayed Once a connection has been established several commands are available These
389. removed from your computer e This dialogue box will inform you when the uninstallation process ends End the uninstallation by selecting OK Note In the case of multiple installations on a computer e g CamControl LITE CamControl PRO and CamControl PLAYER each with GPS Data Viewer the most recently installed GPS Data Viewer software can only be uninstalled once For further uninstallations the following procedure must be used 294 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 8 10 2 2 Uninstallation via direct call to the file unins00 exe e Inthe program directory of your CamControl LITE software locate the uninstallation files unins00 exe Here serves as a placeholder for a digit from 0 to 9 e uninsO00 exe This uninstallation routine is associated with the main application here CamControl LITE e unins001 exe This uninstallation routine is associated with the first additional application here generally GPS Data Viewer e Select the uninstallation routine for GPS Data Viewer software and start the program e Check the window title for the following security question The title should read GPS Data Viewer Uninstall GPS Data Viewer Uninstall x 2 j amp re you sure you want to completely remove GPS Data Viewer and all of its components e After confirming the security question with Yes the software will be uninstalled xl 1 GPS Data Viewer was successfully removed from your computer
390. riate HeiTel devices with a USB interface of your receiver PC please install CamControl LITE PRO software version 4 07 or higher Step 2 Switch on your VG device also applies to SVR SVR s HNVR devices and wait until the device is started completely Plug the USB cable in the front connector of the device and the other side into the USB port of the computer only after you have switched the PC on Windows 7 tires to install the driver for Ethernet USB RNDIS automatically If there was no previous driver installation done or the driver was uninstalled a corresponding driver error message appears Step 3 Got to the Device Manager you can find it in the Control Panel System Device Manager and select in section Other devices the node RNDIS Ethernet Gadget or Ethernet USB RNDIS depends on the connected HeiTel device By Device Manager lt o es File Action View Help m e a g mantin chaire X Batteries j Computer wa Disk drives EZ Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives Ga IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Imaging devices Keyboards F Mice and other pointing devices amp Monitors Network adapters a p Other devices Op Ethemet USB RNDIS BD Processors Sound video and game controllers pM System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Click with the right mouse button on the selected device and select Update Driver Software from the popup menu a J Othe
391. ription in English are then shown in the Transmitter logfile dialogue box Use the tabular overview see Logfile entries only CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer as well as VG Series on page 269 to evaluate the logfile entries Resetting the error relay Once the transmitter logfile has been fully transmitted the error relay is reset Saving logfile to receiver PC CamControl LITE allows you to automatically save the transmitter logfile to the receiver PC after it has been successfully transmitted You can activate this function by making the relevant entry in the CamTel INI configuration file see Saving the transmitter logfile on page 255 The saved logfiles are stored in the CBLOG sub directory of your CamControl LITE program directory in the format YZxxxxxx LOG YZXXXXXX transmitter serial number The logfiles from video systems with battery buffering currently only CamServer 2c with serial number WCxxxxxx and all HeiTel VG VideoGateways see VG Device series on page 100 may also be saved in the CBLOG subdirectory The file format for these logfiles is YZxxxxxx TXT YZXXXXXX transmitter serial number 4 6 2 1 Extended evaluation dialogue for battery buffered logfile The extended evaluation dialogue is only available for HeiTel video systems with a battery buffered logfile CamServer 2c WCxxxxxx and all HeiTel VG VideoGateways see VG Device series on page 100 The minimum requirement for
392. rite Error Hard disk read error Check hard disk in offline x mode e g with application ScanDisc Field x indicates hard disk model D amp T Hardware error x Indicates a serious hardware problem Field x classifies the error which is displayed in plain text as follows Clock Timer module Clear Flash Faulty flash memory Write Flash Faulty flash memory DSP Faulty DSP module Shared memory Faulty memory module no no no no no no no no no no no The device must be repaired no the relevant logfile entries to the RMA documents D amp T Hardware error Indicates a DSP error on a HYBRID Card 4 DSP x not found installed ina CamDisc HNVR CamDisc CamDisc VG HNVR x states the respective DSP HNVR CamDisc module If necessary the respective HYBRID VG HNVR only Card 4 must be repaired Add an excerpt of 270 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide D amp T No secure code The hard disks have been configured by the no yes can t store pictures manufacturer specifically for operation with HeiTel devices The device cannot be operated with standard hard disks D amp T Temperature very A critical temperature of at least 70 C was no yes high recorded inside the device D amp T Clock adjusted The clock could not be read at start up The no yes firmware date of manufacture has been set This may indicate a faulty battery D amp T Videodecoder x The vide
393. rol P Serial channel 5 Camera 5 E i Video out E Alarm panel 6 CamaaG B Extras k eee pU _ Upload Download IP Camera 7 Camera 7 r 8 Camera 8 G OK eye 9 Camera 9 a Site archive state 10 Camera 10 B Adjust zone Limiting motion detection to certain areas Adjusting zones Clicking Enabled allows you to activate motion detection for individual cameras Click Adjust zones to open the Configure Motion Detection Zones dialogue box containing the live image of the camera in question 142 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Configure Motion Detection Zones xi eT MT E ee SEMEL Select zones with your mouse e Left click to activate zones Active zones appear in red e Right click to deactivate zones When you select On a green grind E appears on the image One grid field corresponds to one zone field Once you have confirmed the zones with OK only movement in the blue zone will trigger motion events Movements outside the active zones do not trigger events Note If Enabled is not selected the entire image is used for motion detection regardless of the zones selected 7 9 Privacy zones The VG SVR or Cam4mobile series devices and CamServer support the definition of up to five Privacy zones per camera input This dialogue is not available for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 Privacy zones De
394. rong directory Information contained in R01 file is incorrect Incorrect or defective connection cable from video transmitter to remote module or from remote module to system Archiving storing Pictures at the Receiver End PC Error Fault Possible Causes Receiver archive does not 1 record any pictures Archive has not been stored Hard disk is full archive file can not be created Live pictures are recorded Frame storage archive but not archive pictures from the frame storage unit No pictures are shown after the archive is called up in the CamControl LITE Software The Play button double arrow for transmitting pictures from the transmitter archive to the receiver archive has been pressed but transmission only lasts for a short time 298 online has not been played back using the Play button Incorrect archive file has been selected or there are not yet any pictures in memory Transmission fault HeiTel by Xtralis Check the serial number of the transmitter and name the R01 control file after the serial number of the transmitter Check the MS DOS name of the file mark using Windows Explorer right click with mouse button properties Xx123456 r01 Check whether the control file is stored in the receiver software directory Check whether the correct R01 file for the remote system is being used Check the R01 entries Has the assignment been made to the correct camera
395. rotocol automatically Every line may contain 57 characters You can configure line length in the POS ATM IBIS see POS ATM IBIS on page 168 tab while keywords are set in the same named tab see Keywords on page 172 Note To operate the HeiTel POS ATM Adapter the configuration of the serial interface for the POS function is not relevant as the POS ATM Adapter communicates exclusively via network connections with your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer see Adapter on page 172 IBIS function with Cam4mobile The IBIS function was primarily designed for Cam4mobile Cam4mobile VG devices The Cam4mobile is connected via the IBIS Adapter with your vehicle s IBIS vehicle bus Configuration of IBIS The IBIS function serves to synchronise date and clock time of HeiTel devices with the IBIS vehicle bus The following programming is a requirement for this e Baud rate 1200 e Mode 8 N 2 up to firmware V 1 68 7 E 1 e Function IBIS Synchronise device When the Synchronise device time to IBIS time option is enabled the time to IBIS time device time is synchronised with the time transferred from the IBIS vehicle bus The following requirements apply for time synchronisation e A valid date is transferred at least once e A valid time is transferred at least six times e The device time varies by at least one minute not taking seconds into account Note If time synchronisation can take place via alarm panel or
396. ry of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file pl2502vista exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions A reconnection of the USB cable might be necessary after having run the driver installation manually Driver installation in Windows XP Depended from firmware and software version you are requested to install an USB driver after having plugged inthe USB cable Follow the instructions in the same way as the installation described in chapter of SVR series page 279 Starting from firmware version 2 04 or higher please open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE PRO software Run the file PL2502NW_v20044 exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions 8 9 2 Installation of the USB driver for CamDisc HNVR CamServer 1 CamServer 2 CamServer 2c CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s The USB direct connection see USB on page 76 requires the installation of a driver for the respective USB interface After installing this driver the configured interface corresponds to a network interface with a maximum transmission rate of 12 MBit s If you use the USB direct connection with a CamDisc HNVR you can obtain a maximum nominal transfer rate of 480 MBit s Standard settings for the USB direct connection The USB direct connection is made available in the first position upon activation in the transmitter list in the CamControl LITE software The default data for this transmitter da
397. s e g 008 021 If there is no number in square brackets the preset number corresponds to the usual numbering Example SF990101 R01 CAM1 SWNUM 4 SWNAME 1 Light on 098 SWNAME2 Light off 099 SWNAME3 Wiper 081 SWNAME4 Preset 4 26936_02 237 CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 26 Analytics Allocating IntrusionTrace Licenses HeiTel by Xtralis Note IntrusionTrace is only available with CamDisc E CamDisc E CamDisc ETx as well as ipVG and only in combination with JPEG MJPEG cameras not H 264 When using analogue cameras we highly recommend using the analogue realtime cards in the equipment In order to be able to use the intrusion detection functions of the CamControl LITE software you have to allocate licenses to the relevant cameras and you need to configure the required detection parameters Proceed as described in the following subsections Inthe CamControl LITE main window click on the Dial button to activate the connection to the device If not done configure the device as described in section Connections on page 121 In the tree structure on the left select the Analytics node Recorder settings ipVG Demosystem Device User Date amp Time H Connections Camera settings Camera groups Alarms Site archive Audio Relays PTZ control Serial channel Alarm panel Log file Extras Upload Download IP Camera PIR E Analytics IntrusionTrace h Shut down OK Cancel Site ar
398. s ensures that even after a loss of power shutdown and subsequent restart the reference images found and stored for each camera can continue to be used Note Camera position authentication and alarm should not be activated for cameras that have main functions including a change in image section due to pivoting inclination and or zooming Do not use this type of alarm message for PTZ or dome cameras or for cameras mounted on pivoting or tilting heads Applicable If you have stored at least one applicable reference image in the cameraspecific configuration dialogue see New reference image on page 157 for camera position authentication a Yes is displayed in the Applicable column and the option On in the Connect see Connect on page 159 column can be activated if necessary If no applicable reference image exists then No is displayed in the Applicable column in which case the option On in the Connect column cannot be activated and is grayed out Triggered The Triggered column contains information as to whether movement of the camera out of position has already been detected compared to one of the stored reference images e No The current camera image again matches the stored reference images or the original position The device can if necessary trigger an alarm again e Yes Movement of the camera from the original position has occurred compared to one of the stored reference images If this is not a temporary change
399. s for enabling the programmed DSP function When enabling the Analogue Video function for at least one video channel additional dialogue windows are offered for programming e g Motion detection zones see Motion detection zones on page 142 Privacy zones see Privacy zones on page 143 Motion detection see Motion detection on page 155 Camera position authentication see Camera position authentication on page 157 Additional programming options concerning the analogue video channels are enabled on these supplementary dialogue windows these options are already familiar from e g CamDisc SVR series devices Note Please note the following points e When setting parameters for an IP camera and enabling an analogue video channel for the same camera channel or the same recording track the analogue signal takes priority e Ifthe Analogue Video function can no longer be executed in this setup e g due to uninstalling the HYBRID Card 4 if applicable the corresponding IP camera is displayed and recorded In this case disable the analogue video channels which are no longer being used e Only enable the analogue video channels which are being used 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 7 25 PIR Integration PIR High Level Integration Devices running firmware version 2 32 old series or 4 20 VG or higher are supporting a PIR High Level Integration for up to 20 PIRs This integration allo
400. s of the Al a d alarm enable input Tamper input A tamper alarm was triggered via the Aux in1 control input This input functions independently of the status of the Al a d alarm enable input Aux2 The Aux in2 control input was triggered Temperature The temperature sensor inside the device has measured a critical temperature of at least 70 C 158 F Change of settings The recorder settings were changed Motion The alarm was triggered by a motion internal motion alarm This is a camera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Video loss The alarm was triggered by the loss of a video signal This is a camera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Camera position authentication The alarm was triggered by a camera being out of position This is a camera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Camera input A camera specific control input Control in1 10 was triggered This is acamera specific alarm the camera number must therefore be specified in the following column Alarm enable input A change was detected on the Al a d alarm enable input HDD error The HeiTel device all except CamTel SVR CamTel VG has detected a hard drive error Note These events represent the appropriate device functions in the manner usual for the device You may need to enable the specific device function Fo
401. s with equal serial number see Multiple transmitter entries on page 107 Group allocation of existing transmitter data In order to allocate existing transmitter data to the respective groups or to cancel its allocation you have other methods available besides the popup menu 1 Mouse controlled allocation Dial a transmitter with a left mouse click and hold down the mouse button Now drag the transmitter to a position within a group or to a group node and release the left mouse button The transmitter is assigned to this group In order to cancel the allocation of a transmitter to a group 26936_02 95 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis follow the same steps however position the transmitter outside of a group before releasing the left mouse button 2 Keyboard controlled allocation Using the cursor buttons select a transmitter and cut it using Ctrl X The transmitter symbol is displayed in grey Thereafter using the cursor keys choose the new position and insert the transmitter using Ctrl V Note Within the transmitter list the transmitters and groups are sorted automatically by name in alphabetical order Within the groups these subordinated transmitters are also sorted in alphabetical order With the button Add you will also open the previously described context sensitive popup menu see Popup menu on page 95 With the button Delete you will delete a checked entry If the checked entry is a group a
402. sGooglelnterval 1000 If necessary change the default setting of 1000 milliseconds Save the file 26936_02 33 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 6 Accessing CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer HeiTel uses removable hard drives in its CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and Cam4mobile devices to save image sequences These can be continuous recordings or event recordings In the case of event recording not only are the alarm triggering images saved In transmitter configuration you can define a pre alarm sequence and a post alarm sequence to be saved with the alarm images as a complete event With the exception of removable hard drives the statements in the above paragraph also apply to CamServer This device is only equipped with a fixed installation hard drive In order to keep the instructions concise the section below refers only to CamDisc SVR devices although the statements are also applicable to CamDisc HNVR Cam4mobile and CamServer In cases where there are more significant differences this is indicated accordingly Optimised image recording Conditional refresh is set by default for CamDisc SVR devices This means that only those parts of the video images that have changed are recorded Recording conditional refresh images considerably reduces the required storage capacity Conditional refresh is also advantageous because it allows more images to be saved on the data carrier compared to full images and
403. se times Regardless of this it is still possible to connect to the image archive receive live images access the image archive and change the configuration Timer operating mode can control both event recording and continuous recording Moreover two independent sets of holiday rules can be defined in line with the two holiday types see Date and time on page 118 Timer operation Timer operation is active for every camera track by default You can define recording times and recording types in the calendar in this tab Note Recording is not possible without the corresponding timer setting 178 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Weekly calendar Holidays Copy and insert Copy to all timers CamControl LITE Software Guide One field corresponds to a time slot of 30 minutes Use the mouse to set times Left click or right click and hold to activate deactivate or change the recording mode for the time slot in question This depends on the current selection settings e Continuous recording blue e Event recording red e No recording grey The display field immediately below the weekly calendar displays the time of the time slot currently being pointed to by the mouse This helps orientation Timer operating mode provides two independent sets of holiday rules in line with the two holiday types see Date and time on page 118 The rows Type 1 and Type 2 in the weekly calendar represent these two holiday types
404. section EXTRA to section HTCONNECTCTRL In case the configuration file already exists the following key are copied automatically an marked as obsolete EXTRA HTCONNECTSVR OBSOLETE HTCONNECTSVRPORT OBSOLETE In any case it is recommended to check the settings in dialog windows lt receiver settings htconnect gt 4 6 4 Accessing CamDisc archive offline If you have removed the removable hard disk of your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile transmitter or if you have replaced it you can access the saved image data and logfile offline The functions available here are generally the same as for accessing the receiver archive see Offline Access on page 63 The CamControl PLAYER guide describes how to access all HeiTel archives in detail Note An offline evaluation is only possible on devices with removable hard drives such as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR and Cam4mobile and all HeiTel VG VideoGateways On CamServer this evaluation option is not available because the hard drive is permanently installed in the device 4 7 Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG Pre alarm image storage Driveway 117 17 12 12 05 10 10 15 Buildung front Buildg left side N Builda left side S Buildg back side E Buildg back side W Builda right side S Builda right side N Deis cone lt Fi gt forhelp 245K C 7 205 The CamTel SVR and CamTel VG devices have a pre alarm image storage device Images are saved on
405. section see Switching off automatic null modem detection on page 249 26936_02 81 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Leased line This mode involves a continuous connection to a transmitter CamControl LITE attempts to reach the connected transmitter about every 20 seconds This kind of operation requires a direction connection via a dedicated line or also a null modem for example If you have selected this type of connection the Transmitter index see Configuring the transmitter index on page 88 does not open when you click Dial In some rare cases a connected null modem cable may not be properly detected in Normal mode If you select Nullmodem the receiver software assumes that there is always a null modem connected and acts accordingly Note Don t forget to switch off Nullmodem mode again if you want to establish a connection using a different method via modem for example Off If you only establish connections via TCP IP or CAPI you can Deactivating serial deactivate the serial interface by selecting Off in the Mode drop down interface list CamControl LITE then stops using this COM interface thus making it available for other applications or the serial channel Port xi Transmitter will now be programmed Please wait ca 25 sec From the Port drop down list you can select the COM port to which you want to connect your modem ISDN TA or the null modem cable If the selected COM i
406. see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 is dialled at the specified time HH MM No picture will be transmitted and the connection is closed again immediately The Routine call every 24 hours option allows you to check and log ona regular basis whether your HeiTel device is establishing a connection to your receiver PC The call is saved in the event list See Event list on page 20 If you remove the hard disk drive of the CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile and select this option you can operate your device without a hard disk Your device then acts as a simple transmitter Archive settings and the sender logfile cannot be accessed All hard disk monitoring functions are deactivated e g hard disk malfunction alarm or error relay triggering Note If you select Use without hard disk drive and you have not removed the hard disk then this option is ignored Your CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR or Cam4mobile continues to work with a hard disk drive If the hard disk drive malfunctions or is removed at a later point in time however all monitoring functions remain active If this option is selected and there is an alarm event an active connection is closed and your digital image transmission system dials the telephone number IP address saved under Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page
407. selected recording track for an event recording If this is not done the function remains inactive and is greyed out The recording parameters for continuous and event recording of the selected recording track can be adjusted on the dialogue box of the same name Note If the Event recording always enabled function is used the extended configuration of the continuous recording can only be set to a limited degree see Advanced configuration on page 186 How combined continuous and event recording works The Event recording always enabled function enables contact controlled recording of events For control purposes only the input contact is required for the relevant camera track for example Control in1 for Camera track 1 e If in accordance with the timer settings see Timer operation on page 178 a continuous recording takes place or no recording at all event recording is started by triggering the relevant input contact 26936_02 177 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis e No pre alarm images are recorded for these events The image sequence consists only of alarm image and post alarm images e The trigger level Normally opened or Normally closed is specified in Event recording Trigger via contact e f necessary continuous recording takes place only when the switching state of the input contact is inactive e lf event recording is to take place in accordance with the timer settings See Tim
408. shown as camera hints These images are shown as soon as the mouse pointer is positioned over the camera button The reference image is displayed until the configured display time elapses The image is also shown for as long as the left mouse button is held and the magnifying glass is positioned over the picture regardless of the configured display time Clicking the reference image with the left mouse button zooms the picture by approximately 20 The image can be zoomed by 20 six times Clicking the reference image at maximum zoom returns it to its initial size The display time begins again each time the view is changed You can modify the initial size of the reference image and its display time in the CamTel INIfile see Configuration reference images on page 251 94 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 6 9 4 Device grouping cascading By grouping the devices or cascading you receive the option of combining several HeiTel devices into one group within the list of transmitters This grouping is meaningful for example if several devices are used for video monitoring of an object and these present to the user practically one functional unit Transmitter index xj 23 p6h M Transmitter list 27 6000 Reference images eu p iy oe a Demo CamDisc svr10 2 IP PTZ Add new group Bd FH Demo CamDise svr4 3 IP Add new transmitter ve BS Demo CamDise svr4 4 IP Cut transmitter Demo CamDisc
409. smitter end and during telephone alarm call is Waiting for outside picture transmission nor Reread by hme Enter the AT command X3 in transmitter PABX system the modem init string requires a number for 2 Enter the dial prefix ATD outside line Check the entered telephone dest eee ie d number is a number required pido ie Cose for the outside line SVR device is not Make sure that the alarm amed on oralann detector contact is not continually connected to Connect SVR devices e Arm Your device if necessary Set the alarm detector contact to Connect Test your alarm detector the camera button in CamControl LITE is highlighted in red when a camera alarm detector input has been triggered contacts are not set End of Step 4 analogue telephone network 310 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis ISDN Networks CamControl LITE Software Guide Please check your ISDN TA at the receiver end by calling the TA from a second PC and a terminal program The receiver program must be started for this test and call acceptance must have been activated Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver At the transmitter end and during picture transmission Error Fault at the Receiver PC Alarm call is not received error at the transmitter end End of Step 4 ISDN network 26936_02 PABX system requires an MSN PABX system requires a number for an outside line Alarm contact is continually closed SVR device
410. sponse to incoming calls and alarms in line with your application Receiver options p m Automatic operation C Do not accept call Accept call manually Accept call automatically IV Waring signal Accept call and automatic operation Time limit of connection 4 min Camera 1 2 Camera2 0 Camera 3 1 Camera 4 0 Camera5 0 Camera6 0 Camera 0 Camera8 0 Camera 9 fo ae Cancel Help Do not accept call Dial from PC only Select Do not accept call if you do not want incoming calls to be accepted No acoustic or visual notification whatsoever is given in this case Accept call manually Call notification Port A Call Ignore If you have selected Accept call manually incoming calls are initially only notified visually and acoustically in the Call dialogue box You decide whether you want to accept or ignore the call by clicking Accept or Ignore If your PC has a sound card installed the RING WAV file is played as acoustic notification You can replace this file with your own sound file if you wish If this file has been deleted or the PC does not have a sound card short warning tones are emitted by the PC loudspeaker as acoustic notification Notes e If you are operating via TCP IP and or are using ISDN cards via CAPI it is not possible to accept calls manually e Please note that for technical reasons a call must be answered within a limited period of time This time
411. ssible Error Causes at PC Receiver Error Causes at Transmitter Outgoing Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Outgoing Call Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 4 Analogue ISDN TCPIIP Analogue ISDN TCPIIP Analogue ISDN TCPIIP Analogue ISDN TCPIIP Checklist First check the following frequent sources of error e ls call acceptance activated in the receiver settings see Take a call on page 72 e ls the correct telephone number of the receiver PC entered in the transmitter see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 e Is the modem ISDN TA correctly configured see Port A on page 80 e Are you attempting to make an alarm call via TCP IP Please check the cabling a Crosslink cable is used only for the direct connection between PC Receiver and Transmitter Please read the section for your application or for the type of data transmission you are using Analogue Operating an analogue dial modem at your PC page 305 ISDN ISDN card or external ISDN TA page 305 Analogue Telephone Networks First check your analogue receiver modem by calling it from a mobile telephone or normal telephone Some of the following errors faults can be excluded by making this check Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Call is not accepted even 1 Incorrect modem 1 Check the modem init string from a telephone initialisation and when required add the 2 Incorrect receiver AT command S0 0 settings
412. stances TCP IP port for ONLPLPORT x TCP IP port for the Online PLAYER Evaluation with p e Range x valid port number which is not used by CamControl LITE optimal functionality for example Port 3081 The Evaluation with optimal functionality is carried out using the specified TCP IP port Make sure that this port is open in any firewalls that you have installed because the Online PLAYER communicates with your CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamServer or Cam4mobile over this port Note If you do not supplement the parameter ONLPLPORT in CamTel INI the connection or alarm port of the receiver software increased by one is used to connect the Online PLAYER Example e The transmitter alarm message is carried out via Port 3000 e The Online PLAYER connects with this transmitter through Port 3001 248 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 8 2 4 2 Port A PORTA Maximum connection duration Switching off automatic null modem detection MAXONLINETIME 3600 Maximum connection duration e Range 1 2678400 s 31 days 1 off connection not automatically terminated default You can specify a maximum connection duration to prevent against operating errors If you specify a value for this key it also applies to tours and automatically processed alarms The time required to load the settings and establish the connection is included in the configured duration NONULLMO 0 Deactivate a
413. suspected interruptions in the image flow should occur with the video format MJPEG switch back to the alternative video format JPEG if necessary This behaviour can particularly occur with larger images or high image rates Devices of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series are generally not affected For devices of the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series video format H264 is also available for specific manufacturers Videoformat JPEG x JPEG H264 e H264 Select the appropriate video compression for video format H264 If necessary consult the documentation for your IP camera accompanying the product za With the Motion Server port you set the IP port over which your video system communicates with the corresponding IP cameras for camera Video Motion Detection VMD The concerned IP cameras are marked with the abbreviation VMD in the IP camera list see Help button for retrieving the IP camera list on page 225 Please note that the camera VMD feature is not always available on all IP camera models For an overview of IP ports used by CamControl LITE click on the button see Overview of the used IP Ports on Page 245 Motion Server Port 26936 _02 227 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Configure with Click the Configure with Browser button to open the Web interface of Browser your IP camera in the standard Web browser To enable this the previously defined IP address or the symbolic name e
414. t The option Update existing transmitters in transmitter list updates the IP addresses and if necessary the port addresses of existing transmitter entries The allocation is implemented via the serial number of the devices This function is particularly helpful for transmitters that obtain their IP address dynamically via DHCP see Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP on page 122 or for transmitters that were allocated for technical reasons another fixed IP address within the local network Add new transmitters to transmitter list The option Add new transmitters to transmitter list supplements the transmitter list with new transmitter entries The following information is included in the transmitter entry serial number name P port and IP address Other entries such as Username and Password must be added 26936_02 101 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 6 9 6 HTconnect TCP IP leased line For firmware 1 52 or higher SVR series devices CamDisc HNVR and Cam4mobile and CamServer offer a HTconnect function for a leased line between the transmitter and the receiver software see HTconnect on page 137 For this the TCP IP leased line is always initiated by the transmitter The correspondingly configured HeiTel devices establish a resting permanent connection to the receiver for this For this leased line via TCP IP each transmitter which is connected with a receiver generates a data volume of around 6 byt
415. t For hard drive partitions formatted in NTFS format the maximum archive size is 512 GB In addition to the display in MB the archive size is also shown in GB Note The one time initialisation of the PC Archive takes place immediately after confirmation of the changes made with OK For small archives this process takes only a few seconds The initialisation of a very large archive may take up to several minutes The status window provides progress information Unused capacity MB Remember that the archive file only grows to its actual size gradually over time The Unused capacity MB lets you know how much storage space is left on the drive on which the archive is stored When selecting the size of the archive consider this unused capacity as a certain reserve for the operating system and other applications 78 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide In addition to the display in MB the available storage space is also shown in GB Oldest call All calls and images received are saved in a FIFO storage system one after the other The oldest images are overwritten first If all the images of the oldest call are deleted in this way the call in question no longer appears in the call list of the archive access software If the connection is open for a long time and the archive is proportionately small this means that under certain circumstances only the last call is saved in the archive see Receiver archive PC archi
416. t of our proven receiver software With this Windows software up to nine transmissions can be received simultaneously and the images displayed together on a monitor for alarm verification or routine checks ideal for security centres or applications with complex requirements 26936_02 5 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Professional video wall application CamControl MV allows the display of up to 64 live camera images of corresponding number of HeiTel devices including the evaluation of archived images Control station integration Weare consistently developing our product philosophy even further and now also offer the option of integrating our systems into existing control centres in order implement optimal alarm and video management with regard to alarm verification Video control station In the Event Management System EMS HeiTel offers its own autonomous control station solution This client server system with up to 21 operator stations provides you with a high performing alarm management tool featuring dynamic alarm processing and an alarm database This control station solution can be expanded using the products EMS Site Map interactive site map management and EMS TAPI program interface for telephony applications Weare pleased that you are interested in our products and hope that we continue to be a valuable partner for you in the future Mobile Application CamControl iPhone and CamControl Android allow
417. t resolutions the live images transferred are inserted into the intended place according to the view selected Depending on the resolution of the IP camera used the image is either compressed or stretched out whilst retaining the proportions j y Parking Space 2 Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Parking Space 2 Dewarping Demo Demo Video 1 Demo Video 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden E AXIS 35 99 Garden W CamControl LITE shows you the resolution of the image of the current IP camera in the status line at the bottom right in the format Camera number resolution 371280800 If necessary use io display the image in its original size Click on this button again to insert the image again in the intended location Alternatively you can make this switch in the Zoom window via the popup menu left click to open using the Original function If the space available is sufficient to display the image in full no switch takes place If the image of the IP camera is displayed in its original size the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol ey when held over the image section of the IP camera With this hand and by simultaneously holding down the left mouse button you can move the image section within the display field 26936_02 23 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Side Entrance Main Entrance Building Front Parking Space 1 Parking Space 2 Dewarping Demo Side Entrance Demo Video 1 Demo Video 2 AXIS 35 98 Garden E
418. t to the receiver when the Tamper input is open 7 10 2 Pre alarm CamTel VG and CamTel SVR only Open the Pre alarm tab from the menu under the Alarm node This tab is not available if you are using CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG and CamServer VG as well as CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices Continue reading from the next section see Camera control inputs on page 151 CamTel VG and CamTel SVR transmitters have their own pre alarm archives As long as there is no connection established to a receiver the transmitter unit continuously stores video images in this archive The oldest images are continuously overwritten Once a connection is established recording stops The pre alarm image archive now contains video images that were recorded just before the connection and therefore just before an alarm see Accessing CamTel SVR and CamTel VG on page 51 148 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Recorder settings xj Alarm inputs Pre alarm RAM Camera contral inputs Mation detection Video loss Camera position authentication Device se Camera name Enabled Interval s Date amp Time f Connections Camera settings 1 Camera 1 Vv 1 al Camera groups Motion detection zones E Privacy zones 2 Camera 2 s l If Alarms Alarm inputs 3 Ganeas Vv 1 Camera control inputs Motion detection 4 Camera
419. ta has been received or saved Otherwise the button will be deactivated 4 5 2 2 Extended GPS Live window The extended GPS Live window contains the controls for use of Google Earth or OpenStreetMap Notes e Concerning the Google Earth application e Please note the licence terms and conditions of use for Google Earth e For commercial use Google Earth Pro software is available for which a charge is payable There is also Google Earth Enterprise which is offered as a company solution e Please consult the Google Earth user manual for further information on usage e Please note that HeiTel Digital Video GmbH has no influence over and assumes no liability for the function and availability of services obtained from other parties 30 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide e Concerning the OpenStreetMap application e Please note the licence terms and conditions of use for OpenStreetMap e Please consult the OpenStreetMap user manual for further information on usage e Please note that HeiTel Digital Video GmbH has no influence over and assumes no liability for the function and availability of services obtained from other parties Choosing between Google Earth and OpenStreetMap map display Starting with CamControl LITE software V3 84 the control elements described below for the extended GPS window are deactivated for a new installation of the CamControl software and are greyed out If with the installed CamControl LITE s
420. ta is as follows and should not be changed e Transmitter name USB direct connection e IP address and port 192 168 138 95 3000 26936_02 283 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Note This connection data should not be changed If necessary enter a further transmitter entry fora USB connection see Additional USB connection on page 278 USB cable Only use a certified USB 2 0 hi speed cable to connect to the transmitter The cable should not be longer than two metres Limitations concerning the USB direct connection This function can also be used with the following devices if their firmware is of version 1 72 or later and these devices were produced from 2009 onwards e CamDisc HNVR 10 devices serial numbers NV9xxxxx e CamDisc SVR 4s and CamDisc SVR 10s devices serial numbers WS9xxxxx and WV9xxxxx e CamServer 1 CamServer 2c and CamServer 2 devices serial numbers WBxxxxxx WCxxxxxx and WD9xxxxx The USB drivers for these devices can be found in the Drivers subdirectory of CamControl LITE software as of version 3 80 e PL2502NW_v20044 exe Driver file for Windows 2000 and Windows XP e pl2502vista exe Driver file for Windows Vista e pl2501win732bit exe Driver file for Windows 7 8 9 2 1 Driver Installation in Windows XP Open the Drivers subdirectory in the program directory of your CamControl LITE software Run the file PL2502NW_v20044 exe to install the USB driver Follow the instructions Acc
421. ta per second are received over a PSTN connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 3000 bytes s 600 s 1 8 MB Note Use CamControl PRO if you need a receiver archive greater than 2 GB CamControl PRO provides you with a receiver archive with an archive size that is only limited by the size of your hard disk and that saves individual calls in separate files maximum file size per call 2 GB 26936_02 79 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 6 6 PortA CamControl LITE can establish a connection to HeiTel devices through various communication paths e Network TCP IP protocol also Internet via network card or remote data transmission network e CAPI 2 0 with internal ISDN card or CAPI sharing over the network e Serial interface COM interface with connected modem ISDN terminal adapter or null modem cable These data transmission paths can be intercombined in any way For example you can access CamDisc SVR over the network TCPI IP inspect another object via ISDN and process an incoming call from your modem without having to change the settings of the receiver software Receiver options d Options r Network M TCPAP Port 3000 PC Archive CAPI 2 0 Serial channel VV caPl20 MSN Take call Tour J User r Modem Name Mode PORT A Normal y Port Baud COMI Me 115200 Pi Init prefix ATEI
422. te MV Update device with fle update_all_svr_158 bin In case of a device update any changes done but not yet transmitted to the device will ignored OK Cancel Site archive state Help 214 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Firmware update In the selection list for the Firmware update menu item different valid firmware versions can be displayed as presented in the example e The Update file column shows the name of the firmware file e The Version column shows the type and in square brackets the version number For the firmware type there are two options ALL and FIRMWARE e ALL This is an update file 4 MB that contains in addition to the firmware an embedded Linux with current RAMDISK as required as of firmware 1 38 FIRMWARE This update file approx 500 to 600 KB only contains the firmware These files contain only the firmware without embedded Linux and corresponding RAMDISK Due to these limitations FIRMWARE type update files should only be used after contacting HeiTel Support Generally however you will only receive ALL type firmware updates Confirm your selection with OK After confirming the prompt with OK the transmission of the firmware file starts A status window shows the progress of the transmission This is followed by a verification of the transmitted firmware file Save Recorder Settings x Do you really want to update the device
423. te sh_cc_lite_gb pdf 26936_02 317 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis This page is intentionally left blank 318 26936_02 www xtralis com UK and Europe 44 1442 242 330 D A CH 49 431 23284 1 The Americas 1 781 740 2223 Middle East 962 6 588 5622 Asia 86 21 5240 0077 Australia and New Zealand 61 3 9936 7000 A Disclaimer about this document statements about Intellectual Property Copyrights and Liability as well as a General Warning are available in an earlier section of this document Document No 26936_02 by lt p xtr ali S
424. ted according to the output signal either with the Mic or Line in jack These sockets are on the rear of your HeiTel device 190 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Select this option if you want to talk to the monitored object from your receiver PC Selecting both options enables simultaneous listening and speaking push totalk from your receiver PC Note If no Audio Card is installed you will receive the following message instead of the version number No Audio Card installed The Listening and Speaking options are not available Audio Card with TrueSpeech Codec Audio V2 x The predecessor model uses a TrueSpeech Codec You can identify the model from the version number Audio V2 x The difference from the model version described above is that you cannot apply further parameters to the signal input Listening The options Microphone and Line are deactivated and cannot be changed Audio 2 2 02 05 IV Listening Microphone C Line V Speaking Notes e Foran Audio Card V2 x the options Microphone and Line in the software interface are displayed in grey as parameterisation with regard to the signal input is not necessary The functionality of the device inputs MIC and Line inis given These options displayed in grey do not indicate a malfunction of the Audio Card e If you establish a connection from your receiver software CamControl LITE under Windows Vista toa transmitte
425. tes Save the transmitter logfile JOYSTICK UPDATE 26936_02 247 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 4 Configuration file with modifiable keys The following sample INI file gives you an overview of the keys what they mean and their values Only the keys that may be changed are shown here If you change any of the other keys in CamTel INI that are not listed here you may significantly impair the proper operation of the receiver software The text after the semicolon explains the meaning of the key 8 2 41 TCP IP TCP_IP Port number PORT 3000 Port number e Range 0 65535 It may be necessary to change the standard port number if you wish to set up more than one receiver computer for the same transmitter or transmitters at a single IP address using a router or if port 3000 is already in use in your network or cannot be used Please note than not all port numbers can be used depending on the system Contact your network administrator for assistance in defining an appropriate port number Make sure that the port number of your transmitter matches the number configured in the receiver software Fast mode FASTMODE 1 FASTMODE operating mode e Range O off 1 on default e When FASTMODE is deactivated images are requested less frequently to reduce the image transmission rate This reduces the response time and can speed up the operation of the receiver software on slower computers under certain circum
426. tes the PIR mode Serial channel PIRs will be connected to the serial channel RS485 to nRS232 converter is needed IB RS232 RS485 PTZ channel PIR will be connected to the PTZ channel Depending on the wiring and the number of PIRs it might be recommend to use serial channel with IB RS232 RS485 Note When PIRs not yet have been activated or the channel where the PIRs are connected to is changed the settings must be sent to device before the detection and the configuration of PIRs can start see image below 26936_02 233 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Walk test Pott Note PIR list 234 PR PIR mode Walk test c 7 On 2a channel F On Port 5585 2 PIR state Allows a Walk test via iPIR software During this time the device cannot communicate with the PIRs but is tunneling all to and fro the PIR Therefore lt Discover PIR gt lt Timeouts gt lt Packet Errors gt lt PIR state gt cannot be executed and will not been updated Allows to change to IP port used for the walk test connection The walk test might be protected by the device user and password Since there are some restrictions please refer to the firmware release notes for details This column contains the numbers 1 to 20 Each representing one PIR and the address that the PIR must use within the RS485 PIR protocol In this column one single PIR can be activated or deactivated While deactivated
427. th and safety precautions must be taken during the installation commissioning and maintenance of the product The system should not be connected to a power source until all the components have been installed Proper safety precautions must be taken during tests and maintenance of the products when these are still connected to the power source Failure to do so or tampering with the electronics inside the products can result in an electric shock causing injury or death and may cause equipment damage Xtralis is not responsible and cannot be held accountable for any liability that may arise due to improper use of the equipment and or failure to take proper precautions Only persons trained through an Xtralis accredited training course can install test and maintain the system Liability You agree to install configure and use the products strictly in accordance with the User Manual and product documents available from Xtralis Xtralis is not liable to you or any other person for incidental indirect or consequential loss expense or damages of any kind including without limitation loss of business loss of profits or loss of data arising out of your use of the products Without limiting this general disclaimer the following specific warnings and disclaimers also apply Fitness for Purpose You agree that you have been provided with a reasonable opportunity to appraise the products and have made your own independent assessment of the fitness or suitabil
428. th each PIR event Camera Preset Ey Tamper Presence and General can be linked to a camera Preset and B lor v event trigger in case of their occurrence Off Off 4 Off Ott Ott 2 Ott Ort Off 4 Orr In this list PIR alarms can be activated separately and linked with a camera preset and event trigger of the selected camera This list will show only the details that are supported by the PIR Depending on the connected PIR there will 1 up to 8 different details events available e g Details Trigger event Camera Left to Right Right to left Off Off Double Knock Double knock v lt gt Camera control input 0001 z Double knock allows to combine one of the events of the selected PIRs with either a camera control input motion detection of a camera or with one of the events of any other PIR If camera control inputs are used they have to be activated in their menu Motion will be activated automatically If a camera input is linked with motion this will result in triple knock If double knock is combined with another PIR this PIR must be enabled in the PIR list It is not necessary to activate the PIR detail Alarm events lt F1 gt for help Alarm PIR 1 Creep zone ch 1 Camera 2 95 00 K In case of an alarm event CamControl LITE will display a detailed alarm information in the status line This message will contain the PIR number Address the alarm detail of the PIR and the associat
429. the loop 1 2 3 4 is switched to the video output Cameras not activated for sequencer mode are also switched to the output 200 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide In such a way you can activate a particular camera by suspending sequencer mode for a camera by pressing a pushbutton connected to the control input for example The camera remains switched on as long as you are pressing the pushbutton When you release the pushbutton and then press it again the next camera is switched to the output 7 16 0 2 Camera of last alarm Displaying alarm camera If you select Display camera of latest alarm the output is switched to another camera depending on the recording inputs and how they are configured see Event recording 1 2 4 10 on page 180 or see Continuous recording 1 2 4 10 on page 185 Event recording For event triggered recording the associated camera is switched to the video output if triggered Continuous recording For continuous recording four status changes can cause switching to another camera e The image recording input is closed switched to ground and Motion Motion or Motion has been selected in the Closed drop down list Once a movement is detected the transmitter switches to the corresponding video input If motion is detected at different cameras the camera with the highest number is switched example motion for edge recording on camera 1 and camera 3 camera 3 will be
430. the camera must be adjusted and a new reference image created using the Configure see New reference image on page 157 function 158 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Notes e So that the device can set this parameter the option On in the Connect see Connect on page 159 column must have been activated If necessary transfer the settings to the transmitter by pressing the OK button e Please note that the maximum detection delay for a camera that has been displaced depends on the device type and the number of cameras Examples CamTel SVR with four activated channels approx 100 seconds CamDisc SVR with four activated channels approx 80 seconds CamDisc SVRs with four activated channels approx 35 seconds Connect Select On in the Connect column if you want the transmitter to connect to your receiver software if a displacement of camera position is detected When an alarm message is given the corresponding camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same manner as the reporting of camera alarms Online Cam pos authentication Camera 1 Note In order to establish a connection to your receiver when the camera position is altered you must enter the phone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 7 11 Site archive only CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG an
431. the columns Name Presence POR State are still updated Yet there will be nor alarming This column will contain the name or type of the PIR This column will indicate if a PIR is still connected and accessible If a PIR is not present anymore it will disappear from the list after pressing lt Discover PIR gt or sending the settings to the device Shows the number of PIR answers not coming in time Shows the number of checksum errors of a PIR Shows the actual PIR state By clicking lt i gt a full text window for the marked PIR is shown This LED signalizes when a third party application iPIR is executing a walk test Green walk test is executed Grey no walk test is executed 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Q Configuration Green LED means all discovered PIR are enabled Yellow LED signalizes when a discovered PIR is not enabled DR This button starts discovering of PIR connected to the device Normally this is not necessary since the device updates the PIR list latest after 60s Delete packet errors This button deletes packet and time outs errors These errors are set to zero also when the device reboots A limited number of these errors seem to be normal When pressing the info button the PIR state of the marked PIR is shown in an additional PIR state window see below PIR State Window The PIR state Windows shows the state of the PIR marked in the PIR list Active ev
432. the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver when the Alarm input is open 147 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Alarm only when The function Alarm only when trigger level stable for x s Seconds is trigger level stable for x used to debounce the alarm input The alarm message is only triggered if s seconds the stable state is present for at least the specified period Possible values are Off 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 30 45 60 and 90 So that a connection can be established to your receiver in the event of an alarm or if the status of the alarm enable input changes you must save the telephone number or IP address of your receiver in Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 Tamper input A change of state at the Tamper input designation on the video system Aux in1 always sends an alarm irrespective of whether the video system is armed or disarmed As a rule image transmission starts with the image that triggered the alarm Then camera 1 will be switched on Select Normally opened or Normally closed to specify which input state will trigger the alarm Normally opened X F Normally closed Normally opened Select Normally opened from the drop down list if you want your transmitter to connect to the receiver when the Tamper input is closed Normally closed Select Normally closed from the drop down list if you want your ED transmitter to connec
433. the function Obtain DNS server address automatically Within the network where the configured transmitter is used the respective service must be available Upon activating this function the settings for DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 are deactivated and displayed in grey To have changes of this option become effective you must confirm twice by clicking OK Thereafter close the connection When changing the settings regarding the DNS servers the device will complete a restart If you have defined a symbolic IP address for alarm calls under Phone amp IP numbers see Phone and IP numbers on page 131 enter the IP addresses of your DNS service in these two fields Note HeiTel transmitters do not support direct resolution of symbolic names in IP addresses However a connection can be established to a symbolic address via a DNS domain name server Please contact your network administrator for assistance in setting up a symbolic address and for information on DNS service providers A symbolic name is advisable especially in the case of continuously changing IP addresses If you want to limit utilisation of your network select a maximum connection speed from the appropriate drop down list p 400 KB s 3 13 MBit s 7 0 94 MBit s 80 KB s 0 63 MBit s 60 KB s 0 47 MBit s If you select the option Web Server one of the six standard connections is dropped in favour of up to four additional connections to PC PDA or Smartphone
434. the image in the main panel while the current image amp Time number with respect to the total number is shown on the right underneath the image in the main panel together with the time and date of the current image An asterisk in front of the image number indicates that an archive image is in the process of being transmitted Archivingin If you have activated the receiver archive in the Receiver options PC the PC Archive options of CamControl LITE the received transmitter archive archive images are also saved see PC Archive on page 78 When you are accessing the PC archive these images are identified in the status bar with the entry Archive Exiting pre alarm images Clicking Hra exits the transmitter archive and live image transmission resumes 52 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide 4 8 PTZ control and remote adapter CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR CamTel SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer transmitters come equipped as standard with a directly connect remote control interface for PTZ cameras You can remotely control all the important functions of up to two four or ten cameras with customised menus and buttons via an existing remote data transmission or network connection between the relevant transmitters and CamControl LITE As remote camera control is one of the main applications the remainder of this section deals with this function 4 8 1 Operating PTZ control Installing control protocols
435. thout filter option the list of logfile entries is printed out filter without taking the filter function into consideration see Filtering the logfile on page 47 Note Please note that the symbols indicating the event type are converted into corresponding letters when printed out see Filtering the logfile on page 47 Logfile data on the clipboard Using the Copy to clipboard button you can use logfile data in other applications or documents Fiter Time window Search Print Clipboard Only selected lines J All without filter Copy to clipboard If you enable the Only selected lines option you only copy to the clipboard the lines in the logfile that have been previously selected The lines are selected using the usual Windows method All without With the All without filter option the list of logfile entries is copied to the filter clipboard without taking the filter function into consideration see Filtering the logfile on page 47 Note Please note that the symbols indicating the event type are converted into corresponding letters when copied to the clipboard see Filtering the logfile on page 47 26936 _02 49 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 6 3 Pre recorded Audio Tracks CamControl LITE allows to transmit pre recorded audio tracks to a connected transmitter The transmitter will play these tracks on site m iT 2013 12 11 17 44 49 564 DIGITAL DEO by xtra
436. tings Triggered by input E Motion Pifvecy 20068 Vv _ _ Normally opened B Alarms Alarm inputs Pre alarm Alarm input Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss V Connect Normally opened zi Camera position authen Site archive Audio Off x Relays PTZ control Tamper input Serial channel Alarm panel Log file bg _ _ Normally opened m OK Cancel Site archive state Help Note A switching state at the inputs must last at least 0 5 seconds to be certain that the transmitter detects it Note on CamServer 2c and video systems of the VG Series _ Normally opened X Normally opened F Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normally closed BS 8418 Besides the conventional wiring of the following control inputs as normally closed contact and normally open contact CamServer 2c and the video systems of the VG series also support the voltage monitored circuit variants resistance monitoring 10k and the BS 8418 compliant normally closed contact For more information refer to section Specification of the control inputs on page 295 Arm Disarm input You can control connection establishment in the event of alarm with the Arm Disarm input designation on the video system Al a d If you use this function the status of the alarm enable input e g with a connected key switch determines whether a connection will be established to one or more receivers in the event of alar
437. to assign more transmitter configuration and control options to the user in question The following options are available Note Option Description o O Modify setup Allows the user to modify transmitter settings PTZ Allows the user to control pan and tilt systems in the relevant dialogue box Remote functions Allows the user to control external devices with the internal remote adapter Audio Enables audio transmission for the relevant user only with installed Audio Card and for CamDisc HNVR devices Transparent channel Allow access the via serial channel Manually alarm Allows the user to manually activate or deactivate alarm enable enabling Internal relays Allows the user to control internal relays Disconnect incase of Prevents a connection established by the receiver from being disconnected in the event of an alarm see Hang up and redial on alarm on page 210 Logfile Authorises the user to view the transmitter logfile applies to CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices only Archive access Authorises the user for Evaluation with optimal speed of the Site optimal speed Archive Only applies for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices Archive access Authorises the user for Evaluation with optimal functionality online optimal functionality player of the Site Archive Only applies for CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices If Modify setup is not select
438. to the previous section see Network TCP IP on page 121 26936_02 125 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 4 2 Wireless WAN Open the Wireless WAN dialogue window from the menu under the Connections node If necessary you can configure an internal WAN card via Wireless WAN This option is currently only available for the CamServer VG 4c with 3G 4G module and the CamDisc Cam4mobile VG 4c with 3G 4G module This device is equipped with an internal 3G 4G module fora WAN connection 3G 4G programming The 3G 4G modem manufacturer and type will appear in the upper status window In addition you will be notified whether a connection to the provider exists The graphic below shows information on the signal quality and or the power level Recorder settings Cam4Mobil Network TCP IP Wireless WAN Phone amp IP numbers Live video settings E Mail HTconnect User Sierra Wireless Incorporated Datos Time MC8790 NO SIM FW 2010 03 04 17 37 08 E Connections F 3 Network TCP IP No connection to Provider Wireless WAN Phone amp IP numbers Tam Live video settings E Mail E 113dBm 51 dBm HTconnect p Camera settings Camera groups PIN E Motion Privacy zones User name mdex m2m mdex de E Alarms E Site archive Password Audio Relays APN 1 IP mam cda vodafone de PTZ control Setial channel ps Alarm panel Dial in number 9914 Log file Initialisation co
439. tting By activating the On option the signal inputs in question are linked with a logical AND to the device internal motion dection for interior spaces see Configuring the link between internal motion detection and camera control inputs on page 152 Only when the motion detection see Motion detection on page 155 has already been activated for the camera channel in question is it possible to activate this option Otherwise the Off setting cannot be changed 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis Trigger event Contact CIO Adapter only CamControl LITE Software Guide Linked with Motion Select in the Trigger event column between the options On or Off standard setting If the On option is activated then event controlled recording of video images takes place in accordance with the programming for the respective camera track in the Site archive For CamTel SVR series devices this function is not available due to the absence of a hard drive Inthe Contact column select between the options Normally opened standard setting or Normally closed for which change of status where applicable one of the above programmed functions Preset Alarm Trigger event is to be triggered Normally opened 7 Normally closed Normally terminated 10k Normally closed BS 8418 If the CIO Adapter is being used you choose between the Normally closed Normally opened default setting Normally terminated 10k and Normall
440. ty or impossibility to use the software package unless such damages have been caused by the licensor intentionally or through gross negligence on his part or on the part of his agents All liabilities for indirect damages as well as for accompanying damages and subsequent damages are excluded Should violations of professional ethics arise that have not been committed by the licensor his legal representatives or his executives but from other agents then the liability of the licensor is limited to damages that are foreseeable at the time the contract is made and that are typical for such contracts This exclusion and these limitations do not apply in the case of culpable infringement by the licensor or his agents of important contractual obligations in cases where guaranteed properties of the software package are missing as well as in cases of compelling liability according to the product liabilities law Where guaranteed properties of the software package are missing the licensor is not liable for such subsequent damages that are not contained in the guarantees made The liability of the licensor is limited within commercial trading to the replacement for typical foreseeable damages Liability claims must be asserted by the customer to the licensor in writing immediately after they are known Inasmuch as liability claims do not expire at an earlier time according to the legal regulations they expire at the latest three years after the cla
441. ugh the sound card in the receiver PC and sent to the transmitter speaking When you release the mouse button the microphone button reverts to the default setting and the software works in listening mode If you click the lock button once the microphone button stays pushed in so that you don t have to keep the mouse button pressed while talking To release this function click the button again Classic audio mode If you want to continue using the normal audio function with separate buttons for listening and speaking then set the MODE 0 parameter in CamTel INI in the AUDIO section see Audio mode AUDIO on page 258 60 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide When the speaker button is activated the audio data being transmitted from the transmitter are output through the sound card of the receiver PC listening When the microphone button is activated the audio data being transmitted from the transmitter are output through the sound card of the receiver PC listening Depending on the application you can activate or deactivate the listening and speaking functions under Recording settings Audio see Audio on page 190 Quality of audio transmission The quality of audio transmission will be significantly influenced by the other components of the audio system e g cables microphone and speaker as well as their physical arrangement 26936_02 61 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTe
442. uildg back side E Relays f PTZ control J Building front p E J Buildg back side W Serial channel f Video out IV Delivery entrance 2 s J Buildg right side Extras Upload 7 Download J Buildg left side N p J Buildg right side N C Display camera of latest alarm Display camera of latest image recording OK Cancel Site archive state The video output can be operated in three modes e Sequencer mode e Display camera of latest alarm e Display camera of latest image recording 7 16 0 1 Sequencer mode Automatic camera Select Sequencer mode if you want to switch either one input or several switching video inputs in rotation to the output Camera 1 4 10 Select the cameras that you want to include in sequencer mode s Specify how long you want the output to be switched to each camera before it switches to the next one Cam4mobile and SVR device control input The digital image transmission systems in the Cam4mobile SVR and VG series have a terminal block on the rear with a control input labelled V out Pin 8 You can control video output V out with this input as follows e The control input is permanently closed switched to ground Sequencer mode is suspended and the current camera remains switched to the output Sequencer mode is resumed 10 seconds after the input opens e The control input switches from the open to closed state switched to ground The next camera in
443. upported When transmitting decimal numerical values amaximum of only 100 presets position 0 to 99 can be activated The standard setting is Off The extended number of presets primarily allows for the control of dome specific special functions Note Presets can also start special functions depending on the system used This for the most part affects presets with higher numbers For more detailed information please refer to the manual for your pan and tilt system and for your dome camera respectively Alarm Off EOE i In the Alarm column you choose between the options On or Off standard setting If the On option is activated the image transmitter signals an alarm The alarm is camera selective and CamControl LITE displays a corresponding message in the status bar Online Alarm IDS Camera 1 e Online Alarm alarm panel camera name In the event of an alarm the relevant camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same way as the message syntax of camera alarms Relay In the Relay column you choose between the options Off standard setting Relay 1 or Relay 2 Relay 1 and Relay 2 are standard names of relays that can be modified in the Relay menu see Relays on page 192 if necessary If you select one of the relay names the selected relay can be connected The switching of the relay controlled via alarm panel messages fails if a fixed function such as Closed while alarm enabled Clos
444. us of the CAPI interface When operating please observe these displays they can be very helpful in locating the problem General Errors Faults Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Initialise modem Modem ISDN TA is 1 Switch on the modem message freezes for 15 not switched on ISDN TA 20 seconds and is Modem ISDN TA is 2 Replace the modem ISDN terminated with an error defective or incorrect TA or carry out an update message Firmware Check the commands in the Initialisation string is init string not accepted by the Test the COM port with Modem ISDN TA another device and program COM port is e g mouse or modem and defective Hyper Terminal Incorrect or defective 5 Replace the cable V 24 cable 26936_02 301 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Error Fault at the Possible Causes at PC Remedy Receiver PC Receiver Transmitter list does not 1 Faulty receiver 1 Receiver settings Port A appear setting Activate CAPI TCP IP 2 Null modem cable is depending on the remote connected communication device being used or set the Mode to normal Connect the modem ISDN TA using the original model cable Dial button is deactivated Incorrect configuration Receiver settings Port A Activate CAPI TCP IP depending on the remote communication device being used or set the Mode to normal Errors Faults sorted by Type of Transmission
445. user name and password System access If you select System access then the user in question is authorised to modify Receiver options see Receiver Software Settings starting on page 71 Modify transmitter index Only if the Modify transmitter index option was selected will the user listed be able to add modify or delete transmitter entries see Adding changing or deleting transmitter entries starting on page 90 Use this option to prevent unauthorised users from viewing changing adding or deleting transmitter entries 74 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide New user In the New user field enter the name of a new user and then click Add user to include the user in User Management The maximum length for a user name is 20 characters You can only assign a user name once If another user has this name already a new entry is not added The existing entry is displayed instead Once the first user has been created a username must be entered to start and close the software in the future You can enter a maximum of 100 users for the CamControl LITE software Note New users are granted full system access by default Before you block access make certain that there is at least one user with system access If you forget your password or there is no user with system access so that you can t either start the software or change the settings anymore you must reinstall the software see Installing the Soft
446. ut it can be helpful to delete the existing zones and copy these settings to your device 7 10 Alarms The Alarms node contains the following configuration menus Alarm inputs Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication and for CamTel VG and CamTel SVR devices only Pre alarm In the case of CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series devices without HYBRID Card 4 only the Alarm inputs Camera control in put and Video loss dialogues are available E Alarms Alarm inputs Pre alarm Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position authentication 7 10 1 Alarm inputs Open the Alarm inputs tab from the menu under the Alarms node The digital image transmission systems are equipped with several inputs that can carry out various control and notification functions In addition to the camera control inputs described in Camera control inputs see Camera control inputs on page 151 every transmitter is equipped with e an alarm enable input e an alarm input and e atamper input All of which you can configure in this dialogue window 26936_02 145 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis ee E e Alarm inputs Pre alarm Site Archive Camera control inputs Motion detection Video loss Camera position aut_4 gt User Arm 7 Disarm input Date amp Time 7 3 Triggered manually or by software E Connections Camera set
447. utomatic null modem detection e Range 0 off check for null modem cable 1 0n no null modem cable connected e It may be necessary to deactivate automatic null modem detection in Normal operating mode under Receiver options Port A to ensure correct operation with certain modems see Port A on page 80 Note The entry for deactivating automatic null modem detection only effects the Normal operating mode It does not apply to any other operating mode 8 2 4 3 Archive ARCHIV Snapshot pictures 26936_02 SNAPSHOTPATH D IMAGES snapshot pictures from the transmitter archive You can save the current image in the transmitter archive in JPEG format with CamDisc VG HNVR CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc HNVR CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile or CamServer devices The image is saved in the directory C CAMCONTROL LITE SNAPSHOT or YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_ PROGARMNAME SNAPSHOT by default You can change this location by modifying the SNAPSHOTPATH key SNAPSHOTPATH YOUR_DRIVE YOUR_DIRECTORY Note Please note that the disk drive designation must be included in the directory path If the drive is not included or if the directory path is invalid the images may not be saved under certain circumstances 249 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 8 2 4 4 Extra EXTRA Auto disconnect on AUTODISCONNECT 0 Automatic disconnection on alarm alarm e Range 0 off 1 0n default e For devices you can specify u
448. utton You can define up to five Privacy zones per camera input If the defined Privacy zones have not yet been transmitted to your HeiTel device you can remove these again by right clicking on the corresponding marking Note Privacy zones should not overlap if at all possible and should also not be too large as this can reduce the processing speed of your device When using CamDisc VG Cam4mobile VG CamServer VG CamDisc SVR Cam4mobile and CamServer devices you can specify whether the Privacy zones only apply to live images or to live images and recording for each camera input Only live images nly live images Live images and recording This option is not available for CamTel VG and CamTel SVR transmitters The pre alarm images will also include blocked out areas if Privacy zones are defined You can select from one of 15 colours to indicate the Privacy zones for the transmitter ned 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Deleting Privacy To delete these zones click Delete privacy zones This removes newly zones defined zones from the image immediately Please note that any Privacy zones that were defined and confirmed in a previous configuration procedure will remain in effect until you confirm your new configuration by clicking OK and then copy the new settings to your device by clicking OK again in the Recorder settings window If you wish to add additional Privacy zones to a camera inp
449. vailable irrespective of the selected camera in the transmitter specific R01 file the corresponding control elements are shown to the right of the relay button of devices These control elements involve a drop down list for selecting the function and a button for activating deactivating the previously selected function TEN Light on First select the required function for the button from the dropdown list You can then switch this function on and off by clicking the button With the exception of zoom viewing mode the control elements for global switching procedures are available for the entire duration of the connection 58 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Configuration of control elements Global switching procedures are configured in a transmitter specific R01 file see Function and structure of R01 files on page 262 4 8 3 1 CIO Adapter relays as global switching elements If a ClO Adapter is connected to the video system the eight CIO Adapter relays are displayed as global switching elements Relay selection Using the dropdown menu you select the relay concerned and switch it using the button below as described above Designation of the relay buttons The standard naming the relay buttons for the CIO Adapter is relay 1 to relay 8 However you can change the naming of the buttons in the R01 file see Variables to rename the relay of the CIO Adapter on page 266 26936_02 59
450. ve on page 63 Sample calculations for determining archive size for individual calls Network connection TCP IP Image size 20 kilobytes 25 images s Network connection TCP IP Image size 5 kilobytes 25 images s ISDN connection PSTN connection Image transmission via network LAN 100 MBit s Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Approximately 512000 bytes of image data per second are received over a network connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 512000 bytes s 600 s 292 97 MB Image transmission via network LAN 100 MBit s Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Approximately 128000 bytes of image data per second are received over a network connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 128000 bytes s 600 s 73 24 MB Image transmission via ISDN 1 B channel Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Approximately 8000 bytes of image data per second are received over an ISDN connection A 10 minute connection results in a total of 600 seconds per call The archive size per call ASC is calculated as follows ASC 8000 bytes s 600 s 4 8 MB Image transmission via PSTN analogue telephone line Desired recording length 10 minutes per call Approximately 3000 bytes of image da
451. ve video settings E Mai 4 gt Camera name Live e quality 1 Camera 1 720 288 x Internal ISDN TA Mode 2 Camera 2 3 Camera 3 al 3 ee 128 80 4 Camera 4 720 288 xf 5 Camera 5 720288 gt 6 Camera 6 r2o 2e8 x 7 Camera 7 720 238 8 Camera 8 720238 x 9 Camera 9 720 238 10 Camera 10 720 238 f Cancel Live quality for multi view 7 Quad Ten Site archive state 512 256 512 256 Help Conditional refresh Groups M On Live transmission quality Live quality for multi view 26936_02 For each camera you can select seven levels of image quality for live image transmission from the Live transmission quality drop down list The preset value is the quality 720 288 The higher the transmission quality of the video images the greater the amount of data to be transmitted per image and the lower the refresh rate Select a suitable quality level to achieve the appropriate balance between refresh rate and image quality For IP cameras the Live transmission quality cannot be programmed because the images supplied are transferred in the original resolution This option is not enabled for these cameras In the drop down lists for Groups Quad and Ten you can select the desired resolution and quality for the various multiple image views as per the live cameras images The same principle applies here The hi
452. ved in the transmitter archive because they play back more quickly Select Record preview images if you want to use the preview feature in the archive see Accessing the Site Archive on page 34 No preview images are recorded for devices belonging to the CamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series without HYBRID Card 4 The option is not shown in the device settings For devices of theCamDisc HNVR CamDisc VG HNVR series with HYBRID Card 4 preview images can only be recorded for activated analogue camera channels The option is displayed in the recorder settings in this case If for the CamDisc VG Cam4mobile CamServer VG CamDisc SVR and CamServer devices images of IP cameras are recorded on a single camera track the Record preview images option can be enabled However no images are recorded of the appropriate resolution 179 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Warning on overrun Overwrite protection Select Overwrite protection to prevent older images from being replaced by more recent images Threshold warning Inthe Warning at field you can specify the capacity level at which you want to be notified in order to be able to take appropriate action This notification takes place in several ways The error relay is activated An appropriate entry is made in the device logfile see Accessing the transmitter logfile on page 46 A message is displayed when you access the Site Archive transmitter archive s
453. vent recording always enabled function is used see Combined continuous and event recording on page 177 the extended configuration of the continuous recording can only be set to a limited degree Extended continuous recording with a Soyal Card Reader Triggering via the Soyal Card Reader is caused in the extended continuous recording by the falling edge for camera track 1 For the other camera tracks triggering is not possible via this card reader ee eee Contact status i Closed Opening Edge Open ie Closing Edge Rec method trigger Off or Permanent x On X Recording interval s fi as rf th Number of images 1 10 _ 700 Example of triggering In the example shown above 100 images are recorded as fast as possible if a transaction is triggered at the card reader Configuration using the falling edge Closing Edge e Number of images 100 e Rec interval recording interval O means as fast as possible e Rec mode trigger On The corresponding control input Control in1 is evaluated at the same time as the card reader and can also trigger image recording 26936_02 189 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 12 Audio If the optional audio card is installed you can transmit audio data with CamControl LITE and your device see Audio transmission on page 60 and in some circumstances you can also record audio data see Audio recording o
454. ver side 98 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide e lf atransmitter exists in the transmitter list multiple times redundancy IP ISDN then the entry created in a group is taken into consideration when establishing a connection from the transmitter side If this criteria is not unique then the entry found first is taken into consideration Multiple entries should be avoided If for reasons of redundancy transmitters are entered multiple times then the entry with the main connection path in the group should be taken and the redundant back up connection as an individual transmitter 6 9 5 Device detection in local area network With the function Device detection in local area network the CamControl LITE software offers you a comfortable option e todetect newly installed HeiTel devices within a local network and to add these to the transmitter list or e toupdate in the transmitter list the IP address entries of transmitters that automatically obtain an IP address DHCP in the local network or where its IP address has changed LAN device autodetection The LAN device autodetection is activated in the transmitter directory either with a right click in the transmitter list or via the button Add In both cases a context sensitive popup menu will open see Popup menu on page 95 Add new group Add new transmitter Cut transmitter Demo CamDisc svr10 1 IP Ctrl x LAN device autodetection In this popup
455. vice User Camera name Active Privacy zones Date amp Time Connections Camera settings 1 PTZ Camera Always X Adjust zones Camera groups sea sani 2 Main Entrance Only if not armed X dust zor Alarms Site archive 3 Xtralis Building Adjust zones Audio Relays PTZ control 4 Xtralis Parking Always diust zone Serial channel ie 5 PTZIP cam backyard Always x just 2c Extras ga 4 Upload Download 6 PTZStrecke 1 Jaws o dust zor Firmware update IP Camera HYBRID Card 4 7 Always X djust PIR ate i 8 Always x djust zone OK FER s Always x just zone Site archive state 10 Always sd just zone Help The privacy zones function can work in three different modes e Always Means the adjusted zones are active at any time e Only if not armed Means in case the device is armed the privacy zones are deactivated e Off after alarm until disarm The complete image is visible after an alarm until device is disarmed 26936_02 143 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 144 Configuring Privacy Zones Defining zones After selecting a camera to configure by clicking Adjust zones the Configure Privacy Zones window opens Privacy zones are defined by clicking in one corner of the area to be defined as a privacy zone and then dragging the mouse over the desired rectangular area while holding the left mouse b
456. viders The use of asymbolic address can be particularly practical for contacting a transmitter at a continually changing IP address for example with a DSL connection You can decide the dialling string to be used for dialling out with Prefix 1 or Prefix 2 In general only one dialling prefix is used In this case select Prefix 1 If you are operating both analogue transmitters and ISDN transmitters and are using an ISDN TA that supports both analogue and ISDN connections you can specify one prefix for analogue connections and another for ISDN connections and assign them to the appropriate transmitters in Receiver options Port A Consult the guide for your ISDN TA to find out whether such dialling control is possible and how to use it By selecting CAPI you instruct the program to establish the connection to this transmitter via the CAPI or the internal ISDN card of the PC see Operation with ISDN cards CAPI or CAPI sharing over the network on page 81 In such a way you can easily differentiate between transmitters to be dialled via CAPI or via the serial interface and a local modem ISDN TA If you don t want to establish any connections via the COM interface you should deactivate operation via the serial interface by selecting Off from the Mode drop down list in Receiver settings Port A In this case it is not absolutely necessary that you select CAPI in the Transmitter data dialogue box This area displays the serial number o
457. ware on page 7 6 3 Extras The Extras menu allows you to change the following parameters Previously you were only able to set these using the configuration file CamTel INI see Configuration file with modifiable keys on page 248 Receiver options Options m Time synchronisation Online view m View at start of connection Mainscreen 7 I Zoom window m Predefined cameras Mainscreen amp Fullscreen Quadro fi v Application window IT Application as on top window when changed please restart the software USB I Transmitter index with USB Node Time synchronisation Synchronise device time to PC time If you activate the option to Synchronise device time to PC time each successful connection to a current HeiTel device will synchronise the internal clock to the valid clock time for your PC Directly after loading its own configuration data the device applies the PC clock time see Time synchronisation TIMESYNC on page 248 Online view View at start of connection Mainscreen Mainscreen Quadscreen Ten Fullscreen Inthe View at start of connection area you can use the assigned pull down menu to select the display option that CamControl LITE should use once the connection is established see Changing screen view on page27 By activating the option Zoom window CamControl LITE is opened as a zoom window instead of
458. ware on the camera automatically toggles When regions with extensive motion or pronounced changes to images are being monitored this function can only be used to a limited extent Under adverse conditions the camera channel permanently toggles Requirements e HeiTel devices with the following serial numbers e CQXXXXXX CVXXXXXX MQxxxxxx MVxxxxxx NVXXXXXX WBxxxxxx WCXxxxxx WDxxxxxx WSxxxxxx WVXXXXXX e Device firmware V1 60 or higher 252 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Activate online motion ONLINEMOTION_ON online motion detection activated detection e Range of values 0O Off deactivated default 1 On activated e Inthe basic configuration online motion detection is deactivated To activate it a corresponding entry in CamTel INI may need to be added Note Online motion detection can only be activated or deactivated globally e The integrated motion detection is not designed for outdoor recordings and should therefore be reserved for indoor cameras e Online motion detection has not been developed for multiple views Operate the CamControl LITE software using this function in a single view zoom full image Zoom window Defining cameras for ONLINEMOTIONCAM x Bit coded value information online motion detection e x corresponds to bit 0 camera 1 bit 1 camera 2 e Range of values 0 to 1023 Sample values sum of individual camera values for x e Only camera 1 x
459. when the connection has closed Formatting time depends on the size of your hard disk drive and the device cannot be dialled during this time It takes about two minutes to format a 200 GB hard disk drive The passwords for the image archive and the transmitter logfile are also deleted during formatting Notes e If you have previously saved your archive settings by selecting Save as configuration profile it is a good idea to select Load configuration profile in addition to Format HDD Without a saved profile the factory settings of the device will be loaded If you reset your image archive to its factory settings refer to the relevant information in your product guide the saved configuration profile will be deleted Delete logfile Select Delete logfile to immediately delete the transmitter logfile during an active connection and to create Logfile cleared as the first entry The option external RAID allows you to use an external RAID system via the eSATA interface depending on the VideoGateway Please note that you need the additional product key RAID ID to have this option available Boot mode With the introduction of firmware 4 02 and the CamControl LITE software version 4 12 the option boot mode is supported for CamDisc VG CamServer VG CamDisc VG HNVR and Cam4mobile VG 2c These VideoGateways can support HeiTel coded external hard drives alternatively Boot mode IV Search for internal HDD first The option s
460. with lt CRLF gt CR go to beginning of line hex OXOD LF line break hex OX0A C4 X fe Timer call at CamDisc svr4 3 09 12 2005 12 26 17 Timer call at CamDisc svr4 3 09 12 2005 12 26 09 0 Pictures Connection closed 6 09 12 2005 12 26 09 Timer call at CamDisc svr10 2 09 12 2005 12 26 01 0 Pictures Connection closed 09 12 2005 12 26 01 Timer call at CamDisc svr10 1 09 12 2005 12 24 43 336 Pictures Connection closed 09 12 2005 12 23 44 Confirmation of alarm 09 12 2005 12 23 43 Alarm call from CamDisc svr10 1 09 12 2005 12 22 01 1210 Pictures Connection closed 09 12 2005 12 20 01 Timer call at CamDisc svr10 1 09 12 2005 12 17 21 176 Pictures Connection closed 5 09 12 2005 12 17 06 Call at CamDisc svr10 1 09 12 2005 12 16 55 89 Pictures Connection closed 09 12 2005 12 15 27 Call at CamDisc svr10 1 09 12 2005 12 15 17 136 Pictures Connection closed 19 09 12 2005 12 15 06 Call at CamDisc svr10 1 To hide the event list click Hide list 4 4 6 Closing the connection If you want to end the connection click Hang up 26936_02 21 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 5 The central control panel The following section describes major functions views and display variations available during an active connection Heie Hang up View Setup Site Archive Log file Audio tracks Building Front za ee e AXIS 35 96 Test 1 AXIS 35 97 Testt 2 AXIS 35 98 Test 3
461. with lt update_all_svr_158 bin gt Please check all settings after the update Cancel After the firmware file has been verified successfully you can start the programming of the transmitter by clicking OK x Transmitter will now be programmed Please wait appr 25 sec In exceptional cases the message Transmission error Device is not being programmed will appear during the verification of the firmware file You should still continue the process after the device has restarted automatically you should select the firmware version again to see if your device now reports the correct firmware version see Device on page 114 The device is reset automatically and then restarted The whole process takes several minutes Check the settings after selecting the device again 26936_02 215 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 7 22 Cl Adapter and CIO Adapter The Cl Adapter tab offers you the option where applicable of programming actions for changes of specific control inputs of a connected Cl Adapter Control Input Adapter or CIO Adapter Control Input Output Adapter The CI Adapter menu entry is only displayed if a Cl Adapter or a CIO Adapter has been recognised on the serial interface of your device Configuration Serial channel Extending the alarm functions Adjusting to the ClO Adapter 216 In order for the Cl Adapter or CIO Adapter to work with your HeiTel transmitter
462. ws to detect connected PIRs configure PIRs in detail and checking the actual PIR state The devices are supporting the walk test function using iPIR In case of alarms caused by a PIR alarm details are available Details concerning PIR configuration different PIR types Walk test should be found within the ADPRO PIR documentation 3 r e l owe sea ul Recorder settings Die gute 1061 o oe a oe ee a eee eee Ml PIR Device PIR mode Walk test User Serial channel Date amp Time Mion emis M On Pott 5555 2 E Connections Camera settings Camera groups PIR Enabled Name Presence Time outs Packet errors PIR state Motion 1 PRO E 18WH Yes 0 0x00100000 Privacy zones i Alarms i On No 5 0 Site archive 3 lon No 5 0 Audio Relays 4 On PRO 45DH Yes 0 0 0x00080000 PT conto 5 on PRO 45 Yes 0 0 000080000 Serial channel Video out 6 On PRO 18 Yes 0 0 0x00080000 E Alarm panel Log file QO Wak test Configuration Discover PIR Delete packet ewors Extras Upload Download 1 PRO E 18WH IR867 Firmware update IP Camera wie Details Alarm Trigger event Camera Preset Infrared Off 4 Off Presence Ci h1 Off Off 2 Off OK I General setae Creep zone ch 2 Off Off 4 Off Camera Preset Ev p Cancel 3 z or x Site archive state Double knock Off lt gt Camera control input 1 0001 xl PIR mode Activates or deactiva
463. x Camera settings Device usar i Camera name Brightness Contrast Colour Date amp Time p E Connections m geepeen 1 M Camera1 100 z 100 H mon Camera groups L Motion detection zones z of Pai cones 2 v Camera 2 100 I 100 fot F On Alarms 1 1 Site archive 3 M Camera3 100 100 M On Audio jes Relays A PTZ control 4 Camera 4 100 a 100 V Gr Serial channel 1 Video out Eviss 5 M CameraS 100 100 I M On Upload Download E aa Pa Firmware update 6 Camera 6 100 3 fioo M On ET 7 M Camera 100 i 100 i M On os T a 8 i Camera 8 100 i 100 I IV On PEE 9 M Camera 9 100 Im 100 I M On FR 10 Camera 10 100 fico H mo Help Activation Select the check box directly in front of the camera name to enable the corresponding input and transmit an associated video signal Use only registered inputs for optimum efficiency If a camera input is deactivated no pictures will be recorded for the camera in question and potential video signal failure will not be monitored Camera name Enter the name of your cameras in these fields CamControl LITE will use the name entered here as the camera name This name is used to label camera buttons on the central control panel and to allocate images in the archives 138 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Brightness and Brightness an
464. y 26936_02 17 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis 4 4 Establishing a connection With CamControl LITE you can establish a connection to transmitters carry out tours automatically and process incoming calls alarms or have them processed 4 4 1 Establishing a connection To establish a connection to a transmitter click Elst in the central control panel on the left Select the desired transmitter from the alphabetically sorted Transmitter list in the Transmitter index dialogue box x EN ZN B PEF Transmitter list 27 6000 e amp USB direct connection tr Demo CamDisc svr10 1 IP Demo CamDisc svrl0 1 ISDN FR Demo CamDise svr10 2 IP PTZ Demo CamDise svr10 2 ISDN PTZ FH Demo CamDisc svr4 4 IP POS B Demo CamDisc svr4 4 ISDN POS B Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 IP Demo CamDisc svr4 s 3 ISDN Demo CamTel svr10 1 IP Demo CamTel svr10 1 ISDN B Demo CamTel svr10 2 IP T Demo CamTel svr10 2 ISDN T Demo CamTel svr4 3 1P Demo CamTel svr4 3 ISDN B Demo CamTel svr4 4 IP FR Namn CamTel swr HA ISMN zi Modify Add Delete Dial Cancel Help Select the transmitter you want to connect to from the transmitter list in the Transmitter index dialogue box Clicking Dial initiates a call to the selected transmitter Double clicking the desired transmitter entry also initiates dialing n If you click the triangle next to V4 an additional menu with the ten last dialled t
465. y Xtralis 7 10 3 Pre Alarm viewer User interface The PreAlarmViewer is started automatically by the CamControl LITE software in case of an alarm and an available pre alarm archive A tray Icon E shows that the application is running You can close it by clicking with the right mouse button on the tray icon and select Exit in the pop up menu If an pre alarm archive is available a new window does pop up and shows the pre alarm archive Up to 3 cameras are simultaneously shown depends on the device configuration The alarm camera is always the first playback starts automatically for it and the linked cameras will be added after the transmission of their pre alarm archives has started The window contains a control bar for archive evaluation at the bottom and there is also an pre alarm bar with slider available for graphical visualization and quick picture access green pre alarm area red alarm area yellow post alarm area corresponding frames around the camera pictures show also these areas To control individual cameras check or uncheck the Enabled checkbox next to the pre alarm bar Alarm date time Camera no and name Date time of actual shown picture EN Picture no Picture count v 2015 06 28 140306 Enabled 2013 06 28 14 03 03 a imc ec ew Goa SS First dateftime oo at Last date time JN j PX Pa j ki d rA Dk Alarm camera First picture Previous picture Start
466. y closed BS 8418 options in the Contact column any change in status of which should trigger one of the functions configured above Preset Alarm Trigger event If the Normally closed BS 8418 option is selected a short circuit or interruption in the lines to the control contact will cause a tamper alarm The alarm is camera selective and CamControl LITE displays a corresponding message in the status bar e Online Tamper camera name triggered control input Online T amper alarm Camera 8 26 In the event of an alarm the relevant camera may be switched to display and the reason for the alarm is displayed in the same way as the message syntax of camera alarms In addition to camera names the control input of the CIO Adapter that has been triggered is shown in parenthesis Next transmit the configuration data to your HeiTel image transmitter with OK Display of triggered inputs of the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter When running the CI Adapter or CIO Adapter on HeiTel video systems the triggering of inputs assigned to cameras in accordance with the requirements given above are indicated accordingly In all multi image displays Quadscreen Ten Camera Group signalling takes place with a red frame see Activity messages from cameras in the multi image display on page 25 whilst in the individual screen display the colour of the relevant camera name changes from black to red see Activity messages from cameras on page 25
467. y more data The video system signals this state by means of the flashing yellow video signal LEDs depending on the device type V1 V2 V4 V10 The device remains in this mode for as long as Aux in2 is activated e If activation is interrupted via Aux in2 the HDD is reactivated and recording is restarted in accordance with the device programming Independently of Aux in2 the HDD remains for at least 10 seconds in standby mode In this state the device can be safely powered down without this hindering the functionality of the HDD Switching off the video Switch off the video system before removing or replacing the HDD When the HDD is in standby mode neither video data nor audio data where applicable is recorded Nor are any logfile entries written Additional functions of your video system will also be deactivated while the HDD is inactive such as for example the set up of alarm and receiver connections 166 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Safely powering down Cam4mobile Revision 5 or higher via the internal circuit Internal connection of Timer input and Aux in2 Internal connection of Timer input and Aux in2 12 24 VDC Main Timer l 1 For Cam4mobile devices of revision 5 or higher see serial number sticker at the top of the device or on the HDD insertion Timer input and Aux in2 are internally connected For these devices the adjacent wiring of the Timer input in acc
468. y wish to connect to your transmitter via TCP IP select Off from the Mode drop down list This releases the serial port for other applications or for the serial channel 80 26936_02 HeiTel by Xtralis CamControl LITE Software Guide Operation with ISDN cards CAPI or CAPI sharing over the network CAPI 2 0 Select CAPI 2 0 if you want to use your internal ISDN card to connect to your transmitters If necessary you can also use an ISDN resource released in the network A relevant CAPI driver LAN CAPI must be installed MSN Enter your MSN Multiple Subscriber Number in the MSN box In general this is the telephone number without prefix used by the transmitter to dial the receiver software in the event of an alarm Always enter this MSN as far as possible if you are operating several ISDN devices at one ISDN connection These devices use the MSN to identify calls intended for them Some telephone systems also expect an MSN for outgoing calls If you cannot establish a connection with the receiver software and you receive the message Call rejected then enter your MSN as well Requirements e The receiver PC has an ISDN card e g AVM Fritz e The CAPI driver 2 0 included with the ISDN card has been correctly installed e You have an ISDN connection e The desired transmitters can be reached via ISDN For more information refer to your ISDN card s manual Note If you have transmitters that you dial into via ISDN with an
469. yed Filtering the logfile When the logfile information is written the individual events are always divided into categories Error Action or Information 26936_02 47 CamControl LITE Software Guide HeiTel by Xtralis Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard NEm Z W Action I Information If the three options Error Action and Information are enabled the logfile is displayed without any restrictions You can reduce the scope of the displayed results by disabling individual categories Another option for restricting the scope of the logfile is the time window Logfile time window While filtering see Filtering the logfile on page 47 restricts the number of displayed results by category you can also limit the timeframe using the Time window options By default the Select all option is enabled Filter Time window Search Print Clipboard V Select all Start End Restricting the time window Once you have disabled the Select all option you can limit the Time window using the date and time settings for Start and End Changes to the date and time have a direct effect on the number of events displayed Note To limit the number of events the Filter and Time window functions can be combined Searching in the logfile Using the Search function you can search for event texts in large logfiles To do this enter the search term into the input window Filter Time window Search Print
470. you can not dial your transmitter then you should first test your receiver by selecting a known working transmitter Your dealer should be able to name you an appropriate transmitter demo transmitter If you are able to establish a connection to a demo transmitter then the error may be in your transmitter see Error at Transmitter Incoming Call Step 2 on page 307 Check correct functioning of your transmitter by having your dealer call your transmitter Testing the Null Modem Connection If you have access to a transmitter with an external V 24 interface then you can begin by testing your transmitter with a null modem connection to your PC see No null modem connection possible on page 299 In this way you can make sure that the transmitter is functioning correctly without modem Testing the Data Transmission Equipment If you have experience in using data transmission equipment and PC applications then we recommend that you first test the data transmission device connected to your PC using standard Windows software e g Hyper Terminal for modems or Telnet for TCP IP networks You should test your ISDN card using the application software that came with the card Observe Display on Modem Data transmission between the PC and the modem ISDN TA as well as the connection status are often signalised by an LED display on the modem ISDN TA Monitor programs are often delivered for intemal ISDN cards these programs show the stat
471. ze Line length Delete track E Connections Camera settings 1 Vv IBIS hd 0 a 57 E Camera groups H Motion Privacy zones 2 a Pos z 0 5 m E Alarms I E Site archive 3 r Pos z fo 57 z r Video settings Passwords 4 B POS a 0 57 v sl 2 P0S ATM IBIS Keywords Adapter 5 a POS X o o 57 x B Audio Track settings 6 E POS 0 5 57 B 6 Video 1 in iji E Video 2 in B Video 3 in E 7 a POS x o a 57 z z 8 K POS x 10 H 57 X a ak eam Be i a Gael 3 a Pos x oS 57 be a Site archive state 10 m PoS z a 4 57 Z m l Set values for IBIS recording Recording With the Recording option you can active the recording of transaction data for the respective camera track Type FPOS ATM IBIS Soyal Card Read With the Type option you can specify whether transaction data to be recorded is POS or ATM or IBIS or Soyal data A correct assignment of the type is important for the later evaluation of the transaction data ATM data is supplied solely by certain cash dispenser machines and access control systems Please also note the information in the device specific supplementary information for the POS ATM Adapter IBIS data is received via the IBIS Adapter via the transparent serial interface preferably from a Cam4mobile device For this application note also the programming of the serial interface see IBIS function with Cam4mobile on page 198 Soyal data is only received using a Soyal Card Reader

CamControl LITE 4.41 Manual - bei der HeiTel Digital Video GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents